UNIVERSITY OF PEN NSYLVANIA
THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND
OPTATIVE MOODS IN THE NON-
᾿ς LITERARY PAPYRI
ROBERT CHISOLM HORN
A THESIS
IN GREEK
PRESENTED TO THE FACULTY OF THE GRADUATE SCHOOL IN
PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
PHILADELPHIA
1926
FEES
:
ἘΣ ΞΞΞΕΣΙ
ΣΞΕΣΣΣ:
ΣΦ ἐφ τὸς
ἸΣΟΣΣΣΥΣΥΣ ΣΤΥ ἘΤΤΣΕΣΟΣ
ἘΞ
GROWER ὝΠϑο OEM
Wi Ul ΎΠΙΝΕΒ
Se τς
JUN 2 = 1927
aN
CIGAL 5 ἌΝ»
THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND
OPTATIVE MOODS IN THE NON-
LITERARY PAPYRI
A
χ'
«(δ 0
A THESIS
IN GREEK
PRESENTED TO THE FACULTY OF THE GRADUATE SCHOOL OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT
OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE
OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
ROBERT Ba a ec
PHILADELPHIA
1926
PREFACE
Through the study of the Greek of the New Testament and
an interest in the life and activities of the common people I was
led to a study of Greek papyri. Nor was I disappointed in the
wealth of material which they supplied. I owe a debt of grati-
tude to the professors of the Department of the Classics at
Harvard University for training in the methods of research and
to the professors of the Department of Greek of the University
of Pennsylvania for further training and direction. I am
especially grateful to Professor William N. Bates, of the latter
institution, for his criticism and aid; nor shall I forget the en-
couragement given by him and his colleagues. I wish also to
acknowledge my deep appreciation of the many courtesies ex-
tended to me by the libraries in which I have done my work,
particularly Harvard, Princeton, and the University of Penn-
sylvania.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY
PRL EORACLION Sepa ct ant se κι ΘΕ εκ ΓΙ ἐπ κω 7
US Enid Στ Ae ce sei RMR RR a bap isk lg eet ABSA, 9
Bibliography
aD Viline LOxca ste cor Weston δ ἀχο me are lc ois. psa ace noe a ae tee ee 12
SHLD IGCIeN CAL ys WOE Kee ΠΡ s.ch 2 cen lie ss 2 cig a ae 17
EP HOQTRE ICS Warne ae ora αν ΚΡ ΚΣ ΑΒ ome ἐπα ak ὙΌΣ Τὺ: 21
RIL ΤΠ LCA ΟΕ ΚΘ a Merce πὸ πο 22
ΤῸΝ ΧΟ Wom ee (ΤΩ ΝΥ ἀν eee ha ae ae ae Re 24
II
THE SUBJUNCTIVE Moop
MIC LIV OLINGaneh 6 cial oo ρον τ oes eet EE Ce 26
SHEA) ΠΟΙ NP CN NaS ode Cie ge aa 650s ey ba hows MERA ae eens eee 27
Purposes @onditions and Relative’/Clauses.. 1... unseen eee eee 31
EAU OOS Νά ἡ τ 6 ti u's Shs ek ν τπ τε ΟΝ τ κ 31
BEesen@Generala On ἡ σρροοροέἔψοριἔὋἐὁοΠπσπἔΕῃἌΔ Ἐᾳ[ιὁ“ὦ«ΔοὦοΕουῳν Το μιν 36
Future Protasis Ὁ
SAMUI UDCLAVE. A 2) = discs thts ss A RAS ONAN ΡΝ 38
ELEWALNUOMCUTe ἐπα δ εἶνϑι εν alte eS Chinen Uk ee wa ete ee Re 62
ἘΠ OUD UICTIVEy.". 3/%. 0) auivenpeters 6 carla να ih tert Ca Uae ea 64
ELEM ALLE TICICATIVE) 213 ὃς κύτος eee τυ MEM ο ΤΟΥ, 66
Pee ρίτως (ΕΒ ΘΟΕ ΞΕ ον ΠΝ ΓΚ or eee 67
ΤΙ
Up POR a ὃς ΠΡ Ὁ ΤΕΣ ἘΚ τ ὁ 89
τα EES are ae etn κυ ον τ πάν Saw E Coe ee 89
Seer seiyee ause: Of PurpOseke ae πΠορΠὰ iors, gauss 3 eects taint inden 91
mins with, Independent: SUBjJUNCLIVE..0.... 50h se ee eck ees sed cnne ss 92
Prohibition, Subjtinctive ooo. 1. uc. suerte as wicks y aceite att teisie Bieta eiv ooe 93
Present imperatives)... cs cisue' cb cke cite obs cle wal cleronetc read cictrete hetrereneters 100
Aorist’ Imperatives ΡΝ os τυ πο ἘΝ eines oo Sete alae ΡΠ: “100
Pres. Sabjtinctive. 3.0/5 cist os πον Penance en meee 101
Clauses. of Fear‘and: Caution :...-2)... sas τον το 101
Object; Clauses; 'Exhortation, δὲ τ πο nes ane nee ee ee 103
Object: Clatises Effort 55, 50.5 oi, wise sine sere ae wea ee ete She ly GO atatea ite a od 116
Independent Subjuntive of Command... 2... ..5..<5.: 020» sensslee Wome 120
Subjunctive for. Future Indicative.i2.. /. ....s2< 5 eee ssine ten 124
Apparent Subjunctive for Indicative; o...-.....-:-5 «s+. eon ee 124
Temporal Clauses) Oia sevice sauces ae by. b'vis bo hols oles oie ale ane 126
Present: General Fas ae pee betes ahaa o% « wisceis ole ΣΕ Τρ ΡΝ 126
Future sl empotalie ays. chs c.cl ca baa) acc oe Πρ eee 127
Before srr crac seis cic ΤῊΝ ΟΝ eta yaa 128
When Sia tein coca le Ὁ ον ει ete δον τους ele δηλ τ ΕΝ Te ieee ace 129
VAS ROOT AS 8S ee ae sn idiaiglc'm wip, παν ον aie ie ate ah 6 ae ey eee eee 133
LY otal cis x Gas Ἀν τ Wage erate (OO a ne er 136
IV
Tue OptativE Moop
Cntative MOO 5.0.0! sis Gs 5 ad ei ain canis aecu ele Wilt ΠΗ 143
Barpose 00 i o's so tole io. wie ba centtieth vlna Sete date Miotete cae cg eee ae 143
General Relative s.6 oodles cao dogs ace sale ce 144
CAL Share ΑΙ ρΠ,. Ππ| On 145
PROMpPOTAl Seid 5 seks os hs ahe wes % ie weld hacele & ven tein Oe ees ee 145
WBS EY oes lm sah stn Wien sous 870%5, 0-10 WANS. 6G DSane, oidye ce, che a aie Sk ies itera in ον Ὄ- 147
Potentials: cc. 5 dines.» ve as fe Ovi Rielais eS eee ie Se 155
Indirect; Discourse... 5 3): i. osisca pide e oa. < «(eda Seles ha ΝΣ 159
Possible Protasis 2). <..'0 ss sijue's 2's 2s.do0b She ua 0 tee πρὸ τς 161
INTRODUCTION
Most of the effort in papyrology has necessarily been devoted
to the editing and publication of the accumulating material;
some progress has been made in criticism of the published col-
lections and corrections made. Preisigke’s Berichtigungsliste, a
collection of such corrections with references, is of the utmost
value. In addition, a number of convenient handbooks of
selections have appeared. Apart from the excellent grammar
of Mayser very little has been done in the way of thorough
grammatical study of the papyri. The study of prepositions
has appealed to several investigators: W. Kuhring, De praeposi-
tionum Graecarum in Chartis Aegyptiis usu quaestiones selectae,
Bonn, 1906; C. Rossberg, De praepositionum Graecarum 15
chartis Aegyptiis Ptolemaeorum aetatis usu, Jena, 1909; Emily
H. Dutton, Prepositional Phrases in the Papyri, Chicago, 1916.
F. Voelker has treated of the accusative and the article: Papyro-
rum Graecarum syntaxis specimen (de accusativo), Bonn, 1900;
Syntax d. Griech. Papyri, I der Artikel, Progr. N. 433 des Real-
gym. zu Miinster i.W., 1903. Among other important publica-
tions should be noted the following: S. Witkowski, Prodromus
grammaticae papyrorum graecarum aetatis Lagidarum, Krakau,
1897; C. Harsing, de optativi in Chartis Aegyptits usu, Bonn,
1910;F. Ziemann, de epistularum Graecarum formulis sollemnibus
quaestiones selectae, Halle, 1911.
Mayser’s work* is so far concerned only with Sounds and
Inflections and goes only to the end of the Ptolemaic Period.
Yet it is a most pretentious piece of work and very thorough,
and when completed, will be indispensable. In the meantime
the whole field should be thoroughly studied grammatically,
since this is the very foundation of the understanding of the
language and thought. The field is comparatively new and
large; the invitation to enter and investigate is attractive.
Since the field is so large and the amount of work to be done is
1 Edwin Mayser, Grammatik der griechischen Papyri aus der Ptolemderzeit.
Laut und Wortlehre. Teubner, Leipzig, 1906.
8 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
so great, it is necessary to divide it into smaller and more con-
venient parts; only in this way can the whole work be accom-
plished. But it is hoped that if each investigator does well his
own little section, the ultimate contribution to the grammatical
understanding of the papyri will be enormous.
For these reasons I have staked out for myself a little claim,
the Use of the Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-
Literary Papyri. It seems much better to treat the whole
subject as far as time is concerned, rather than to stop with the
end of the Ptolemaic or Roman periods, though I confess the
Byzantine Age makes a very weak appeal. However, in the
interests of completeness I have considered the whole papyrologic
period, that is from about 300 B. C. to about 700 A. D. The
study of the subjunctive has not been made before; and as
Harsing has treated the optative in a dissertation which appeared
sixteen years ago and in a manner different from the one which
I have adopted, this present investigation will not be a dupli-
cation of the former. I wish here to express my appreciation of
his sound and thorough work.
I made my first experiments in this study in a paper prepared
at Harvard University several years ago; the material for my
study then was: The Use of the Subjunctive and Optative Moods
in the Letters of the Papyri. I included both private and official
letters. The present study, however, has a very much broader
foundation; it includes practically all Non-Literary Papyri. In
addition to the letters there are included: Contracts, Wills,
Leases, Rents, Sales, Receipts, Declarations on Oath, Securities,
Undertakings and Acknowledgments of various kinds, Selec-
tions of Boys (ἐπίκρισις), Mortgages, Loans, Census Returns,
Notifications, Orders, Complaints and Petitions, Reports, and
Returns of different kinds. Accounts, Land Surveys, and Taxing
Lists I have found offer practically no material for our study;
so also little or nothing is to be expected from Horoscopes.
The works on Magic I have omitted as being in a rather special
field; and I have omitted also Royal Decrees (such as P. Tebt.
5 and 6) because of their nature, not considering them essentially
non-literary. As it is, the amount of my material is very great,
and the instances collected very numerous.
Use of Subjuncitive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 9
PLAN
Of course it is necessary to treat the Subjunctive and Optative
separately. The method of presentation used by Goodwin in
his Moods and Tenses and by Burton in his Moods and Tenses of
New Testament Greek appeals to me as the most convenient and
useful; accordingly I have adopted this, and it will be found that
I follow Burton closely in some ways. Under each category of
subjunctive or optative I shall group the phrases of the same
kind in chronological order.
I have indicated the dates in this way: I, II, III mean first,
second, or third century B. C.; II-III means second or third
century B. C.; ist, 2nd, 3rd, etc., indicate first, second, third
century A. D., and so up to the seventh or eighth; 2nd-3rd
cent. indicates the second or third century A. D.; where a par-
ticular year is to be indicated, it is shown thus: 223 B. C. or 24
AaL),
I have used the abbreviations generally employed for reference
to the papyri, and the typography generally used in the publica-
tion of papyrus texts. In addition, I have used occasionally
three dashes (— — —) to indicate that a portion of text is
omitted, as unnecessary to the quotation. I have used the
asterisk (*) on the left-hand margin to indicate that these papyri
were characterized by ‘‘bad spelling.’’ There may be other
evidences also of careless or ignorant writing. Some official
records may be marked thus as well as private correspondence.
In places I have used the terms Ptolemaic, Roman, and
Byzantine as roughly covering the papyrologic period: Ptolemaic
from the earliest document, about 300 B. C., to the time of
Christ; Roman, from the birth of Christ to 300 A. D.; and
Byzantine, from the 4th century A. D. on. In general the
division is satisfactory; it would be impossible to draw a hard
and fast line anywhere. It may be noted that Maspero, after
observing that the custom is widespread of beginning the Byzan-
tine period with the reign of Diocletian, states his objections to
this, and gives reasons for beginning his Byzantine period with
395 A. D., the death of Theodosius the Great.?
2 P. Catr., Vol. I, Preface.
10 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
I hope that I may at some time be able to supplement this
investigation with a study of the other moods in the Non-
Literary Papyri; the result of such an undertaking would be a
complete study of the Moods and Tenses of the Non-Literary
Papyri.
The hope is cherished that this study may be of practical
value in several ways, these in particular:— _
(a) That it may bea contribution to grammatical knowledge by
showing the use of these important moods in non-literary records,
that is popular usage.
(b) That it may afford aid in the reconstruction of other, muti-
lated papyrus documents. Given a mutilated papyrus document
of a known type and a knowledge of the phrases common to such
documents, we can reconstruct with a good deal of probability
and much confidence. A great deal has already been done in
this line; indeed this is one of the functions and obligations of
the editor. The writer hopes the present study will make some
contribution in this field.
(c) That it may show the period when an expression was in
vogue and thereby make some contribution to the dating of
documents. However, here we should beware of drawing hasty
conclusions. On the other hand certain hypotheses may be
justified now, which later will have to be discarded; even if
such be the case, they will still have served their purpose in
guiding our investigations at present. It is only in this way
that scientific progress can be made.
For example, if I am justified in my conclusion that εὐορκοῦντι
μέν μοι εὖ εἴη flourishes during the Ptolemaic period and into the
early part of the second century A. D.; and that ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ
ὅρκῳ is used from the first to the fourth century A. D.; and
that this is modified to ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ from 325 A. D. on;
perhaps some little contribution is made under the heads of
(6) and (c).
(d) That it will afford some knowledge of the words, idioms,
and phrases of the non-literary papyri, at least as far as this can
be done by means of clauses or sentences in which the subjunctive’
and optative moods are used. These, however, are very num-
erous.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Liierary Papyri 11
(e) That it may contribute something to the study and under-
standing of expressions in the Greek of the New Testament,
but more particularly to the use of these moods by the New
Testament authors. As far as the study goes, we may find
confirmation of the modern point of view that the Greek New
Testament reveals the popular language. I hope the present
study will afford many parallels between the two.
12 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Ῥαῤγτὲ
P. Alex.
P. Alex.
P. Amh.
P. Ashmol.
P. Ausonia
P. Bas.
B. G. U.
B-Liste
(B. L.)
P. B. M.
P. Brux.
P. Cair.
P. Cair.
P. Cairo, Pr.
P. Corn.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
COLLECTIONS OF PAPYRUS TEXTS
Botti, ‘‘Papyrus ptolemaiques du Musée d’Alexandrie.”’
Bulletin de la Société archéologique d’Alexandrie, No. 2,
Alexandria, 1899,
Breccia—‘‘Papiri greci del Museo di Alessandria.”
Bull. Soc. arch. Alex., No. 9, 1907 (p. 87ff.).
The Amherst Papyri. Ed. B. P. Grenfell and A. 8.
Hunt. Part I, The Ascension of Isaiah and Other Theo-
logical Fragments, London, 1900. Part II, Classical
Fragments and Documents of the Ptolemaic, Roman, and
Byzantine Periods, London, 1901.
Mahaffy, ‘“‘On New Papyrus-Fragments from the Ash-
molean Museum at Οχίογα. The Transactions of the
Royal Irish Academy, XXXI, part 6 (1898), pp. 197ff.
Vitelli, “Tre documenti greco-egizi,'"” Ausonia II, 1907.
Cf. Wilcken, Archiv V, p. 281.
Rabel, Papyrusurkunden der éffentlichen Bibliothek der
Universitat zu Basel. 1, Urkunden in griechischen Sprache.
II, Koptischer Vertrag, von Spiegelberg.
Berlin, 1917.
Berliner Griechische Urkunden, ed. Wilcken and others.
Vol. I, 1895; Vol. II, 1898; Vol. III, 1903; Vol. IV, 1904;
Vol. V, 1919; Vol. VI, 1922.
Preisigke, F., Berichtigungsliste der griechischen Papyrus-
urkunden aus Aegypten, Berlin and Leipzig, 1922.
Greek Papyri in the British Museum, ed. Kenyon. Vol.
I, 1893; Vol. II, 1898; Vol. III, 1907; Vol. IV, 1910; Vol.
V, 1917. Also a folio volume of facsimiles.
Mayence and Seymour de Ricci, ‘‘ Papyrus Bruxellensis
I,”’ in Musée Belge VIII (1904), pp. 101ff., 117ff.
Grenfell and Hunt, Greek Papyri, Vol. X of Catalogue
des Antiquités Egyptiennes du Musée du Caire.
Maspero, Papyrus Grecs d’Epoque Byzantine, 3 volumes,
1910-1916. Catalogue des Antiquités Egyptiennes du Musée :
du Caitre, vols. 51, 54, 58, 60, 73.
Preisigke, F., Griechische Urkunden des Aegyptischen —
Museums zu Kairo, 1911.
W. L. Westermann and C. J. Kraemer, Greek Papyri
im the Library of Cornell University. Cornell University
Press, 1926.
Weidmann,
Use of Subjunctive ana Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyn 13
P. Eleph. Elephantine Papyrt, bearbeitet von O. Rubensohn. Sonder-
heft der Berliner Griechische Urkunden, 1907.
P. Fay. Fayum Towns and Their Papyri, by B. P. Grenfell,
A. 5. Hunt, and Ὁ. G. Hogarth, London, 1900.
P. Flor. Papiri Fiorentini, ed. Vitelli and Comparetti. Papiri
Greco-Egizii pubblicati dalla Reale Accademia dei Lincei,
3 vols., 1905-1915; Milano.
P. Frb. Gradenwitz, ‘ Mittheilungen aus der Freiburger Papyrus-
sammlung.” I, Literarische Stiicke, Wolf Aly, and Ptole-
maische Kleruchenurkunde, Gelzer. II, Juristische Texte
der Rémischen Zeit, J. Partsch. Sitzungsberichte der
Heidelberger Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1914 and
1916.
P. Gen. Les Papyrus de Genéve, transcrits et publiés par Jules
Nicole, Geneva, 1896-1906.
P. Giess. Griechische Papyri zu Giessen, ed. Kornemann, Eger
and Meyer, Teubner 1910-1912.
P. Goodsp. E. J. Goodspeed, Greek Papyri from the Cairo Museum,
together with Papyrt of Roman Egypt from American
Collections. The Decennial Publications of the University
of Chicago, Vol. V, 1904.
Goodspeed, E. J., “Α Group of Papyrus Texts,’ Ci.
Phil. 1, 2, Chicago, 1906,
Goodspeed, E. J., “Greek Ostraka in America,’ American
Journal of Philology, 25 (1904), 58.
Goodspeed, E. J., ‘‘Greek Documents in the Museum of
the New York Historical Society,” Mélanges Nicole, pp.
183ff.
P. Grenf. I Grenfell, B. P., An Alexandrian Erotic Fragment and
Other Greek Papyri, Chiefly Ptolemaic, Oxford, 1896.
P. Grenf. II B. P. Grenfell and A. S. Hunt, New Classical Fragments
and Other Greek and Latin Papyri, Oxford, 1897.
P. Giz. B. P. Grenfell and A. S. Hunt, ‘Ptolemaic Papyrigin
the Gizeh Museum,” Archiv fiir Papyrusforschung, Lfpp.
57ff.
P. Grad. Plaumann, G., ‘‘Griechische Papyri der Sammlung
Gradenwitz,’’ Sitzungsberichte der Heidelberger Akademie
der Wissenschaften, 1914.
P. Hal. Dikaiomata, Ausztige aus Alexandrinischen Gesetzen und
Verordnungen in einem Papyrus ... der Universitdts
141 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
P. Hamb.
P. Hauss.
P. Hawara
P. Hawara
P. Heid.
Cc. P. Herm.
P. Hernals
P. Hib.
P. Iand.
P. Kar.
(P. Chic.)
r. Leid.
P. Lips.
P. Lille
P. Ma od.
P. Mil.
Halle. Mit Einem Anhang Weiterer Papyri derselben
Sammlung. Weidmann, Berlin, 1913.
Griechische Papyrusurkunden der Hamburger Stadt-
bibliothek, ed. Paul M. Meyer, 2 vols., Teubner, Leipzig
and Berlin, 1911-1924.
Haussoullier, ‘‘ Lettre de Ptolemée ἃ Diodora,’’ Mélanges
Chatelain, 1910.
Flinders-Petrie, Hawara, Biahmu, and Arsinoe, London,
1889.
Milne, ‘‘The Hawara Papyri,” in Archiv V, pp. 378ff.
Deissmann, Die Septuaginta Papyri und andere alt-
christliche Texte. Vol. I of Veréffentlichungen aus der
Heidelberger Papyrus-sammlung. Heidelberg, 1905.
Corpus Papyrorum Hermopolitanorum, I, ed. Wessely in
Studien zur Palaeographie und Papyruskunde, V, Wien,
1905.
Jahresberichte des k. k. Staatsgymnasiums in Hernals.
Articles by Wessely, vols. XIII-XVI, Wien, 1887-1890,
The Hibeh Papyri, ed. Grenfell and Hunt, Part I,
London, 1906.
Papyri Iandanae, ed. Kalbfleisch and others.
Leipzig, 1912-1913.
Goodspeed, E. J., ‘‘Papyri from Karanis,”’ Univ. of
Chicago Studies in Classical Philology, Vol. 3, pp. 1-66,
Chicago, 1902.
Papyri Graect Musei antiquarit publict Lugduni-Batavt,
ed. C. Leemans. Tome I, 1843; Tome II, 1885.
Mitteis, L., Griechische Urkunden der Papyrussammlung
zu Leipzig. Band I, Leipzig, 1906.
Teubner,
Jouguet, Pierre, Papyrus grecs publiés sous la direction
de Pierre Jouguet, avec la collaboration de Paul Collart,
Jean Lesquier, Maurice Xoual. Institut Papyrologique
de l'Université de Lille. Paris, Tome I, Fasc. 1, 1907;
Fasc. 2, 1908; Fasc. 3, 1923. Tome II, same as Papyrus
de Magdéla.
Les Papyrus de Magdéla, ed. Jean Lesquier. Tome II. :
of Papyrus grecs de l'Institut Papyrologique de I’ Université
de Lille, Paris, 1912.
Studt della Scuola Papirologica, 4 vols., Milan, 1915--
1924. Reale Accademia Scientifico—Letteraria in Milano.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 15
P. Mon. Heisenberg und Wenger, Byzantinische Papyri in der
Réniglichen Hof- und Staatsbibliothek zu Miinchen. Part I,
Veréffentlichungen aus der Papyrussammlung zu Miinchen.
Leipzig, 1914.
OFE: The Oxyrhynchus Papyri, ed. Grenfell and Hunt, 16
vols., London, 1898-1924.
P. Path. Seymour de Ricci, ‘‘ Papyrus de Pathyris au Musée du
Louvre,’ Archiv II, pp. 515ff.
Po Par. Letronne, Les papyrus grecs du Musée du Louvre et de
la Bibliotheque Impériale, publication préparée par Le-
tronne, exécutée par W. Brunet de Presle et E. Egger.
(Notices et extraits des manuscrits de la Bibl. imp.,
Tome XVIII, Paris 1866.)
P. Petr. Mahaffy, J. P., The Flinders Petrie Papyri with Trans-
criptions, Commentaries and Index. (Royal Irish Academy,
Cunningham Memoirs, Nr. VIII, IX, XI.) Part I,
Dublin, 1891. Part II, Dublin, 1893. Appendix, Dublin,
1894. Part III, by J. P. Mahaffy and G. J. Smyly, Dublin
1905.
Po rrk. Preisigke, F., Sammelbuch griechischer Urkunden aus
(S. B.) Aegypten. Vol. I, 1915, Strassburg. Vol. II, 1, Strass-
burg, 1918. Vol. II, 2, Berlin and Leipzig, 1922.
Gabe i. Corpus Papyrorum Raineri. Vol. 1, Band I, Griechische
Texte, Rechtsurkunden, ed. Wessely, Wien, 1895. Vol.
II, Band I, Koptische Texte, ed. Krall, Wien, 1895.
P.R. Catalogus Papyrorum Raineri, Series Graeca. Part I,
Textus Graeci Papyrorum, qui in libro ‘‘Papyrus Erz-
herzog Rainer—Fiihrer durch die Ausstellung Wien-
1894’’ descripti sunt. Ed. Wessely in Studien zur Palae-
ographie und Papyruskunde, XX (1921).
Cat. Pap. Rain. Series Graeca. Pars II, Papyri N.
24858-25024 Aliique in Socnopaei Insula Scripti. Ed.
Wessely in Studien XXII (1923).
P. Rein. Papyrus grecs et démotiques recueillis en Egypte et
publiés par Théodore Reinach avec le concours de W. Spiegel-
berg et S. de Ricci. Paris, 1905.
Rey. Mél. Revillout, E., Mélanges sur la métrologie, l'économie
(P. Revill.) politique, et l'histoire de l’ancienne Egypte, avec de nombreux
textes démotiques, hiéroglyphiques, hiératiques, ou grecs
inédits ou antérieurement mal publiés. Paris 1895.
Re-edited in Archiv 11, pp. 515ff. See P. Path.
16 = Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Ryl.
P. Strasb.
(P. Str.)
Studien
P. Teb.
P. Thead.
P. Theres.
P. Tor.
(P. Taur.)
P. Vat.
P. Vat.
Greek Papyri in the Rylands Library at Manchester.
Vol. I (1911), Literary Papyri, ed. Hunt. Vol. II (1915)
Ptolemaic and Roman Documents, ed. Johnson, Martin,
and Hunt.
Meyer, Paul M., Griechische Texte aus Aegypten. I,
Papyri des neutestamentlichen Seminars der Universi-
tat Berlin. JI, Ostraka der Sammlung Deissmann.
Weidmann, Berlin, 1916. [P.S. B. for Pap. Sem. Berlin.]
Papiri Grect e Latini, ed. Vitelliand others. Pubblica-
ziont della Societa Italiana per la ricerca dei Papiri grect
ὁ latint in Egitto. Vols. I-VII, 1912-1925. [P. 8. I. for
Pap. Soc. Ital.]
Preisigke, F., Griechische Papyrus der kéniglichen
Universitdts- und Landesbibliothek zu Strassburg im Elsass,
Vol. I, 1912.
Wessely, C.—Studien zur Paldographie und Papyrus-
kunde. 23 Hefte, 1899-1924.
The Tebtunis Papyri. Vol. 1, ed. Grenfell, Hunt, and
Smyly. London, 1902. Vol. II, ed. Grenfell, Hunt, and
Goodspeed. London, 1907.
Jouguet, P., Papyrus de Théadelphie, Paris, 1911.
“Die griechischen Papyrusurkunden des Theresianums
in Wien,’’ ed. Wessely in Part I of Studien.
Peyron, Amadeo, Papyri Graeci Regii Taurinensis
Musei Aegyptii. Pars I, Taurini, 1826. Pars II, Taurini,
1829. Memorie della Reale Accademia delle Scienze di
Torino, Tom. XXXI and XXXIII.
Wilcken, U., Urkunden der Ptolemderzeit. Band I,
Papyri aus Unteragypten. Berlin und Leipzig, 1922-
1924.
Republication of some of the papyri in the collections of
the British Museum, P. Par., P. Leid, P. Vat., and a few
others.
Mai, Angelus, Classicorum auctorum e Vaticanis codi-
cibus editorum, tom. IV and V. Rome, 1833.
Peyron, Bernardino, ‘‘Papyri greci del Museo Britannico
di Londra e della Biblioteca Vaticana.’’ Memorie della
Reale Accademia delle Scienze di Torino. Serie Il. Tomo
III. Scienze moralistoriche e filologiche. Torino 1841.
[These are of little value since the publication of P. B. M.
and U. P. Z.]
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 17
Witk. Prodr. Witkowski, S., Prodromus grammaticae pap. graec.
aetatis Lagidarum. Krakau, 1897. [Text revision of P.
Tor., P. Vat., P. Leid., P. Par., and others.]
Witk. Witkowski, S., Epistulae Privatae Graecae, quae in
Papyris Aetatis Lagidarum servantur. 2nd ed., Leipzig,
1911.
[My references are to the first edition.]
COLLECTIONS OF OSTRACA
Theban Ostraca, University of Toronto Studies, Univ. of Toronto Library,
1913. Part III, Greek Texts, ed. J. G. Milne.
Viereck, P., Griechische und Gr.-Demotische Ostraka der. Universitdts- und
Landesbibliothek zu Strassburg im Elsass. Erster Band, Texte, Berlin, 1923.
Wilcken, U., Griechische Ostraka aus Aegypten und Nubien, 2 vols., Leipzig,
1899,
Zereteli, ““Griechische Ostraka in der kaiserlichen Eremitage in St. Peters-
burg,” Archiv V, pp. 170ff.
SUPPLEMENTARY WoRKS
In making the following list of books I have tried to keep in mind the inter-
pretation and understanding of the non-literary papyri; and of course I have
included the excellent handbooks and introductions to the study of the papyri.
Baikie, C. N., Egyptian Papyri and Papyrus Hunting, Revell, 1926.
Berger, Die Strafklauseln in den Papyrusurkunden (ein Beitrag zum Gr.-Aeg.
Obligationrecht), Leipzig and Berlin, 1911.
Blass, “Ein Curiosum aus Oxyrhynchos,” Hermes XXXIV (1899), pp.
312-315.
Blass, ‘‘Gr. und Lat. Palaographie,’’ Von Miiller’s Handbuch, Vol. 1.
Breccia, ““Spigolature papiracee.” Atene e Roma V (1902), pp. 573-593.
Bry, La Vente dans les Papyrus Gréco-Egyptiens. Paris, 1909.
Cronert, W., ‘“‘Adnotamenta in papyros Musei Britannici graecas maximam
partem lexicographica,” Cl. Rev. 17 (1903), pp. 26-27, and 193-198.
Crénert, W., Denkschrift betreffend eine deutsche Papyrusgrabung (auf dem
Boden gr.-rém. Kultur), Bonn, 1901.
Crénert, W., “‘Zu den Eigennamen der Papyri und Ostraka, Studien, II,
36ff.
Cronert, W., “Zur Kritik der Papyrustexte,’’ Studien, IV (1905), pp. 84-
107.
Edgar, C. C., “Selected Papyri from the Archives of Zenon.’’ Annales du
Service des Antiquités de l Egypte, XVIII-XXI.
18 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
Exler, Rev. Francis Xavier J., The Form of the Ancient Greek Letter: A
Study in Greek Eptstolography. Dissertation. Cath. Univ. of America,
Washington, 1923.
Erman and Krebs, Aus den Papyrus der Kéniglichen Museen, Berlin, 1899.
Gerhard, G. A., Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des gr. Briefs. Dissertation,
1903. Published also in Philol. N. F. 18 (1905), 27ff.
Ghedini, G., Lettere Cristiane, Milano, 1923.
Gradenwitz, O., Einfihrung in die Papyruskunde, Vol. I, Leipzig, 1900.
[Of special value for students of legal matters.]
Gradenwitz, Preisigke, and Spiegelberg, Ein Erbstreit aus dem Ptolemdischen
Aegypten, Gr. und Dem. Pap. der Wissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Strassburg t,
Els., Strassburg, 1912.
Harris, J. Rendel, ‘‘A Study in Letter-Writing,’’ The Expositor, Sept., 1898.
Hartel, W. A. von, Ueber die gr. Papyti Erzherzog Rainer, Vortrag, 1886.
Helbing, R., Auswahl aus den gr. Papyri, Sammlung Géschen, Leipzig, 1912.
2 Aufl. 1924.
Herwerden, H., von, Lexicon Graecum suppletorium et dialecticum, 2nd ed.,
Leyden, 1910. :
Hitzig, H., “Griechische Heiratsvertrage auf Papyrus.” Festgabe der
Phil. Fakultat, I., Ziirich, 1914, pp. 25-45.
Hohlwein, N., L’Egypte Romaine. Académie Royale de Belgique—Mémoires,
Brussels, 1912.
Hohlwein, N., “Les papyrus grecs d’Egypte.’’ Bibliographie Moderne,
Besancon, 1906.
Hohlwein, N., ‘Les papyrus grecs et l’Egypte, province romaine.” Revue
générale. Brussels, 1908.
Hohlwein, N. Recueil de Papyrus Choisis, Brussels, 1912. Also: Papyrus
Choisis, Traduction et Commentaire, Brussels, 1913. [An excellent work, as
indeed is all that is done by N. Hohlwein.]
Holmann, Zur Chronologie der Papyrusurkunden (Romische Kaiserzeit),
Berlin, 1911.
Hombert, Marcel, “La Papyrologie grecque, Lecon d’ouverture faite au
Doctorat en Philologie classique,” Bruxelles, 1926. Revue de I’ Université
de Bruxelles, XXX, No. 2, pp. 167-189.
Jouguet, P., La Vie Municipale dans l’Egypte Romaine, Paris, 1911. Fasc.
104 of Bibliothéques des écoles frangaises d’Athéenes et de Rome.
Journal of Egyptian Archaeology. Frequent articles. Particularly Vol. I,
Pt. III (April 1914), pp. 81ff., “Papyri and Papyrology”, by A. 8. Hunt.
Karabacek, J., Mitteilungen aus der Sammlung der Papyri Erzherzog Rainer,
6vols., Wien, 1886-1897.
Karabacek, J., Rainer Papyri, Fiihrer durch die Ausstellung. Wien, 1894.
Greek Papyri by Wessely.
Use of Subjunctive and Opiative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 19
Kenyon, F. G., Palaeography of Greek Papyri, Oxford, 1899.
Kenyon, F. G., ‘“‘“Greek Papyri and Recent Discoveries.”” Quart. Rev.,
1908, pp. 333-355.
Kreller, Hans, Erbrechtliche Untersuchungen auf Grund der Graeco-Aegypti-
schen Papyrusurkunden. Teubner, Leipzig and Berlin, 1919.
Laqueur, R., Quaestiones epigraphicae et papyrologicae selectae, 1904.
Laudien, Arthur, Griechische Papyri aus Oxyrhynchos fiir den Schulgebrauch
ausgewdhlt, Weidmann, Berlin, 1912.
Lietzmann, H., Griechische Papyri, 2 Aufl., Bonn, 1910. Kleine Texte fiir
Vorlesungen und Uebungen.
Meecham, H. G., Light from Ancient Letters. Macm., 1923.
Mélanges-Nicole. Recueil de Mémoires offerts ἃ J. Nicole, 1905. Contribu-
tions of Comparetti, Goodspeed, Gradenwitz, Schubart, Vitelli, Jouguet-
Lefebvre, Wessely.
Meyer, Paul M., Juristische Papyri. Erklérung von Urkunden zur Ein-
fiihrung in die Juristische Papyruskunde. Weidmann, Berlin, 1920.
Milligan, George, Here and There among the Papyri, London, 1922.
Milligan, George, Selections from the Greek Papyri. Camb. Univ. Press,
1910; 2nd ed., 1912. [One of the pioneer handbooks; an excellent introduction. ]
Mitteis, L., Aus den gr. Papyrusurkunden, Leipzig, 1900. [A good brief
introduction to Papyrology.]
Mitteis und Wilcken, Grundziige und Chrestomathie der Papyruskunde.
Leipzig and Berlin, 1912.
Modica, M., Introduzione allo studio della papirologia giuridica. Milano,
1914.
Moulton, J. H., New Light from the Egyptian Rubbish Heaps. London,
C. H. Kelly, 1916. Published originally in London Quarterly Review, April,
1908, pp. 212ff.
Nicole, J., Textes grecs inédits de la collection papyrologique de Genéve.
Geneva, 1909.
Olsson, Bror, Papyrusbriefe aus der friihesten Rémerzeit, Diss. Upsala, 1925.
Plaumann, G., Amtliche Berichte aus den kéniglichen Kunstsammlungen zu
Berlin, 35 (1914).
Preisigke, F., Antikes Leben nach den aegyptischen Papyri. Leipzig, 1916.
2 Aufl. 1925.
Preisigke, F., Fachwérter des offentlichen Verwaltungsdienstes Aegyptens.
Gottingen, 1915.
Preisigke, F., “‘Familienbriefe aus alter Zeit.” Preuss. Jahrb. 108 (1902),
pp. 88-111.
Preisigke, F., Girowesen im gr. Aegypten. Ein Beitrag zur Geschichte des
Verwaltungsdienstes im Altertum, Strassburg, 1910.
20 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
Preisigke, F., Namenbuch—enthaltend alle griechischen, lateinischen, dgypt-
ischen, hebrdischen, arabischen, und sonstigen semitischen und nichtsemitischen
Menschennamen, soweit sie in griechischen Urkunden (Papyri, Ostraka, In-
schriften, Mumienschildern, u. s. w.) Aegyptens sich vorfinden. Heidelberg,
1922.
Preisigke, F., Stddtisches Beamtenwesen im rémischen Aegypten. Diss.
Halle, 1903.
Preisigke, F., Woerterbuch der griechischen Papyrusurkunden, mit Einschluss
der griechischen Inschriften, Aufschriften, Ostraka, Mumienschildern, u. 5. τὸ.
aus Aegypten. Heidelberg, 1924. [Another new and indispensable work.]
Reich, N., ‘‘Demotische und Griechische Texte auf Mumientiafelchen.”
Studien, VIII.
Revue Egyptologique. Frequent articles.
Rostovtzeff, Michael, ‘‘A Large Estate in Egypt in the Third Century
B.C.” University of Wisconsin Studies in the Social Sciences and History,
No. 6. Madison, 1922.
Schmidt, K., “Aus der griechischen Papyrusforschung.”’ Das humanistische
Gymnasium, 17 (1906), pp. 33-48.
Schmidt, W. A., Die griechische Papyrusurkunden der kéniglichen Bibliothek
zu Berlin, Berlin, 1842.
Schubart, W., Einfihrung in die Papyruskunde. Weidmann, Berlin, 1918.
Schubart, W., Ein Jahrtausend am Nil. Briefe aus dem Altertum verdeutscht
und erklért. Weidmann, Berlin, 1912. [A popular presentation in attractive
form and style.]
Schubart, W., ‘Mitteilungen aus der Berliner Sammlung.” Archiv V, pp.
194-197,
Schubart, W., Papyri Graecae Berolineuses. Tabulae in Usum Scholarum.
Bonn, 1911.
Spiegelberg, W., Aegyptische und Griechische Personennamen. Leipzig, 1901.
Viereck, P., ‘Aus der hinterlassenen Privatkorrespondenz der alten Aegyp-
ter.”’ Voss. Zig. Berlin, 1895.
Viereck, P., ‘‘Papyrusforschungen.’’ Byzant Zs. 16, pp. 752-8 and 17,
pp. 299-303.
Waltzing, “Curiosités papyrologiques."’ Musée Belge, VI (1902), pp.
82-87. ,
Waszynski, S., Die Bodenpacht. 1. Band, Die Privatpacht. Leipzig and
Berlin, 1905.
Wessely, C., Aus der Welt der Papyri, Leipzig, 1914.
Wessely, C., “Die altesten lateinischen und griechischen Papyri Wiens
(mit 14 Lichtdrucktafeln).”” Studien XIV (1914).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 21
Wessely, C., ‘‘Die Stadt Arsinoe in gr. Zeit."” K. Akad. ἃ. Wissenschaften.
Sitzungsberichte, vol. 145, 4. Wien, 1902.
Wessely, C., “‘Les plus anciens monuments de Christianisme.’’ Patrologia
Orientalis, IV, fasc. 2, Paris, 1907, pp. 99-209.
Wessely, C., Papyrorum Scripturae Graecae Specimina Isagogica. Leipzig,
1900.
Wessely, C., Prolegomena ad Papyrorum Graecorum Novam Collectionem
Edendam, Diss. Vienna, 1883.
Wessely, C., ‘‘Die Pariser Papyri des Fundes von El-Faijfim.’’ Wien,
1889. Denkschriften der Phil.-Hist. Classe der kais. Akademie der Wissen-
schaften, XX XVII (1889), pp. 97-256.
Westermann, W. L., ‘‘An Egyptian Farmer,” University of Wisconsin
Studies in Language and Literature, No. 3. Madison, 1919,
Wilamowitz-Moellendorf, Gr. Lesebuch. 4 Halb-bande. Berlin, 1902.
Wilamowitz-Moellendorf, Reden und Vortrdége, 3rd ed. Berlin, 1913. (See
article: Aus aegyptischen Grabern.)
Wilcken, U., Die gr. Papyrusurkunden. Berlin, 1897. [A good introduction,
though now rather old.]
Wilcken, U., Der heutige Stand der Papyrusforschung. Leipzig, 1901.
Wilhelm, ‘‘ Der alteste gr. Brief.” Oesterr. Jahreshefte, 7 (1904), pp. 94-105.
Winslow, W. C., “List of Papyri Sent to the United States.” Buzblia,
May 1901. [For more recent additions, see Oxyrhynchus Papyri.]
Witkowski, ‘“‘Quaestiones papyrologicae maximam partem ad epistulas
pertinentes.’’ Eos, 19.
Zech, Abbé M., La papyrologie grecque et ses progrés. Anvers, 1908.
Ziebarth, E., Aus der antiken Schule. Sammlung gr. Texte auf Papyrus,
Holztafeln, Ostraka. Lietzmann, Kl. Texte, No. 65. Bonn, 1910.
Ziebarth, E., Kulturbilder aus gr. Stddten. Aus Natur und Getsteswelt,
vol, 131. Leipzig, 1907.
Ziemann, F., De epistularum Graecarum formulis sollemnibus quaestiones
selectae. Diss. Halle, 1911.
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF PAPYRI
Places Where Bibliographies May Be Found
Bibliographies may of course be found in the publications of the various
collections of papyri; but it will prove convenient and worth while to consult
the following books and periodicals for this purpose:
Archiv fiir Papyrusforschung.
Aegyptus. Begun in 1920 in Milan.
22 ὅὕτο of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Nb-Literary Papyri
Hohlwein, N., La Papyrologie Grecque, Bibliographie Raisonnée. Louvain,
1905.
Hohlwein, N., L’Egypte Romaine, pp. V-XVI.
Journal of Egyptian Archaeology. [Occasionally of use for Greek Papyri.]
Mayser, E., Grammatik der griechischen Papyri aus der Ptolemderzeit. Leip-
zig, 1906.
Meltzer, H., “‘Griechische Syntax, Bedeutungslehre und Verwandtes,
1904-1910.”" Bursian’s Jahresberichte 159-160 (1912), pp. 280ff.
Mitteis-Wilcken, Grundztige der Papyruskunde, 1, 1, pp. XXV-XXVIII.
Moulton, J. H., Prolegomena, pp. 259ff and pp. 291ff.
Preisigke, F., Berichtigungsliste. Berlin and Leipzig, 1922.
Preisigke, F., Fachwoérter des éffentlichen Verwaltungsdienstes Aegyptens.
Gottingen, 1915.
Robertson, A. T., Grammar of the Greek New Testament.
Schubart, W., Einfiihrung in die Papyruskunde, pp. 489ff.
Schwyzer, E., ‘Bericht iiber gr. Sprachwissenschaft, 1890-1903.’’ Bursian’s
Jb. 120 (1904), pp. 1-146.
Seymour de Ricci, “Bulletin Papyrologique” in Revue des Etudes Grecques
XIV (1901), pp. 163ff and XVI (1903). Articles on papyri published between
1904 and 1912 in R. Et. Gr. XXXIV (1921), pp. 80-112 and pp. 275-336.
“Bulletin Papyrologique’’ (1913-1922) in R. Et. Gr. XXXVI (1923), pp. 66-114.
Studt della Scuola Papirologica. Milano, 1917. Vol. II, pp. 247ff. ‘‘ Biblio-
graphia Metodica dei Papiri e degli Studt Egiziani.”
Studien zur Pap. und Pap-kunde. Part I (1901) and Part II (1902) and
Part IV (1905). Part XIII, literature published from 1905 to 1912. Part
XVII (1917), ‘‘Literatur der Pap-kunde, 1913-1917.”
Viereck, P., ‘‘Die gr. Papyrusurkunden 1899-1905."’ Bursian’s Jahres-
bericht 134 (1906). See also 98 (1898) and 102 (1899) for older material.
Witkowski, ‘Bericht iiber die Literatur zur Koine aus den Jahren 1898-
1902,”’ Bursian’s Jb. 120 (1904), pp. 153-256. “Ausden Jahren 1903-1906,”
Jb. 159 (1912), pp. 1-279.
Wessely, C., Aus der Welt der Papyri, pp. 818.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Grammatical Works —
Brugmann-Thumb, Griechische Grammatik. Vierte Auflage. Miinchen,
1913. Von Mueller’s Handbuch.
Crénert, W., Memoria Graeca Herculanensis cum titulorum Aegypti papy-
rorum codicum denique testimoniis comparatam proposuit, Guilelmus Crénert,
Leipzig, 1903.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 23
Dieterich, K., ‘‘Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der Sprache von der
hellenistischen Zeit bis zum 10. Jahrhundert n. Chr. Leipzig, 1898.” Byz.
Archiv, Heft I.
Dutton Emily H., Prepositional Phrases in the Papyri. Diss. Chicago, 1916,
Goodwin, W. W., Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb, Boston,
1900.
Granit, De Inf. et Part. in Inscr. Dial. Graec. Quaestiones syntacticae,
1892.
Hahn, Rom und Romanismus im gr.-rém. Osten mit besonderer Beriick-
sichtigung der Sprache. Leipzig, 1906.
Haley, J. B., ‘Some Modal Uses in the Papyri.”” Univ. of Wis. Studs, in
Lang. and Lit., No. 15 (1922), pp. 29-32.
Hammerschmidt, Ueber die Grundbedeutung von Konjunktiv und Optativ,
und thr Verhdltnis zu den Temporibus auf Grund der homerischen Epen erértert.
Diss. Erlangen, 1892.
Harsing, C., De optativi in chartis Aegyptus usu. Diss. Bonn, 1910,
Hatzidakis, G. N., Einleitung in die neugriechische Grammatik. Leipzig,
1892.
Jacobsthal, Der Gebrauch der Tempora und Modi in der Kretischen Dialekt-
inschriften. Strassburg, 1907.
Jannaris, A. N., Historical Greek Grammar. London, 1897.
Kretschmer, P., Eénleitung in die Geschichte der griechischen Sprache.
Gottingen, 1896.
Kretschmer, P., ‘‘Die Entstehung der Koine.”’ Sitzungsberichte Wien.
Akad, Phil.-hist. Klasse. Bd. 143 (1900).
Krumbacher, K., Das Problem der neugriechischen Schriftssprache. 1902.
Kihner-Gerth-Blass, Ausfihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache.
2 Aufl. Hannover, 1890-1904.
Kuhring, W., De praepositionum graecarum in chartis Aegyptiis usu quaestiones
selectae. Diss. Bonn, 1906.
Lottich, B., De sermone vulgari Atticorum, 1881.
Mayser, E., Grammatik der griechischen Papyri aus der Ptolemderzeit.
Laut und Wortlehre. Leipzig, 1906.
Meisterhans-Schwyzer, Grammatik der attischen Inschriften. 3 Aufl. Berlin,
1900.
Mutzbauer, C., Grundbedeutung des Konjunctiv und Optativ und thre Ent-
wicklung in Griechischen. Teubner, 1908.
Nachmanson, E., Laute und Formen der Magnetischen Inschriften. Upsala,
1903.
Nachmanson, E., Beitrége zur Kenntnis der altgriechischen Volkssprache.
Upsala, 1910.
24 «Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
Rossberg, De praepositionum in chartis Aegyptiis Ptolemaeorum aetatis
usu. Diss. Jena, 1909.
Riisch, E., Grammatik der Delphischen Inschriften. Vol. I, Lautlehre.
Weidmann, Berlin, 1914.
Schmid, W., Der Aitizismus in seinen Hauptvretretern von Dionysius von
Halikarnass bis auf den 2en Philostratus dargestellt: 5 vols. Stuttgart, 1887-
1897,
Schweizer, E., Grammatik der Pergamenischen Inschriften. Beitrége zur
Laut- und Flexionslehre der gemeingriechischen Sprache. Berlin, 1898.
Schwyzer, E., ‘“‘Die Vulgarsprache der attischen Fluchtafeln.”” Neue ,
Jahrb. f.d kl. Altert. Bd. V (1900), pp. 244-262.
Schwyzer, E., ‘“Neugriechische Syntax und altgriechische.” N. Jb. f. Rl.
Alt, 1908, pp. 498-507.
Scott, J. A., ‘“Prohibitives with πρὸς and the Genitive.”’ Cl. Phil. hi
3, pp. 324-330. Chicago, 1907.
Stahl, J. M., Kritisch-Historische Syntax des Griechischen Verbums der
Klassischen Zeit. Carl Winter, Heidelberg, 1907.
Thieme, G., Die Inschriften von Magnesia am Mdander und das N. T.
Gottingen, 1906.
Thumb, A., Die griechische Sprache im Zeitalter des Hellenismus. Strass-
burg, 1901.
Thumb, A., Handbuch der neugriechischen Volkssprache. Strassburg, 1895.
Thumb, A., Grammatik der neugriechischen Volkssprache. Géschen, Berlin
und Leipzig, 1915.
Vandaele, L’Optatif Grec. Essaie de Syntaxe Historique. Thése, Paris,
1897,
Volker, F., Papyrorum Graecarum Syntaxis Specimen. Diss. Bonn, 1900.
Volker, F., Syntax der griechischen Papyri. I Der Artikel. Miinster, 1903.
Wackernagel, J., ‘‘Griechische Sprache,” in Kultur der Gegenwart, I, 8.
Berlin, 1907.
Wetzel, De coniunctivi et optativi apud Graecos usu capita selecta. Diss.
Berlin, 1881.
BIBLIOGRAPHY |
Septuagint and New Testament Grammar
Blass-Debrunner, 4th ed. of Blass, Grammatik des N. T. Griechisch. Gé6t-
tingen, 1913.
Blass-Thackeray, Blass’s Grammar, trans. by Thackeray. 2nd ed., London,
1905.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 25
Burton, E. DeWitt, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in N. T. Greek. 4th
ed., Chicago, 1900.
Deissmann, G. A., Bible Studies. Engl. trans. Edinburgh, 1901.
Deissmann, G. A., Light from the Ancient East. Eng. trans. by Strachan.
London, 1910.
Deissmann, G. A., New Light on the N. T., from Records of the Greco-Roman
Period. Edinburgh, T. and T. Clark, 1907.
Hatch and Redpath, Concordance to the Septuagint and the Other Greek
Versions of the Old Testament. Oxford, 1897-1906.
Helbing, R., Grammattk der Septuaginta. Laut und Wortlehre. Géttingen,
1907.
Moulton, J. H., Grammar of N. T. Greek. Vol. 1, Prolegomena, 3rd ed.
Edinburgh, 1908. Vol. II, 1919-1920.
Moulton-Geden, Concordance to the Greek Testament. Edinburgh, 1899.
Moulton-Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek New Testament (Illustrated from
the Papyri and Other Non-Liierary Sources). Hodder and Stoughton, Edin-
burgh, 1914-1924 (Part V).
Radermacher, L., Das Griechische des Neuen Testaments (im Zusammenhang
mit der Volkssprache). Handbuch zum Neuen Testament, 1,1. Tiibingen, 1911.
Regard, P. F., Prépositions dans la Langue du Nouveau Testament. Thése,
Paris, 1918.
Robertson, A. T., Grammar of the Greek Testament in the Light of Historical
Research. London and New York, 1914. 4th ed. 1924.
Robertson, A. T., Short Grammar of the Greek New Testament. New York,
1908.
Thackeray, H. St. J., Grammar of the Old Testament in Greek. Vol. 1, Intro-
duction, Orthography, and Accidence. Camb., 1909.
Viteau, J., Etude sur le grec du Nouveau Testament. Paris, 1893-1896.
Winer-Schmiedel, Winer’s Grammatik des neutestamentlichen Sprachidioms,
Achte Auflage, neu bearbeitet von P. W. Schmiedel. Gottingen, 1894-1898.
26 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Liierary Papym
II
THE SUBJUNCTIVE Moop
Subjunctive Forms
It has not been my purpose to discuss, or even to list, special
forms; but at the beginning of this study I wish to call atten-
tion briefly to subjunctive forms of δίδωμι, and then to devote a
little more attention to a curious phenomenon, a subjunctive
ἦν.
SUBJUNCTIVE FORMS
dot, δώσῃ.
The form 607 in the subjunctive is much commoner than
one would be led to suppose from Mayser (p. 325). Crénert
shows us the truth more clearly (pp. 215-217). In the LXX,
N. T., papyri, and Cnidian curse tablets we have commonly
such forms as do?. It is an Ionic subjunctive. It was formed
after the analogy of verbs in dw.
For vot and dot see Moulton, Cl. Rev. XVIII, p. 111. Exs.
of dot will be found: P. Petr. II, 9, 5 (241 B. Ὁ O. P. 742
(2. B. (ἢ), P. Ryl. 229 (38 A. D.), P. Lips. 106'(98 Ay Demers
Giess, 79 (2nd A. D.), B. G. U. 246 (2nd-3rd cent. A. D.).
For the subjunctive dot in LXX and N. T., see Thackeray,
p. 256; Robertson, pp. 308-309; and Moulton Proleg. pp. 55
and 196. For forms of δίδωμι one may also consult Jannaris,
§996, 51. N. T. examples may be found in Mark 8, 37 (60?)
and 9, 30 (yvo?). ͵
With regard to δώσω as subjunctive, see Moulton Cl. Rev.
XV, p. 38. Inthe papyri both ἔδωκα and ἔδωσα are found as
aorists of δίδωμι. These examples will suffice: O. P. 599
(1st-2nd cent. A. D.) ἕως δώσῃς; B. G. U. 635 (2nd) ἐὰν δὲ μὴ
ἀποδόσω; P. Β. Μ. 121 (2nd) εἴπῃς καὶ δώσῃς; O. P. 1066 (3rd)
ἔδωσεν; B. G. U. 546 (Byz.) μὴ δόσῃς.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 27
ἦν AS SUBJUNCTIVE
In several passages in the New Testament certain uncial
manuscripts read ἦν for ἢ in the third person singular of the
present subjunctive (e.g. A in 1 Cor. 16:4). While these may be
simple errors, due to the tendency to add v movable, the occur-
rence of the same ἦν in papyri, particularly in private letters,
would lead us to suppose that ἦν in certain phrases might be
the natural form with the common people.
After a careful examination of the papyri I have checked my
results against Moulton’s, who has called attention to many
instances;3 and I have been fortunate in finding other examples.
The abstract of a paper which I prepared on this subject (The
Subjunctive ἦν in the Papyri) will be found 7. A. P. A. LIII,
(1922), p. xx.
The papyri in which this ἦν occurs date from the first century
B. C. to the fourth century of our era. In private letters this
occurs during the whole period; there are occasional instances in
official documents. Most of the private letters in which this
form occurs are written by ignorant or uneducated people, as
the spelling and syntax show. Some, however, are more care-
fully written. The surprising thing is to find the phenomenon
in official documents too; for the language of these is generally
more careful.
ἦν occurs before either vowel or consonant. Sometimes it
comes at the end of a sentence.
The occurrence is mainly in conditional and relative clauses,
where the phrase probably became fixed. ἦν in the conditional
clause is almost always introduced by ἐὰν, only occasionally by
el. ἐὰν ἦν, ἐὰν δὲ ἦν, ἐὰν ἦν δὲ seem to have become fixed. Even
in the relative clauses ἐὰν ἦν is prominent. There are a few
examples of purpose clauses, introduced by ἵνα; and a few of
temporal clauses. There is one example of an object clause
after a verb of care, in the form of a question.
The causes which produced such a form must have been
these. First, there was a great confusion in later Greek between
e Cl. Rev. XV, 38 and 436; XVIII, 108; Proleg. p. 168; Gram. of N. T. Greek,
ξδ0.
28 Use of Subjuncti.e and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
the imperfect indicative of εἰμέ and its present subjunctive,
because of the similarity of sound and the general similarity of
form, which is closest in the second person ἧς. Second is the
tendency to add a parasitic ν' In many papyri we find a final
vy added; and in many » is dropped at the end of a word,
sometimes « taking its place. For the dropping of final ν, see
Mayser, pp. 191-194; and for the addition of », pp. 197-199.
Jannaris remarks that the tendency to add the ν to almost
any verbal ending was growing, especially since the Graeco-
Roman period.4 Robertson’ speaks of ‘‘the irrational » with
the subjunctive in the papyri.’’ Third, most of these phrases
seem to have become stereotyped in popular speech, due partly
to the combination of sounds.
The form ἦν seems fairly well established as a subjunctive.
It would seem to belong to the popular speech, due of course to
ignorance and confusion, the appeal of the sound in certain
combinations, and careless pronunciation.
P. Par. 63, Col. 12, 98-99. Prob: ο. ΤΟΟ ΣΕ Gs
συντάσσων γράφειν περὶ [ὧν] ἄν δυνατὸν ἦν ἡμᾶς τί σοι. .. vras.....
εσθαι.
ΟΠ LOGI Ls ΖΒ:
κἂν δέον ἦν.
*O. P. 744 (= Witk. 58), 9-10 Year 1 B.C.
ἐὰν ἦν ἄρσενον, ἄφες, ἐὰν ἦν θήλεα, ἔκβαλε.
This is one of the best known instances, as this papyrus has
been published a number of times. It was also among the first
to arouse curiosity about ἦν.
Pees O59 tt Early 2nd A. D.
εἰ ἔγώ τι ἔγίΐραψα orpal-| τηγῶι μεμφόμενος alz|@liva μὴ παιδαγωγὸν
ἔχωι πὶ || φιλαίτατον ἀλλ᾽ ἐξῆν μοι ἐκ Ϊ 1| γράφειν μεθίστημί
σε :
(Judicial Process).
O. P. 496, 11 1, pe
εἰ δὲ ἦν [ὁ] γαμῶν πρότερος [τ]ετελ[ ε]υτηκ[ὼ]ς ἐχέτω ἡ Ὑγαμουμένη
(Marriage Contract).
* Hist. Greek Gram., p. 221. ἘΠ ee App. III, §§16ff.
5 Gram. of the Greek Ν. ἘΠ ΈΡ
Use of Subjunctive and Opiatire Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 29
O. P. 237, Col. VIII, 28-29 186 A. D.
II. ὑπὲρ A. προσέθηκεν, ἐὰν ἀπερίλυπος ἦν ὁ γάμος, τὸν πατέρα
μήτε τῆς προικὸς μηδὲ τῆς παιδὸς τῆς ἐκδεδομένης ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν.
(Petition of Dionysia).
*B. G. U. 821, 6-7 2nd A. D.
ὅταν ἦν τι καινότερον εὐθέως σοι δηλ[ὠ]σω.
(This papyrus has ἀνέβη for ἀνέβην in line 3).
ΡΟ 1751:.13315 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν μὴ ἦν σοι ἀβαρὸς μεταβαλοῦ Σαραπᾶτι χαλκὸν ἕως ἀναβῶ.
Ib. 17-19
ἐὰν μὴ ἦν σοι ἀβαρός, γράψον.
O. P. 1760, 15-19 2nd A. D.
ἐρχόμενος ἐνεγκεῖς μοι, ἐὰν δυνατὸν ἦν᾽ ἐὰν δέ σοι ὀχληρὸν ἦν τοῦτο,
τάχα δύναται Σῶσος προτραπεὶς ὑπό σου κείράϊμ[ι]όν μοι ἐνέγκαι.
B. G. U. 48, 12 ff. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἐὰν δέ σοι δόξῃ καὶ περὶ τῶν ἐριδίων, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἐνῆν Eplijdva, [χ]άριν
ποίσας π[έϊμψεις μοι κτλ. ᾽
O. P. 1294, 15-16 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἐὰν δέ τινός σοι χρεία ἦν δήλωσόν por
(not ἢν) as was read by the editor).
OSE PO30.13:i. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
τοὺς [σιϊ]τολόγους καί τοὺς ἄλλους — — — ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ποίησον iva μη[δ]ὲν
ἐνπόδιον ἦν.
ΒΟ UN Wy go ἢ 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
kal περὶ ‘Epytdvns μελησάτω ὑμῖν, πῶς ἄλυπος jv od δίκαιον γὰρ
αὐτὴν λυπῖσθαι περὶ οὐδενός.
ἘΡ B. M. 948 (verso), 3 (= P. Flor. 185) 256 A. D.
ἀνερχέστω ἐὰν ἦν παυσάμενος τοῦ ἀχύρου
(In P. Flor. 185 the editor gives the reading as ἐὰν μὴ;
and says that κἂν μὴ is rather to be expected. I am in-
clined to follow the reading given in P. B. M. 948. Compare
below the examples with ἦσαν).
P. Flor. 140 (recto) 3rd A. D.
εὖ ποιήσεις κύριξ μου προνοήϊσας] κἀμοὶ μετρήτου ὀμφανικοὺ [otvlov
ἧς ἐὰν ἦν τιμῆς.
FP L453; Offs 4th A.D.
πλῆσον κεράμιον σινάπις χλωροῦ ἐὰν ἦν Θεοδῶρα μὴ δοῦσα τοὺς
30 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
τέσσαρας στατῆρας τῷ ἀνθρώπ[ῳ] ἐὰν ἐξέλθῃ ἄλλ᾽ ι τε δίδω [ = δίδου]
αὐτῷ ἵνα ἐνέγκῃ σοι.
*P. Grenf. I 53, 30 4th A. ἢ.
ἐὰν ἦν δὲ ὀνομάζειν, περιγένου.
ἦσαν
Further confusion of the imperfect indicative and the present
subjunctive of εἰμί appears in these examples. ἦν with a
participle in the singular (as in P. B. M. 948 and P. B. M. 453)
would seem to give naturally ἦσαν with a participle in the plural.
In P. Tebt 423, 18 we find further, Early 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν οὖν μὴ ἧς λαβών τὰ πρόβατα πρὸς κοιτασμός.
ὙΠ 39... te 216 Α. D.
ἐπιδίδωμι αὐτὸ τοῦτο φανερόν σοι ποιοῦσα πρὸς τὸ ἐὰν ἦσάν τι παθόντες
4
ἀνθρώπινον μένιν [μ]οι τὸν λόγον [π]ρὸς rod[s] φανησο[μέϊνους
αἰτίους.
*O. P. 1157, 15-16 Late 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἦσαν «ἐπείγον »τες ἀπαιτῆσαι τὸ ἐπικεφάλαιον διάγραψον
αὐτό.
ἦσθα
In a papyrus of the third century B. C. ἦσθα appears to be a
subjunctive.
P. Hib. 78, 15-16 lil aoe
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ δυνατὸς ἦσθα ἀπολῦσαι, Ὑράψο <u> μοι.
In the LXX, in Job. 22, 3 the usual reading of the MSS. is
ἦσθα; but when we observe that A reads ἧς, it looks as if the
scribe regarded it as a subjunctive form, even though ἧς was
possible as a substitute for the indicative ἦσθα. The text is:
τί yap μέλει τῶ κυρίῳ ἐὰν σὺ ἦσθα τοῖς ἔργοις ἄμεμπτος ;
The places where ἦν as a subjunctive occurs are these (in only a few is
this interpretation uncertain): P. Par. 63, Col. 12 (Prob. 100 B. C.); B. G. U.
543 (27 B. C.); O. P. 1061 (22 B. C.); O. P. 744 (1 B. C.); B. Ga ο 5
. D.); A. P. 65 (Early 2nd); O. P. 34 (127 A. D.); O. P. 496 (127 A. D.);
Φ P. 729 (137 A. D.); O. P. 1757, O. P. 1760, P. Hamb. 88, P. Fay. 124,
U. 821 (all of the 2nd cent.); B. G. U. 300 (148 A. D.); O. P. 727 (154
. B. M. 324 (161 A. D.); P. Tebt. 317 (175 A. D.); O. P. 237 (186
B. G. U. 48, O. P. 63, O. P. 1294, B. G. U. 246 (all of the 2nd or 3rd
); P. R. 13, Verso (254 A. D.); O. P. 1273 (260 A. D.); P. Tebt. 419,
lor. 89, P. Flor. 140 Recto, P. Flor, 175, P. Flor. 209, P. Flor. Ppp ae | τὸ
Prk. 4947 (all of the 3rd cent.); P. B. M. 453 and P. Grenf. I, 53 (4th cent.).
[4
=)
U2 >> WO>
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 31
Examples of ἦν or ἦσαν with participle added: P. Tebt. 333 (216 A. D.);
O. P. 1157 (Late 3rd); P. Flor. 185 (256 A. D.); P. Flor. 175 (3rd): P. B. M.
453 (4th).
PURPOSE, RELATIVE, AND CONDITIONAL CLAUSES
Examples of purpose clauses, vivid future protases, and general
relative clauses with the subjunctive are very numerous in the
papyri of all periods, as we should naturally expect. It is hardly
necessary to give a number of examples to show the frequency
of these common constructions; but it is a matter of no little
interest to obesrve the more common phrases which are employed
in these different groups. It is sometimes instructive to note
the period in which a particular phrase was in vogue. We do
not wish to be dogmatic about results; for in some cases the
evidence is not as complete as one would desire, and more
examples are likely to be found any day, as more papyri are
published.
CLAUSES OF PURPOSE IN THE SUBJUNCTIVE
The subjunctive is used to express purpose after both primary
and secondary tenses; the introductory conjunctions are ἵνα and
ὅπως. The most interesting point with regard to the subjunc-
tive of purpose is the comparative frequency of the use of ὅπως
and ta. The figures given in this table are approximately
correct; it would be foolish to expect them to be exact in this
stage of pioneer work, when more examples might meet one’s
attention at any time; these results, however, are not likely to
be altered to any great extent.
PERIOD iva ὅπως PROPORTION
Ptolemaic........ 222 200 About the same
Romanwyeucecs: 436 88 5:1
Byzantine......:... 153 41 Nearly 4:1
32 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
The great frequency of iva in the later periods is interesting in
connection with the frequency of νά in modern Greek.®
Among the examples of purpose I have placed the phrase
ἐπιμέλου σεαυτοῦ ἵνα (ὅπως) ὑγιαίνῃς, although it approaches an object
clause very closely. It is common in letters of the Ptolemaic
period and continues into the Ist century A. D. The examples
with ὅπως all belong to the Ptolemaic age. The proportion seems
to be ἵνα: ὅπως: : 30:4. ἵνα is decidedly preferred in this phrase.
P. Grenf. II, 36, 20 95'B. Cc.
ἑαυτῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι, ἵν᾽ ὑγιαίνητε.
In the earlier Ptolemaic period many examples of purpose
show ὅπως ἂν instead of simple ὅπως.
PS Petro 1.4: 0 255 Bae
ὅπως ἂν τὰ Epya συντελῆται.
P. Petr. II, 4 (5) 255 ΒΟ
ὅπως ἂν δοθῆι.
P. Lille 1, 19 259 ἘΣ Ο:
ὅπως ἂν μηθὲν αὐτῶν ἀχρεῖον ἦι.
ὡς is very rare in the papyri introducing a clause of purpose.’
The example in Witkowski (P. Petr. I, 30, 1) ὡς ἂν «οὖν »
λάβωμεν is more probably a temporal clause. I shall give a
few curious examples.
ἘΡ Tebt 56 (= Witk. 45), 11 ff. ILpse
ζητή[σ]α[ς] μοι περὶ τὴν κὠμην cov els τὴν τροφὴν ἡμῶν γῆς ἀρούρας
πέϊν]τε, ὡς ἕξομεν ἐξ αὐτῶν τὴν]τροφὴν ἡμῶν.
(The future indicative is used as if this were an object
clause instead of a purpose clause).
Be Prk i S252e Sook: 144. D.
ἀξιῶι τὸν πάντων εὐεργέτην ------ διαλ[α]βεῖν rept -——, os] |[r]ebEouat
τοῦ δικαίου.
(This is a Ptolemaic formula, in the form ἵνα τύχω τοῦ
δικαίου, as in P. Magd. 20 of III B. C.)
P. Path. 1 (Cp. Archiv II, p. 515), 6-8 99 B.C.
ὀρθῶς ποιήσετε καὶ κεχαρισμένως ἑτοίμους γενέσθαι ὡς ἅμα ἡμῖν συνεξ-
ορμήσητε.
is Ὁ Ὁ anak 1760. Seas of the use of the final particles by
classical authors are to be found in . ΠῚ of Goodwin’s Mood
7 Cp. note in Witkowski, No. 1. a wimmmnedants σεις
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 33
EePric 5357, 9 Prob. Byz. Period
ὡς ἂν τοίνυν μὴ Kal——— γένηται δύ[ν]αμις.
PHRASES
Besides the phrases already noted, we direct attention to the
following:
iva ὦ evepyernuevos
iva ὦ evepyernuévos in Petitions in later Ptolemaic and Roman
periods; in the earlier Ptolemaic times ἵνα τύχω τοῦ δικαίου is the
common formula. See above.
Porky 1161 ΒΒ: Cs
iv’ ὦμεν [εὐ]εργετημένοι.
(An inscription. See also Wilcken, Chrest. I, 70).
Bo G..U71200, 29 2:8: Ὁ:
[iv’ ὦϊμεν [ὑπό σ͵ου εὐεργετημένοι.
P. S. I. 281 (Verso), 60 2nd A. D.
ἵν᾽ ὦ εὐεργετημένος.
P. Tebt. 332, 20-21 176 A. Ὁ.
μι ἰῷ
iv’ ὦ ὑπό σου βεβοηθη(μένος)
βεβοηθημένος is sometimes used instead of the other verb.
It is interesting to compare this (which is not common):
P. Petr. II, 6 end Prob; IITs. Ὁ
iva ἔχωμεν βοήθειαν ἐάν τι γένηται.
ὅπως διακριθῇ in the earlier Ptolemaic age.
ΕΣ Poniaed..18221.f. ἤτον Ce
ἀπό(στειλον), ὅπ(ως) ἐπὶ τοῦ καθήκοντος κριτηρίου διακριθῆι.
ἵνα εἰδῇς
ἵνα εἰδῇς and ὅπως εἰδῇς are both common in the Ptolemaic
and Roman periods, particularly in letters and orders.
BeSiis 572010 251: 5: Cs
᾿ς γέγραφα οὖν σοι ἵνα εἰδῆις.
P. Goodsp. III ( = P. Cair. 10328), 8-9 ITls.-c.
τί δὲ ὑπέγραψα ; ὅπως ἀκριβῶς εἰδῆις.
ῬΒ “637.59 IL iss! Ὁ:
ὅπως εἰδῶ.
34 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
P. Grenf. I, 40 II B.c.
ὅπως εἰδὼς παραγγείλῃς Kal τ[οῖς] ἅλλοις ἱερεῦσι.
P. Amh. 133, 6 Early 2nd A. D.
γράφω σοι ἵν᾽ εἰδῇς ὅτι οὐκ ἀμελοῦμεν.
P. Ryl. 293, 24 Ὁ. 1227: Reps
ὅπως εἰδῶ[σι (Petition).
PAB aM ion 194 A.D.
ἔγράψαμ[εν οὖν] ὑμεῖν ἵνα εἰδῆτε.
(Diploma of Membership, conferred on an athlete by an
athletic club).
PeSeieias 9 3rd cent. A. D.
γράψαι αὐτοῖς ἵν᾽ εἰδῶσιν.
ΟΥΡΒΟΒ aie 305 Ana.
ἐπιδίδομεν ἵν᾽ εἰδέναι [ἔχῃ]ς.
PASAT ΛΟ 306? A. D.
ovlverata iv’ εἰδῇς ἐστι δηΐ
*P, Gen. 53, 18-19 ¢; 300 AD:
elva εἰδῶ διαπαντὸς Kal πάλιν πᾶν ἀποδώσω.
*P. Lips. 42, 23 End 4th A. D.
εἵν᾽ ἰδ.) <s > (= εἰδῇς)
(Physician’s Report.)
Such variants as the following are found in the later papyri:
*P. Lips. 34 (Verso), 10-11 375 Aare
ἵνα μηδὲν λάθῃ σου τὸ μεγαλεῖον and in |. 11 ἀναφέρω ἵν᾽ εἰδῇ[5]
(Petition.)
{5} Lona 4th Α. ἢ.
καὶ ἵνα μηδέν σου λανθάνῃ τὴν λαμπρότητα μηνύομεν, ἔπαρχε κύριε.
(Official Report.)
O. P. 1838, 3 6th A. D.
ἵνα διδάξῃ σε.
P. B. M. 1788, 9 6th A. D.
καταξίωσον οὖν ypawat μοι τὸ ἐπίσταλμα αὐτῶν μὴ ληθη
(‘‘As this seems to be the end of the letter, λησθῇ is probably
meant.’’—ED.)
There are a number of clear examples of purpose whose intro-
ductory conjunction is in lacuna. Some of these, in the case of
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 35
certain phrases, could be emended with practical certainty.
Let us consider a few examples.
Pl 495 258, ἘΠ ΟΣ
[ ] ἱκανὴ γένηται.
(Upon examination we should find it a clause of purpose;
but we should not know here whether to suggest ἵνα or
ὅπω:).
P. Magd. 27 end 219 B.C.
ἀπό(στειλον) πρ(ὸς) u(as) -——[
(There is no doubt, on consideration of the similar docu-
ments, many of which are in this collection, that we should
supply ὅπως διακριθῶσιν).
P. Magd. 11 JIS BSC;
ἀλλὰ διὰ σὲ, βασιλεῦ, τύχωμεν...
(The editor says that τύχωμεν is evidently introduced by
ἵνα or ὅπως present in the thought of the writer, but not
expressed; and I feel that he is right. I should have no
hesitation in supplying ἵνα in thought for this phrase. At
the end of the line I should supply τοῦ δικαίου).
O. P. 486, 36 131. Ὁ:
[ἵν᾽ ᾧ εὐεργετημένη.]
(In this petition, this is a practically certain emendation of
the editor.)
O. P. 1202, 23-25 | 217.Ὁ. Ὁ.
ἀξιῶν ἐνταγῆναι κἀμοῦ τὸν υἱὸν -- -- -- καὶ ὦ βεβοηθημένος.
(“kal ὦ is written as if ὅπως or ἵνα, and not an_ infinitive
construction, had preceded”’ says the editor. He suggests
that ἵνα was meant instead of καὶ.)
Other examples might be given; I have not used these in calcu-
lating the proportion of ἵνα and ὅπως.
OTHER WAYS OF EXPRESSING PURPOSE
Other ways of expressing purpose are found freely but par-
ticularly in later periods.
P. Giess, 62, 7-8 2nd A. D.
ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ eurrodiltev τ]ὴν [ἐπίσκεψι)ν ypdagw ὑμῖν
(Official Correspondence.)
36 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
P. B. M. 924, 18 187 A. D.
πρὸς τὸ ἐκ τῆς σῆς βοηθείας δ[υϊνηθῶμεν
(This Petition shows a confusion of two constructions.)
O. P. 69, 15-16 190 A. D.
eis TO καὶ ἐμαὶ δύνασθαι τὴν κριθὴν ἀπολαβεῖν.
(Complaint of Robbery.)
B. G. U. 454, 15 fff. 193 A.D.
διὸ ἐπιδίδωμι καὶ ἀξιῶ τὴν δέουσαν] ἐξέτασιν γενέσθαι δ[ι᾽ ὧν]
δέον ἐστὶν καὶ συνχωρίη θῆναι ἡμᾶς βαστάξαι τὰ [κλ]επέντα ἡμῶν
καὶ ὦμεν bald clov βεβοηθημένοι.
(A Complaint. We find here a confusion of two construc-
tions, aided perhaps by the fact that ἀξιῶ may take ἵνα
and the subjunctive as well as the infinitive.)
P. Flor. 120 3rd A. "Ὁ.
A. τὸν βοηθὸν ἀπέστειλά σοι ὥστε παραμεῖναι τῇ συνκομιδῇ.
P. Flor. 158 3rd A. D.
ἀπέστειλα πρός σε ἕνεκεν [ἀνα]γκαίας χρείας ὥστε ἀργάλεια (= ἐργά-
λεια) κόψαι.
(In these two examples ὥστε practically expresses purpose;
this is unusual.
ἘΟ, Ῥ. 1206, 17-18 S3IUR; Dt
πρὸς TO ἑκάτερον μέρος ἔχειν μοναχόν
(Adoption.)
*P BOM, 12497 6 345 A. D.
πρὸς τὸ δι’ αὐτῶν ἡ εἰσπορὰ (= εἰσφορὰ) γένηται ᾿
(Return of Names of γεωργοὶ to act as Tax-Collectors.)
tO7 PP 1881; 20 427 A.D.
[elis [τὸ] ἐν μηδε[ν]ὺ ἡμᾶς μεμφθῆναι.
P. Flor, 279, 16-17 514 A.D.
πρὸς τό σε λαβεῖν -- — — καὶ μὴ λαβεῖν
(Lease of Land.)
PRESENT GENERAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
There are few examples which are genuine present general
conditions. Some examples which seem to have the form are
really future in their application, and might better be classified
as future general conditions; examples are numerous where we
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 37
find a present infinitive in the apodosis, which upon examination
is seen to be dependent on ὁμολογῶ. I have therefore considered
these together with future conditions (ἐὰν with the subjunctive
in protasis.) :
Some of the examples given in this place are not free from
doubt.
P. Petr. III, 54a (2), Col. I, 4 ΠΠ 8. c:
ἐὰν δέ τιν͵ες κακῶς ἱπποτροφῶσι
(Document concerning Cavalry Horses.)
Peasille 29..Col. 1; 24. ft, Pie ΟΣ
ἐὰμ μὴ ἐκ τῶν τιθέντων δικαιωμάτων δύνωνται κρίνειν, With ποείσθω-
σαν in the apodosis. (Fragment of Code.)
*B. G. U. 1079, 31-32 41 A.D.
ἐὰν τὰ παρ(ὰ) σατοῦ ποίσῃς, οὐκ εἶ μεμπτός.
P. Giess. 87, 9-10 2nd A. D.
κἂν αὐτοὶ βλάπτωνϊἶται
(In this Petition the apodosis is lost.)
Gera lOs2) 22823 162 A. D.
ἐὰν μὴ ἐντὸς διμήνου malpalOGvrar ἐνέχεσθαι τοῖς ὡρισμένοις]
(Petition.)
O. P. 471, 94 ff. 2nd A. D.
ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν μὲν πένης ἄνθρωπος [ἐν] εὐτελέσιν ἱματίοις ἐντύχηι σοι
τὴν οὐσίαν αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς γυναικὸς καὶ τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἀναλημφθῆναι
κελεύεις.
(This is the Speech of an Advocate. The language here
reminds us of Epistle of James II, 1-5.)
*P, Tebt! 315, 33-35 Dra νὰ
ἐὰν δὲ καί τινα ἔχῃς [..]. tua ὅσα ἐὰν ἔχῃς ἀνένεγκέ μοι, χρίαν yap
ἔχωι.
(The editor suggests ἕτοιμα or δόσιμα to fill the lacuna.)
SWE 85.1.2 Probably c. 200 4. Ὁ.
ἂν δὲ καὶ οἶνον airy, κονδύλους αὐτῷ δείδι.
Ὁ P: 1216; 55:60 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
σὺ οἷδάς μου τὴν προαίρεσιν κἂν μὴ σοι γράφω.
*B. G. U. 388, 13-14 (Col. IT) 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ὁ στρατηγὸς, ἐάν TL πράττῃ, TH ἰδίᾳ πίστει πράττει, Kal ἐάν τι δυνηθῆτε
ἐλλέγξαι ὡς κακῶς ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ διοικηθέν, ἐπεξελεύσομαι.
38 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
O. P. 1676, 21-23 3rd A. ἢ.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐκτός μου οὐκ ἀκάλως ἔχῃς, χαίρω ὅτι Kadal[s] ἔχεις.
*B. G. U. 984, 11-13 4th A. D.
>
οἶδας yap κἂν μὴ γράφω ὅτι[ἀεὶ τὰ] μὴ τέρποντα ὑπερτίθοντε ἀνα-
[βαλλό]μενοι τὰς ἡμέρας.
P. Β. Μ. 1075, 19-20 7th A. D.
ἐὰν yap οὕτως ἐπιμείνῃ ἰσ]εαυ]τὸν βλάπτει.
(See also lines 20 ff.)
P. B. M. 1344, 12-13 710 A. D.
folire yap ἔχει συγγνώμην οὔτε παραχώρησίν τις [ἐξ[ὑ]μῶν ἐὰν εὑρεθ[ ἢ
ἐν]τ[οὐ]τῳ τῷ χωρίῳ.
Vivip FUTURE CONDITIONS
ἐὰν WITH SUBJUNCTIVE IN PROTASIS
Future vivid conditional sentences are, as might be expected,
frequent at all times, in all kinds of papyri. This is the common
form of future condition. The optative in possible future con-
ditions, εἰ with subjunctive, and εἰ or ἐὰν with future
indicative—all the examples of these are few in number when
compared with the great number of future protases with ἐὰν and
the subjunctive. Among the common forms of apodosis may
be mentioned the infinitive dependent on ὁμολογῶ (expressed or
understood) with reference of course to the future; this idiom is
common in agreements of different kinds.
Many of the phrases are of special interest.
FUTURE PROTASIS
ἐὰν φαίνηται
ἐὰν φαίνηται, ἐὰν οὖν σοι φαίνηται, ἐάν σοι φαίνηται,
(if you approve), occur very frequently, particularly in appeals,
petitions, and the like. From the first century A. D. onwards
we find ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι and ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθώσασθαι in offers
to lease and leases. We find examples of ἐὰν φαίνηται from 258
B. C. to 306 A. D.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 439
Foo. 1: 330 298'B.C.
ἐὰν καὶ σοὶ φαίνηται.
Ο. Ρ. 746 16 Α. ἢ.
ἐάν σοι φα[(]νηται.
P. Ryl. 166 26 A.D.
ἐὰν φαίνηται [ἐπὶ τούτοις μισθώσασθαι.
Po Tebt. 377 210 A. D.
ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι
fhe. 606, 16 306 A. ἢ.
ἐὰν φέν[η]ται μισθωτη (sic)
There are interesting variations of the phrase. We find εἰ
φαίνεται several times in the third century B. C.; it occurs in
letters rather than documents. I find one example as late as 1
A. D., and an interesting example of a variant of 167 B. C.
P. Hamb. 27 250 B.C.
εἰ δέ σοι φαίνεται, καλῶς ποιήσεις. (Near the end occurs ὥς σοι
φαίνεται).
P.S. I. 418, 14 III B.c.
εἴ σοι φαίνεται and in line 26 γράψον περὶ ὧν σοι φαίνεται.
Ο. Ρ. 811 δα ον.
καὶ τὰ νῦν εἴ σοι φαί[νεϊται γράψον αὐτῷ.
P. Hamb. 91 167 B.C.
διαλαβεῖν κα[τ]ὰ τὸ φανέν alo]. Ἐὐτύχει.
(Document.)
ἐὰν δόξῃ
ἐὰν δόξῃ σοι, ἐάν σοι δόξῃ, and ἐάν σου τῇ τύχῃ δόξῃ are quite com-
mon in such documents as requests and petitions in the Roman
period. We have a good number of instances from 108 A. D.
to 299 A. D. Curiously enough, however, there are a few
examples from the third century B. C., but none from the inter-
vening period (unless P. Leid. I, of 99 B. C., should be read ἐὰν
δό[ξῃ] instead of ἐὰν δο[κῇ] with the editor.) There are also a few
very late examples. Perhaps the gaps are only accidental. The
cases of τῇ τύχῃ belong to the second and third centuries A.
D., from Hadrian’s reign on.
P. Grenf. II, 14a, 21 270 or 233 B. Cc.
ἐάν σοι δόξηι and line 9 ἐάν σοι δόξηι εὔγνωμον εἶναι.
40 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
ῬΆΘΙΙΖ229:172 icp
ἐάν σοι δόξηι.
Ῥ, 5.1. 410, 8-10 III B.c.
ἐὰν οὖν ὑμῖν δόξηι, καλῶς ποιήσε «τε».
παν 117 108 A. D.
aidv ov δώξῃ.
P. Giess. 41, 5-6 | Hadrian
ἐάν σου τῆι τύχηι δόξηι.
(This seems to be the earliest example.)
TORR HAST, 12 156 A.D.
δέομε, κύριαι, ἐάν σου τῇ τύχῃ δώξῃ.
BIGauyr 98 211 AvD;
ἐάν σοι δόξῃ.
Β. G. U. 164, 7-8 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἐάν σοι τῇ τύχῃ δόξῃ, ποίησον.
P. B. M. 1376, 10 ΤΠ Ν
ἵνα ἐὰν δόξῃ χώρω(ΞΞ χωρίῳ) δο[ῦν]αι ἀπαργυρισμὸν παράσχῃ.
ἐὰν δοκῇ
Although there are not many instances, they occur from 258
B.C. to 350 A.D. Many of the examples occur in private letters.
BS: 11854; 17 258 B.C.
ἐάν σοι δοκῆι. (κ, ἡ, and c are uncertain.)
PelLedabacolerless 164 B. Cc.
ἐὰν ὑμῖν δοκῇ.
P. Lips. 106 98 A.D.
ἐάν σοι δοκῇ.
ΣΟ ΒΡ 618..12 3rd A. D.
nav δὲ δοκεῖ συ.
(This is in very bad Greek, and δοκεῖ is intended for δοκῇ.
In line 13 occurs 7 δὲ δοκεῖ συ ἀπελθεῖς = εἰ δὲ δοκεῖ σοι ἀπελθεῖν).
ΠῚ Flor. 373, 10-11 ; 3rd A. D.
ἐάν σοι do|xot in a very badly written letter is probably
intended for ἐάν σοι δοκῇ.
*P. B. M. 404, 6 c. 346 A. D.
ἐάν σοι οὖν δοκῖ κύριε ἔλθιν.
P. Thead. (= P. Cair, 10888), 16 4th a. Ὁ.
ἜΥ lol
ἐάν σοι δοκῇ.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods τη the Non-Literary Papyrt 41
Curiously enough we find one example like the following, of
the second century A. D. See page 39.
P. R.9, 19-20 After 158 A. D.
[ἐϊάν σου τῇ [τύχῃ δοκῇ.
εἰ δοκεῖ
εἴ σοι δοκεῖ and its variants occur very frequently in papyri
of the third century B. C., particularly in petitions and requests.
There are a few examples from the later Ptolemaic period. Again
we find a few examples from the second to the fourth century
A. D. We may compare εἴ σοι δοκεῖ and εἰ δοκεῖ of the Classical
Period.®
P. S. I. 488, 3 258 B.C.
εἰ καὶ σοὶ δοκεῖ.
P. Amh. 33, 21 C15 /iBe Cc.
δεόμεθ᾽ ὑμῶν τῶν μεγίστων θεῶν εἰ ὑμῖν δοκεῖ.
Pert. Coll, 11: 1ὃ 303 Α. Ὁ.
εἴ σοι δοκοῖ.
(In this badly written letter, this is probably intended for
δοκεῖ).
*O. P. 1160, 22-23 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
ἡ δοκῖ σοι δὲ, πέμψον por.
εἰ δόξῃ
εἰ δόξῃ occurs in several papyri of the late Byzantine period.
Examples will be found under εἰ with the subjunctive, pp. 65, 66.
I shall give only one example here.
P. Par, 20, 29 c. 600 A. D.
εἰ δὲ δόξῃ αὐτοῖς ἐπελ[θεϊν)].
εἰ δόξειεν
We shall place here the type of εἰ δόξειεν, for convenience of
comparison with the other types. I have found only a few
examples, two of the middle of the third century A. D. and the
others later.
8 Cp. Ar. Thesmoph, 216 and 234.
42 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
O. P. 1194, 8 c. 265 Δ
el δόξειεν, (Report)
ORE ΣΙ ΟΟΙΠ11 18 303 A. D.
εἴ σου δόξειεν τῇ ἀρετῇ (Petition.)
τὸ δοκοῦν
These few examples, from 186 A. D. through the Byzantine
Period, may be listed here.
*P, Amh. 79, 34 c. 186 A. D.
γράφι σοι τὸ δοκοῦν σοι κελεῦσαι.
ΟΡ δ 26. 17 End 3rd A. D.
τὸ δοκοῦν σοι κέλευσον.
P. Thead. 16 (= P. Cair. 10885) After 307 a. "Ὁ.
τὸ δοκοῦν σοι περὶ αὐτῶν κέλευσον γενέσθαι.
P. Cair. 67076 Byz.
τὸ δοϊκοῦν ὑμῖν κελεύσατε γράψαι por.
P. Cair. 67077 Byz.
τὸ οὖν δοκοῦν διὰ ταχέων γράψατε, δέσποτα.
OTHER VARIATIONS
There are two other interesting variations.
P. S..I, 429, 24 III B.c.
ἐὰν δοκιμάζηι.
ΠΟΙ 7.2.0 Π͵ ΟΣ
εἰ οὖν δοκιμάζεις κατασπαρῆναι αὐτὴν ἀράκωι, σπεροῦμεν ἀράκου. And
in line 4, ὁπότε οὖν δοκιμάζεις.
*P, Fay. 134, 2-4 Early 4th
σκῦλον σεαυτὸν πρὸς ἡμᾶς φέρων εἰ δόξαν σοι τὴν ὕαλον.9
τὸ δόξον (δόξαυ) USED LIKE τὸ δοκοῦν
B. G. U. 19 (Col. II), 8-9 i 135 A. ἢ"
γράφω σοι, ἡγεμών], ἵνα τὸ δόξαν κελεύσῃς γενέσθαι.
*P. Flor. 273, 21-23 3rd A. D.
γράφω σοι οὖν iva τὸ δόξον σοι πραχθῇ.
(Ρ. Flor. 275, of same date, has the same expression.)
ἡ For σκύλλω inithe New Testament and the Papyri, see my ‘‘ Notes on New
Testament Greek,” Luth. Church Review, XLI (1922), pp. 242ff.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 43
ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶ
This is common at all periods, in loans particularly, but also
in many other kinds of agreements.
P. Hib. 84 (a), 7 301 B.C.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἀποτεισάτω ,
(This is interesting as the earliest papyrus quoted in this
paper. It is also one of the very earliest of all Greek
papyri.)
P. Hib. 86, 9-10 248 B.C.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶ ἀποτείσω.
*P. Ryl. 160 (d), Col. II, 17 42 A.D.
ἂμ μὴ δὲ ἀποδόσο.
*O. P. 269, Col. II, 8 ff. 57.Α. Ὁ.
ἐάν σοι δυΐΞε δοῖ] τὸ ἀργύριον δὺς [= δὸς] αὐτῷ ἀποχόν, καὶ ἐὰν
ei[plns ἀσφαλῆν δὺς ἀυτῷ τὸ ἀργύριον ἐνένκαι μοι.
(This is a private letter accepting a loan. The loan agree-
ment accompanies it; and in it occurs: ἐὰν δὲ μ[ὴ djod[ae
καθὰ γέγραπται ἐκτείσω σοι).
B. G. U. 190 ist cent. A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἰσαποδῶι, ἀποτισάτω παραχρῆμα.
*P, Fay. 124, 20 ff. 2nd cent. A. D.
εἰ μὴ πίθῃ Kal THY χορηγίαν TH μητρὶ εὐγνομώνως ἀποδίδυς.
B:-G. U. 578, 13 189 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶ, ἔσαι σοι ἡ πρᾶξις κτλ.
(Compare for the phrase the Nicareta inscription, c. 220
B. C., found I. G. VII. 3172. For examples of ἡ πρᾶξις ἔστω
of Ptolemaic times, cp. P. Amh. 49 and 50.)
Pak?5i) 11-12 238 A.D.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδοῖ.
P. Amh. 147, 12 ff. Ath-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ------τὴν ἀπόδοσιν μὴ ποιήσωμε ἐκ{κ) τίσω σοι.
P. Amh. 148, 11-12 487 A.D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐκ] προθέσμως ὑπερθῶμαι περὶ THY τούτων ἀπόδοσ[ ι]ν καὶ [βουληθ]-
eins κατὰ παράϊκλησιν ἐμὴν ἑτέραν μοι ἐνδοῦναι πρόθε[ σ]ιν
(The rest is gone.)
P. B. M. 999, 15 538 A. D.
> ae as! , « , a tal
εἰ μὴ ἀποδώσω] [ ]1--- -- -- ἑτοίμως ἔχω παρασχεῖν.
44 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
ἐὰν ἔπέλθω
Here is another phrase found in agreements of different kinds.
Pl obese Ptol. Per.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθῃ ἕτερός τις.
B. G. U. 1002, 13-14 So Bae
ἐὰν δέ Tis σοι ἐπέλθηι περὶ αὐτῶν, ἐκστήσω αὐτὸν ἀπό σου.
Β. 6. U. 906, 9 35) ΠῚ
ἐὰν ἐπέλθηι ἢ ἐνκαλέσηι, ἀποτισάτω.
ῬΟΒΉΝ1155:14 226A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθω ἢ μὴ βεβαιῶ ἥ τ᾽ ἔφοδος ἄ[κ]υρος ἔστω.
P. R. 110, 22-23 5th cent. A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθω ἢ μὴ βεβαιῶ.
Note—Compare also ὃς ἂν ἐπέλθῃ, as in P. Grenf. I, 27 (Col. 3), 3, és
δ᾽ [ἂν] ἐπέλθηι ἡ el[coldos ἄκυρος ἔστωι 109 B. Οἱ
εὕρω
This word, because of its meaning, is common at all times; it
is often found in letters, for ‘‘finding things’’ is a common
enough topic of correspondence.
Pas. Tas54, 9 25808 Ὁ:
ἐὰν οὗν πλοῖον εὕρω.
Ο, Ρ. 298.,.417 ff. 1st A. Ὁ.
ἄλλοτέ σοι ἔγραψα)
ἵνα ἐὰν εὕρῃς ἀγο]-
ραστὴν τοῦ μέρϊου-]
τῆς οἰκίας τῆς ἐν]
Τανάει ἵνα πραθῇ
ἘΡ Rein 54, 11-12 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν φαῦλα [ἐν] αὐτοῖς εὑρεθῇ μοι
(The first four letters are somewhat uncertain.)
ῬΘ 5257} 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν εὔρῃς ὁλοκοτ᾽ τίνους ἀγοράσαι — — — ἀγόρασον
(Two more examples in this letter.)
P. Amh. 144, 12-13 5th cent. A. D.
ἐὰν εὕρω πλοῖον ἔλθω] ἐν τάχι πρὸς ὑμᾶς.
(The letters of τάχει and the ν οἵ ἐν are not read with
certainty.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 45
O. P. 1996 (= P. Cair. 10009), 4 5th-6th cent. A. D.
καὶ ἐὰν εὑρεθῇς χρεωστῶν με, ἐπὶ τό' με λαβεῖν.
(Agreement.)
*P. B. M. 1349, 25 710 A. D.
ἐὰν εὕρωμέν σε.
γράφω AND COMPOUNDS
P. 5.1. 490, 4 958) Β' ΟΣ
ἐὰν γὰρ μὴ ἡμῖν ἀντιγράφηι.
*P. Petr. II, 20 (Col. IT) 25, ΒΟΟΣ
πυνθάνομαι τὸν Ἡρακλείδην μὴ προσεσχηκέναι τῆι... ἐπιστολῆι
τοῦ διέσθαι (written above), ἐὰν μὴ ἢ σὺ ἢ ὁ διοικητὴς αὐτῶι
γράψίη]ι.
P. Petr..I, 16, 12-13 230 B.C.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ διαγράψω [καὶ] μὴ παράσχωμαι τὸ λοιπὸν ἐμφανὲς ἀποτείσω
(Agreement accompanying a Will.)
PyAmh 31021 119 B.C.
ἐὰν ὁ τοπογραμματεὺς ὑπογρά(φῃ).
ΓΟ ΡΑΤ 1570 Late 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ διαγράψῃς τὸ ἐπικεφάλαιον.
"1862 ΞΡ σιν 10101) 90. fi. 710 Δ. Ὁ.
a fe
A \ ᾿ 23 AR 4 A ld / ΠΥ. Uj
καὶ ἐὰν μὴ ypagw colt] οὖν καὶ ἔρχοντε TA παλλεικάριά σου, μὴ ἀκούσῃς
αὐτῶν καὶ πέμπεις τί ποτε ἐκεῖ ἕως οὗ, ὡς εἴρητε, Ὑράψω σοι.
(ἔρχοντε = ἔρχωνται, Cp. ἀνάλομα in |. 43; πέμπεις = πέμπῃς.)
ΡΒΟΜΕΊΘθ175;.2-.9 7th A. D.
καὶ κἂν μὴ γράψω, ἐπίσταται.
ἐὰν ἢ ταῦτα ἀληθῆ
This phrase occurs in the Ptolemaic period, particularly in the
earlier part; and is characteristic of petitions and complaints.
P. Magd. 4, 7 22S Bae!
ἐὰν je τὰ διὰ τῆς ἐντεύξεως ἀληθῆ.
P. Magd. 13, 10-11 219 B.C.
ἐὰν ἦι ἀληθῆ τὰ διὰ τῆς ἐντεύξεως γεγραμμένα.
P. Magd. 35, 10 ZISIBSGs
ἐὰν ἦι ἃ Ὑράφω ἀληθῆ.
46 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. S. I. 542, 23-24 III B.c.
κἄνπερ ἦι ταῦθ᾽ οὕτως ἔχοντα.
P. Amh. 30, 14-15 II B.c.
ἐὰν ἦι ola γράφω (Supply [ἀληθῆ] in lacuna following.)
ποιῶ
This word occurs freely in letters and may occur in documents
of various kinds.
Bi. ie 292 519-21 11 Ὲ1Ὸ:
ἐὰν μὲν ποιῶσιν ἡδέως αὐτά, βέλτιστα" εἰ δὲ μή γε, κατάπλευσον σύ.
P. Hib. 55, 4-5 250 B.C.
ἐὰν δὲ βραδύτερον ποιῆις σαυτὸν βλάψεις.
ΒΘ 5535) III B.c.
ἐὰν ἐκποιῆι σοι, σκηνὴν κατἀγαγε.
(Hypomnema.)
P. Petr. III 43 (2), Verso Col. V, 7-8 ΤΠ ΒΤ ΟΣ
ἐὰν] δὲ [μ]ὴ ἐργάσηται ἢ μὴ πίοι]ῆι κατὰ τὰ γεγρα[μμ]ένα ἐξέστω.
(Contract.)
Paretrriiim26ce Liber
ἐὰν δέ τις τούτων TL ποιήσηι ἀποτεισάτω.
ΡΟ 62, Colavis ΠῚ [lipo
ἐὰν δέ τινες τῶν τελωνῶν πλείους ὠν[ὰς .. .]} καὶ ἔν τισιν μὲν ἐπιγένημα
ποιῶσιν ἐν... .] πῶσιν᾽ ἀντιλογισθήσεται τὰ ἐπιγενήμ[ατα].
P. Tebt. 105, 49 103 B.C.
4.8 \ \ 2 iol f ἐς ᾽ la 8 f
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἐκποιῇ κομίσασθαι προσαποδότωι αὐτῶι ‘Qpiwy,
(Lease of Land.)
es 1059768 1 LB; Ὁ:
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ποιῶ[μ]εν [κ]αθὰ γέγραπται, ἐκτείσ[ο]μέν σοι
(Loan.)
B. G. U. 1128, 8-9 sialic
ἐὰν 6€-——6 πατὴρ ‘Eoriato(s) μὴ ποιῆται τὸν τοῦ δούλου ἀγορασμὸν
(Sale of a Slave.) :
Si Mz ald 1195.52 c. 10 Bac
nav καλὸς ποιήσις ἐρωτήσις [alepl ἐμοῦ
(As the editor says, the writer didn’t understand much
Greek.)
10 Cp. Grenf. Rev. Laws, Ὁ. 95.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri. 47
P. B. M. 356, 10-11 1st A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν yap ἄλλως ποιήσῃς.
P. Fay. 91, 27-28 99 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ποιῇ.
(Contract.)
*P. Fay. 21, 14-15 134 A.D.
ἐπεξελευσόμενος ἐάν τις ἄλλα Tapa ταῦτα ποιήσας.
(In this Proclamation of the Prefect we note a confusion of
constructions. ποιήσας either implies φαίνηται or a similar
verb; or is for ποιήσῃ.)
ΤΟ P5928, 11 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἐὰν ταρείχια σεαυτῷ ποιῇς].
P. Flor. 162, 7--9 3rd A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν Guedes τι ποιήσῃς Kal τὰ σύμβολα μὴ λάβῃς.
Be blor2s13714 449 A.D.
εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσω, ἐπὶ τῷ μηκέτι με ἐπιζητίεῖν]
(Acknowledgment of Debt.)
P. Cair. 67032, 80 SOLAS Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσομεν, παρέξει κτλ.
(Contract.)
The last two examples have εἰ instead of ἐάν.)
χρείαν ἔχῃς
This is a very convenient phrase.
Jee oped 9571 244 B.C.
ἔγραψα [ 1], ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχηις, διδόνα[ι.
{0 731: 635} 84. Ὁ.
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐάν μου χρήαν ἔχητε παρ᾽ ἡμέραν δώσετε.
(Contract for Services.)
ἜΟ. Ρ. 1346 Perhaps 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν χρείαν αὐτοῦ ἔχῃς, Exe, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ, ἄφος αὐτὼ [ = ἄφες αὐτὸ]
ἄχρεις ἄν παραγένομαι.
Ο. P. 498, 33--34 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ xpelilav ἔχωσι οἱ οἰκοδόμοι ὑπουργίας λαξικῆς ἡμεῖς ὑπουργή-
σομεν.
(Contract.)
48 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. S. I. 476, 7-8 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ καὶ Δ[ι]ονυσίου χρείαν ἔχῃς (written above) μεταδώσεις.
*P. 5.1. 829, 14-15 4th? A.D.
bal
ἐὰν χρίαν σχῇς ἀργυρίων ἢ κρι[θ]ῆς ὃ θέλις λάβαι ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ
ἀδελφὸς ἡμῶν Γερμανός.
O. P. 1862 (= P. Cair. 10101), 24-26 7th A. D.
kal ἐὰν χρείαν ἔχω ἄλλου χορτοάχυρον, Ὑράφω σοι Kal περὶ τούτου.
(= χορτοαχύρου. γράφω is future in sense, as is ἐπέρω =éraipw
in line 48.)
ἐὰν δέ Tis ἄβροχος γένηται
This seems to occur freely in the Christian era. The first two
examples, from the Ptolemaic age, are placed here for comparison.
Paretre lite097 22 Prob. III B. c.
éaly δέ τις KaTaBpoxos γένηται.
(Report on Cultivation.)
P. Tebt. 106, 19 1015:
ἐὰν δὲ ἡ ἐπάνωι ἢ ἡ ὑποκάτωι γῆι βρεχῆι (βρεχ <O> fu or βραχῆιν Ed).
P. Amh. 85, 15-16 78 A. D.
bal
ἐὰν δέτι GBpoxos γένηται ἢ Kal ποταμοφόρητος ἢ ὕφαμμος ἢ κατε-
ξυσμένηι [[παρα]]γένηται.
(Application for Lease.)
O. P. 1279, 22-24 139 A. ἢ.
ἐὰν δέ τις GBpoxos γένηται, παραδεχθήσεταί μοι, (Lease.)
OG es 7 7} 1: 187 A. D.
ἐὰν δέ τις τοῖς ἑξῆς ἔτεσι ἄβροχος γένηται παραδεχθήσεται
(Lease of Land.)
P. B. M. 350, 11-12 212 A. D.
ἐὰν δέ τίι]ς &Bpoxos ἢ Kab’ ὕδατος γένηται παραδεχθήσεται.
(Application for Lease.)
C. P. Herm. 119 (Part II), 21-22 ͵ 226.4
[ἐὰν] [δὲ ὃ μὴ γ]είνοιτο ἀβροχία γένηται
(Offer to Lease.)
O. P. 1689, 24 ff. 266 A. D.
ἐὰν δέ τις, [δ]μὴ εἴη, &Bpoxos γένηται, πίαρ]αδεχθήσεται τοῖς μεμι-
σθωμίέϊνοις.
(Lease).
Use of Subjunctive and Optatite Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 49
P. B. M. 1841, 24 536 A. D.
εἰ δὲ, ὃ μὴ εἴη, ἄβρ[οἸχος ἢ
(Acknowledgment of Lease.)
γένηται AND COMPOUNDS
γένηται and its compounds are common at all times. Only
a few examples can be given.
P. Petr. II, 13. (5), end. C2258, BiG
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ παραγένηι, ἀναγκασθησόμεθα.
P. Hib. 91, 8-9 LLB: Ge
ἐὰν δέ τι βασιλικὸν [κώλυμα γένηται, ἀποδότω.
P. S. I. 445, 15-16 III B.c.
εἴδην yap ὅτι, ἄν σὺ mapayern <t >, οἰκοδομήσω.
Ρ. Tebt. 386, 20 12 Βέ Ce
ἐὰν δὲ χωρισμὸς γένηται ἀπ᾿ [ἀϊλλήλων ἐκτίσω
(Marriage Contract.)
P. Giess. 69, near end LIS A.D.
πλεῖστόν por, ἄδελφε, Kal ἐν τούτῳ παρέξῃ, ἐὰϊν ἡ] κρειθὴ ταχέως
[1 ἰσγένηται.
P. Ryl. 105, 29-30 136 A.D.
ἐάν τι παρὰ τὸ δέον γένη(ται)
(Notice of Death.)
ΟΝ 720: 7 137 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ χρεία γένητε — — — δώσει
(Lease of Vineyard.)
P, Hamb. 70, 17 c. 145 A. D.
ἐάν τις ζήτησις γένηται Ib. line 23 ἐάνπερ κρίσις γένηται.
P. Ryl. 239, 12-13 Mid. 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δέ τις ἀμ[έϊλεια γένηται.
O27 B21273,°52-53 260 A. D.
καὶ ἐὰν, ὃ μή εἴη, ἀπαλλαγὴ γένηται, ἀποδώσω
(Marriage Contract.)
PB a | 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ μηθὲν τούτων γείνηται.
ΟΡ 2220, 23-24 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν παραγένῃ σὺν θεῷ.
PAReui. 55.},9 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν γένηται πρός σε Διόσκορος ὀνηλάτης.
50 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P. Cair. 67001, 26 514 A.D.
εἰ δὲ βλάβην γένηται (ἕτοιμοί ἐσμεν in apodosis.)
*B. 6. U. 950, 5-6 Byz. Per.
ἐὰν οὖν viv παραγιένῃ (Sic) σὺν θεῷ ἐν ᾿Αλεξανδρείᾳ, διὰ σεαυτοῦ
φέρε αὐτά.
SEPARATION IN MARRIAGE CONTRACTS
Separation is provided for in some marriage contracts of the
Roman period. One early example occurs if the dating is
correct.
P. Gen. 21, 12 ΤΠ ΕΞΟ:
ἐὰν δὲ ’A. ἑκοῦσα βούληται ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι.
Ο. P. 267, 16-17 36 A.D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἀπαλλαγῶμεν am’ ἀλλήλων ἐξέσται σοι ἔχειν κτλ.
Ο. Ρ. 496, 8-9 127 a. pv.
ἐ[ὰ]ν δέ τι διαφέρωντα[(] πρὸς ἀλλήλους κ[αὶ βούλ]ηται ἡ γαμουμένη
ἀϊπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ γαμοῦντος ἐπει] [[δὰ»}] ἡ ἀπαλλαγὴ
[γἹἱένηται «ἡ > γαμου[μέϊνη μὲν ἀποσπάτω κτλ.
Ib. 1.10 127 Δ}:
ἐὰν δὲ ἔνκυο[9] οὖσα ἡ γα[μου]μένη ἀπαλλαγῇ δώσει αὐτῇ ὁ γαμῶν κτὰᾺ.
C. P. R. 25, 19-20 136 A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ διαφορᾶς τοῖς γαμοῦσι γενομένης χωρίζωνται ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων,
ἀποδότω κτλ.
ΒΒ 524 After 150 A. ἢ.
ἐὰν μὲν αὐτὸς αὐτὴν [ἀπο]πέμπηται παραχρῆμα, ἐὰν δὲ αὐτὴ ἑκοῦσα
ἀπαϊλλάττηται].
Ἰδὲ ἥδ Loelo 190 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ [δ]ιαφορᾶς αὐτοῖς γενομένης χωρισθῶνται ἀπ ἀλλήλων].
αἱρῶμαι, ἐθέλω, βούλωμαι
These verbs are common enough. Compare the examples
under Relative Clauses.
PHS sl 01929 : Iilisrc
ἐὰν βούληι ἔγμισθώσεις. :
ΟΡ 05.927 103 B. ὉΣ
ἐὰν δὲ II. αἱρῆται χερσοκοπῆσαι
(δότω in the conclusion.)
P. Grenf. II, 36 (= Witk. 54), 17-18 05 Back
καλῶς ἡμῖν ὧδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν ἀγοράσαι ἥκατε.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 51
P. Ryl. 178, 4 Early 1st A. D.
καὶ ἐὰν μὲν αἱρῆται with θρέψει in conclusion; and in line 6 ἐὰν δὲ
μή βούληται τοῦτο ποιῆσαι, ἀποδώσει.
ΟΥΡ 201 8:ῃ: ΘΟ Ds
ἐὰν δὲ θέρῃς (= θέλῃς) εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδρεα <v > ἀπελθεῖν, ᾿Απολλὼς Θέωνος
ὑπάγει αὔριον.
ΠΤ (ν.}11:597}21 Ἴ5 ΑΙ. De
ἐάν δὲ θέλῃς, σύντυχε Καισαρᾶτι.
ἘΡ Hamb. 87, 6 Beg. 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν οὖν θέλῃς, ἀνάβα.
(OF 5511..7 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν γὰρ θεοὶ θέλωσι.
ΒΊΟΥ 417525 2nd-3rd cent. A. Ὁ.
οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι, ἐὰν θέλῃς, πάντα περαιωθήσεται.
Ῥ }21:Π: 246 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ βουληθῶ ὑφαίνειν ἱμάτιά μου ἴδια ἐξουσίαν ἔχω μέχρει τεσσάρων
γερδίων.
ἘΡ Gen. 54, 32-33 (Cp. Add. et Corrig.), Ce s5ORAD:
Kal ἂν θέλῃ ὁ θεὸς μετ᾽ ἐσοῦ εἰμι.
*B. 6. U. 1044, 11-12 4th A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ βόλησθαι.
ΡΟ 3910: 5th-6th cent. A. D.
ἐὰν ἔλθε εἰς τὴν κώμην ἐὰν θέλεις, τὴν τιμὴν παρεχει ἐὰν θέλῃς (ENE
εἰς = ἔλθῃς els; παρεχει = perhaps παρέχειν, but I think more
likely πάρεχε.)
ἐὰν 6€ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω
This phrase meets us particularly in Wills. It is found most
frequently in the Ptolemaic period, though it occurs occasionally
later. In a few cases we find simply ἐάν τι πάθω. Cp. IG. VII,
3083, of the third century B.C., ἡ 6€ τί κα πάθει ’APavodwpa; and
SGDI. 2034 of 186 B. C., εἰ δὲ τί κα πάθηι Νεοπάτρα.
P. Petr. II, 13 (19), 5 Mid. III B.c.
καὶ ἐάν τι τῶν κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον γίνηται
(Letter).
Pibetces 1.0 Lilia Ὁ:
ἐὰν δέ Te ἀνθρώπινον πάθω καταλείπω.
52 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
Peretti lilo tC). 91 III B.c.
ἐάν τι πάθηι ᾿Αρτε[μιδώρα.
PaGen, 21. 15 Probsth fac:
ἐὰν δέ τις αὐτῶν ἀνθρώπινόν τι πάθῃ Kal τελευτήσῃ,
(Marriage Contract.)
ΒΓΕ 65222 Prob. 89 B. c.
ἐὰν μέν τι πάθω.
ΡΝ 78:9 Early ist A. D.
ἐὰν μή τι πάθῃ ἀνθρώπινον ὃ καὶ συνφανὲϊς yer|nralt, with ἔστωι
in apodosis.
(Agreement with a Nurse.)
Bes ei 096.02 3rd A. D.
xlo]ulale [ἀϊνθρὠπινόν τι πάθω.
(The letters x, μ, and e are not read with certainty in this
mere fragrant of a Will. The editor suggests for the pre-
ceding line ἐπὰν δὲ, ὅπερ ἀπεύ-- : perhaps it should be ἐὰν δὲ κτλ.)
ἐὰν τελευτήσω
This is the common expression in Wills and Marriage Contract
in the Roman period.
ΒΟ 11 55.160 Prob. late I B. c.
ἐὰν δὲ τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν τελευτήσωσι ἀδιάθετοι, ἔρχεσθαι τοὺς κλήρους
τούτων.
(Decree).
O. P. 490, 4 124 A.D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τελευτήσω καταλἰ[είπω.
O. P. 496, 13 127 Ae
ἐὰν δὲ ἡ γαμουμένη προτέρα τελευτήσῃ and line 14 ἐὰν δὲ ὡσαύτως
ὁ γαμῶν [π]ρ[όϊτερος τελευτήσῃ.
(Marriage Contract.)
The next example shows another expression; but the context
is not sound. It is an agreement concerned with certain obliga-
tions.
P25. ΤΕ 089 5th A. D.
θανάτῳ περιπέσῃ, ἐμὲΪ [ 1] αὐτοῦ χώραν ἀϊποπληρῶσαι ----Ἰ ------
[ὡ]μολόγησα.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods tn the Non-Literary Papyri 53
ἐὰν ζῇ
This is the opposite of ἐὰν τελευτήσῃ, and will be found so
used in some of the same documents. ἐὰν περιῇ is also used, and
so may be ἐὰν περιγένωμαι. There are a few other interesting
examples of ἐὰν ζῶ,
P. Ryl. 68, 26 Prob. 89 B. Cc.
ἐὰν δὲ περιγένωμαι (corresponding to ἐὰν μέν τι πάθω above.)
O. P. 490, 5 124 A.D.
ἐὰν ζῇ (Will).
O. P. 497, 10 Early 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν ζῇ. (Marriage Contract.)
ἘΡ Hamb. 88, 16-17 2nd A. D.
οὐτέποτε ἀνταμείψωμαι αὐτῷ τὴν χάριν, ἐάνπερ ζῶ.
(equivalent to while I live.)
Paseo ΠΣ 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
>
ἐὰν ζῶμεν αὔριόν ἐστιν ἐν ὅσῳ ἀβασκάντως καὶ ἰσχυρότεροϊν] γείνεται.
: ἐὰν περιῇ
This occurs sometimes in Wills, and occasionally in other
documents. περιῆν sometimes occurs; and it is impossible to
distinguish by form περιῆ(ν) the subjunctive and περιῆ(ν) the im-
perfect indicative, which also occurs.
+P Ἦν. 154,°26 66 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν] δὲ [οὗτος μή περιῆι
(Marriage Contract.)
O. P. 496, 9 12 RAD.
ἐὰν rept}, εἰ δὲ μὴ
(So the editor writes it in this Marriage Contract. It
should be written περιῇν).
ΡΒ 116 149 A. Ὁ.
δεῖ αὐτο]ὺς τοὺς υἱοὺς] ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου ἀποδώσιν ἐάν τε παρῇ ἢ ἀπῇ ἢ
καὶ μὴ περιῇ.
Nore:—In Β. G. U. 1187, we have an instance of the indicative
in ἐφ᾽ ὃν περιῆ χρόνον among past tenses (I B. Goya Anas Ὁ:
P. 68 (131 A. D.) περιῆ occurs for περιῆν. These two papyri are
not carefully written.
11 See pp. 27 ff., ἦν as Subjunctive.
54 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
ἐὰν συμβῇ
In the earlier examples an infinitive is found dependent on
ἐὰν συμβῇ. In most instances this infinitive is παθεῖν or τελευ-
τῆσαι; and the whole expression is similar to those which we
have recently considered.
B. G. U. 1149, 33-34 13° BG,
ἐὰν δὲ συνβῇ τὸν δοῦλον διαδρᾶναι ἢ καὶ παθεῖν τι ἀνθρώπινον, καὶ
οὕτως εἶναι
(Loan).
B. G. U. 1108, 11 (above) 5 Bec
καὶ ἐὰν ὃ [μ]ὴ γένο(ιτο) συμβῇ τὸ παιδί(ον) παθεῖν τι ἀνθρώ(πινον)
(Contract with a Nurse.)
ΟΕ Ὁ 117-137 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ συμβῇ τὴν ᾿Αμμωνοῦν ἄτεκνον καὶ ἀδιάθετον τελευτῆσαι, ἔσται.
(Will).
O. P. 491, 10 126 A.D.
ἐὰν δέ τινι -- -- -- συμβῇ ἀτέκνῳ τελευτῆσαι, ἔστω
(Will).
O. P. 95, 34-35 129 Α. Ὁ.
ἣν ἐὰν συμβῇ παραπεσῖν ἢ ἄλλως πως διαφθαρ[ῆ]ναι
(Sale of a Slave.)
Pega 113425226 ΟΡ ΖΖΟ ASD
ἡ συμβαίνῃ τι πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἡ εἴη τὴν περὶ τούτου ζήτησιν.
(The editor’s note suggests: ἐὰν συμβαίνῃ τι, πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἴη ἡ
περὶ τούτου ζήτησις. ΤῊΪ5151Ππὸ Sworn Declaration of Potamo-
phylakes.)
QO. P. 1854 (= P. Cair. 10033), 4 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἐὰν συμβῇ αὐτῷ τί ποτε, παρέχεις.
παραστήσω
This is found particularly in Surety-Bonds, Guarantees, and
the like, but may occur in other documents.
P. B. M. 220 (Col. II), 14 f. 133 BiG:
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ παραστήσωμαι αὐτὸν ἐν ταῖς τρισὶν [ἡμέραις ἀποτείσω.
(Contract of Sale.)
Ὁ 42591415 23 A. Da
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ παριστῶ ἐν ταῖς] προκειμέναις ἡμέρα «ιὉ»-ς ἐκτείσω
(Bail).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 55
B. G. U. 891 (Verso), 16-17 144 A.D.
ἐϊὰν δὲ μὴ παραιστῶμεν ἡμεῖς αὐτ(ούς), [αὐ]τοὶ [ὑ]πὲρ αὐτ(ῶν) λόγον
ὑπεξόμεθα
(Bail).
*P: Grenf. II, 62,-12 ff. 211 ALD.
\ 2
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ παριστῶ, ἔγὼ 6 αὐτὸς ἔγβιβάσω τὰ πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐπιζητούμενα,
ἢ ἔνοχος inv τῷ [ὅρκ]ῳ.
(Bail).
P. B. M. 1248, 21 ff. 345 A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ [ris] αὐτῶν λιποτα[κ]τήσῃ Kal μὴ παρα[σ]τίἠήσωϊμεν ἡμεῖς
αὐτοὶ -- -- -- [ὑπομ]ενοῦμεν.
(This is a return of the names of villagers for ὑδροφυλακία
with guarantee. Nos. 1246 and 1247 are similar, and sup-
port the text.)
*P. Amh. 139, 19-20 350A..D.
ἐὰν δέ τις αὐτῶν ἀφυστερήσῃ Kal μὴ παραστησόμεθα [ἡμεῖς αὐτοὶ
τὸν ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ λόγον ὑπομενοῦμεν.
(Nomination of Officers.)
Pelips. 56. 190-20 398 A.D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἀρυστερήσῃ καὶ μὴ ἱπαρ]αστήσω, ἔγὼ αὐτὸς κτλ. (Bail. The
usual oath occurs below: [ἢ] ἔνοχος εἰἴην τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ).
ἐὰν παραβαίνῃ (παρασυγγραφῇ)
Examples of ἐὰν παραβαίνῃ, sometimes ἐὰν παρασυγγραφῇ are
found in contracts and agreements of different kinds. The
examples come from Ptolemaic and Roman periods.
PS Petr. {11 550}; 22-23 c. 200 8. c.
ἐπιόντιιδὲ 17] παρασυγγραφήσηι καὶ μὴ ἐμμείνηι τίῆι ὁμολογίᾳ ἡ]
ἐπέφοδος αὐτῷ ἄκυρος ἔστω
(It is to be regretted that the text is not better preserved;
this reading is supported by comparison with the other
examples.)
O. P. 1644, 21-22 Olena ce
[lav δέ τις ἡμῶν παρὰ τὰ προγεγραμ[μ]ένα mapacvyypag[f] ἢ
ἐπέλθῃ τ[ῶι] Μοσχίωνι, with πίροϊσαποτεισάτω in apodosis.
B. G. U. 1118, 41 2 5. ΟἹ
ἐκ, Ud , e ,
ἐὰν δέ τι παραβαίνωσιν οἱ μεμισθωμένοι.
56 ὔσε of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
Β. G. U. 1129, 33-34 IS Roe.
ἐὰν δέ τι τούτων παραβῇ.
Β. G. U. 1116, 26-27 iS ie ht 8
ἐὰν δέ τι τοὐ(των) παραβαίνῃ, εἶναι αὐτὸν παραχρῆ(μα) ἀγώγιμο(ν).
Β. σ. ὕὉϑ. 1126, 16 & Bac.
ἐὰν δέ τι παραβαίνῃ, ἐκτίνιν. ;
ΟΣ ΡΠ ΑΜ ΕῚ 68 A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ παρασυνγραφῶ ἢ μὴ ποιῶ καθὰ γέγραπται, ἐκτείσω σοι.
*P, Tebt. 391, 22-23 99 A.D.
t rus δὲ ἡμῶν τῶν τεσσάρων ἐὰν παραβῇ, with ἐκτίσι in apodosis.
SCP ART ΠΟΘ. 5 139 A.D.
na δὲ mapaBlas τὸ] προκί[μεϊνον ἐκτίσι σοι (The editor suggests:
πᾶς δὲ παραβὰς ------ ἐκτίσει. think not; we should read ἠὰ(ν)
δὲ παραβϊῇ τὸ] -- -- -- ἐκτίσει. ἡ occurs frequently for ε in this
papyrus; as τῇ occurs for τὴν, na may well occur for ἠὰν.)
P. R. II, 31, 19-20 155 A. D-
ἐὰν δέ τι τούϊτω]ν παραβῇ ἡ ὁμολοῦσα ἢ μὴ βεβαιοῖ — — — ἀποτισάτω.
ἐὰν μὴ βεβαιοῖ (βεβαιώσῃ)
This belongs to the same type of documents as the preceding
word.
P. Hib. 90, 18 ΖΒ ΟΣ
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ βεβαιώσηι -- -- -- ἀπἰοτεισάτω.
ΓΟ 105.924 103: BG:
ἐὰν δ]ὲ «αὐ >rods μὴ βεβαιοῖ καθὰ γέγραπται ἢ ἄλλο τι παρασυγ-
γραφῆι τῶν προγεγραμμένων ἀποτεισάτω Ὡρίωϊν.
Cerro es 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ βεβαιῶσι ἢ μὴ παρέχωνται καθ᾽ ἃ γέγραπται, with ἀπο-
τισάτω n apodosis, supplied in lacuna.)
ἀργήσῃ and ἀτακτήσῃ
These occur in Contracts of Apprenticeship. The first two
examples have relative clauses.
BaGe 1755 13 FS
Kal ἅς δὲ ἐὰν ἀρτακτήσηι He ἀρρωστήσηι, ἀντιπαρέ[ξω colt (ἀρτακ-
τήσηι = ἀτακτήσηι. The writer had in mind, according to
the editor, ἀργήσηι; I don’t doubt it.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 57
O. P. 275, 24-25 66 A. D.
ὅσας δ᾽ ἐὰν ἐν τούτῳ ἀτακτήσῃ ἡμέρας ἐπὶ τὰς ἴσας αὐτὸν παρέξεται
-- -- -- ἢ ἀ[πο]τεισάτω.
ὉΠ 725: 09 ii : 183 A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ πλείονας τούτων ἀργήσῃ [ἢ ἀσ]θενήσῃ ἤ ἀτακτήσῃ ἢ bu’ ἄλλην
τινὰ αἰτίαν ἡμέρας ἐπὶ τὰς [ἴσ]ας ἐπάναγκες] παρέξει.
Ο. Ρ. 1647, 39--41 Late 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἡϊμέρας tulas] ἀργήσῃ ἢ do6lelvqo[p] with πα[ραμ]ενεῖ
in apodosis.
λαμβάνω
This verb occurs frequently, particularly in private corre-
spondence.
P. S. I. 363, 18-19 25 leBr Ὁ:
οὐ yap ἠβούλετο] ropeb <e >oBat, A<p> μὴ ἐφόδιον [λ]άβηι.
PPS/51.:426510 ff: LBs:
ἔγὼ δὲ ob λαμβάνω, Edu μὴ ἃς ἐμοὶ ἔταξα <s > λάβω.
Pabilless 1 G@ol.3) 257 After 240 B. c.
ἐάϊν τινας καταλαμβάνηι.
PePrk 5761..31392 C199. AnD:
ἐὰν γὰρ ἡ ὀρφ[ανὸς] τῶν ἰδίων ἀντιλαμβά[ν]ηται.
ΧΡ Cd EKER 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
εἰδὼς ὅτι, ἐὰν γράμματά σου λάβω, ἱλαρά εἰμι περὶ τῆς σωτηρίας
ἡμῶν (ΞΞ ὑμῶν).
Oe P71707, 15-16 204 A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ ἐπιλάβηταί τις αὐτῆς ἀποστήσει αὐτὸν ὁ ’A.
(Sale of 516-855.)
ΘΒ. 21.519 3rd-4th cent. A. Ὁ.
αν o.. καταλάβω τὸ Ϊ. .. πλο]ῖον
(The context is not good. The editor says no ἐάν σε stood
here. I suggest ἐάν δὲ).
*O, P. 1297, 14 4th A. D.
ἐὰν καταλάβῃ Θεόδωρος ἐκεῖ, δεῦρο per’ αὐτοῦ.
ΡΥ 9056 6th A. D.
ἐὰν yap, δέσποτα, μὴ καταλάβε με ὁ ἔλεός σου, οὐ δύνομαι (= κατα-
λάβῃ).
B. G. U. 103, 3-4 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἐὰν αὐθεντίσεις TH πρᾶγμα Kal λάβις αὐτοὺς ἐν TH πόλει, Kal ἀπαλ-
λάξουσιν πρὸς ἀλλίλους.
58 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
ἐὰν ἀμελήσῃς
This belongs especially to letters and orders.
Ρ. Τερί. 37, 23 ῬΓΟΒΣ 795. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δὲ ἀμελήσῃς, ἀναγκασθήσομαι.
O. P. 1409, 20-21 278 A.D.
ἐὰν yap ——— τολμή[σ]ῃ ἢ -- -- -- ἀμελήσῃ, ἴστω.
ἘΣ ΘΓ 842:77 ft: 4th? A. D.
διὸ γνώτωσαν ὅτι, ἐὰν ἀμελήσωσιν ἐλθεῖν το... .| . . . εἰς Σιναρύ,]
Σαραπίων αὐτοῖς [πράγματα κει ἱνήσει.
ἔλθω AND COMPOUNDS
This verb is natural in private correspondence. A few
examples will suffice.
ΠΡ ΤΟ 6 5 2nd-3rd cent. A. Ὁ.
εἶτα ἂν δὲ ἔλθῃς εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριαν οὐ μὴ λάβω χεῖραν παρὰ [σ]οῦ
οὔτε πάλι χαίρω σε λυπόν. (Naughty Theon’s Letter. σε λυπὸν
ΞΞ σοι λοιπόν).
*Meyer, Ostr. 66, P. 8. Β. 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἀπῆλθεν εἰς μακράν, οἱ ἄλλοι δόσι (= δώσουσι, ΟΥ
better δῶσι) καθ’ ἡμέραν d(paxpuds) n, ἐὰν δύναται ἕκατος. δεκανία
αὐτοῦ, ἐὰν μὴ ἀπῆλθεν, δόσι καθ᾽ ἡμέραν (δρ)η. (ἀπῆλθεν is
probably intended for the aorist subjunctive. So the
editor regards ἀπῆλθεν as intended to represent the future.)
O. P. 937, 5-6 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν οὖν ζήσω χρόνον καὶ ἔλθω εἰς τὴν πατρίδα μου, ἐκδικήσω ἐμαυτόν.
*O. P. 1069, 5-6 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν ἔρθω πρὸ σέν.
(This is for ἐὰν ἔλθω πρὸς σέ. Above the line εἵνα ἔρθω is
erased, and above that ἐὰν).
P. Flor. 259, 5 ff. 3rd A. D.
μαθέτω ὁ Κιὸτ ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ δῇ (= dot) τὸν ἄλλον σάκκον ἢ ἀνέλθῃ καὶ
τὸ κατ᾽ αὐτὸν ἐνθῇ στρατιώτης κατέρχετε ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν.
TP BSMi243.921299 c. 346 A. D.
ἐὰ ἔζλ]θουσι. (ξὰ is for ἐάν. “No other restoration seems
possible, so a colloquial present ἔλθω must be supposed ”’
says the editor. Not rightly; for ἔλθουσι may be for ἔλθωσι,
as the confusion of w and ovis found frequently at this time.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 59
PPARs MoM 1791.Ὁ ἢ Α. ἢ.
ἐὰν ὁ Θεὸς συνέλθῃ μοι καὶ ἀπαλλάξῃ.
ἐὰν δύνωμαι
This word is found particularly in letters.
Peal 550,9 III B. c.
ἐὰν δύνηται.
O. P. 742 (= Witk. 56), 10 ‘Year’ 2’ Bec.
ἐάν τι δύνηι -- -- -- δός.
P. Hamb. 86, 8 ff. 2nd A. D.
mapayevod, iva av δυνασθῶμεν τὸν μικρὸν ἐπικρεῖναι.
ΟΡ. 0322... :8 Late 2nd A. ἢ.
ἐὰν δύνῃ ἀναβῆναι ἵνα ἐπιγνοῖς τὸν ὄνον.
ΒΓ 5.335} 5 ff: 2nd-3rd cent. A. Ὁ.
[π]άντως ποιήσατε, ἐὰν [ἢ] δυνατὸϊν, κατ ?PleOety ὑμᾶς els τὰ γενέσια
τοῦ υἱοῦ [ἡμῶ]ν Σαραπίωνος.
*P. Ryl. 242, 4-5 SIatA.D.
καλῶς ποιήσας, nav ἧς advvares πέμψε μοι ἀκάνθινεν χυλέν, πέμψεν
μοι λάβανον
(The editor is right in calling it an illiterate letter. His
reconstruction is as follows: ἐὰν fs ἀδύνατος πέμψαι μοι ἀκάν-
θινον χυλόν, πέμψον μοι λίβανον).
ΡΟ 729}. 3rd-4th cent. A. D
kal ἂν δυνασθῇς, des (= δός)
(‘‘Hochst vulgare’’ says the editor.)
P. B. M. 1001 539 A. D.
εἰ δὲ μὴ δυνηθῶ διδόναι σοι τὸν ἀτὸν σῖτον Kal οἶνον παρέξω σοι (ἀτὸν
with mark above a is for αὐτὸν, as often in late papyri.)
OTHER WorpDs
These occur not so frequently as the preceding words and
phrases, and yet are worthy of notice. Only a few examples of
each will be given.
ἐὰν ἐνδειξώμεθα
This occurs in a number of papyri of the end of the 3rd century
B.C. Observe too the use of the verb in a relative clause.
60 ὅδε of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Magd. 28, 8 210:85 Ὁ]
ἐὰν ἐνδείξωμαι αὐτοὺς κατακεκλυκότας μου τὸν σπόρον.
P. Magd. 13, 12 219 B.C.
ἃ ἃν ἐνδειξώμεθα.
ἐὰν φαίνωμαι
PASS 19550,0 25 5,5 Ce
καὶ ἂν φαινώμεθα εἰσμεμετρηκότες, συντάξας ἀποδοῦναι (sc. καλῶς
ἂν οὖν ποιήσαις, |. 3).
ΒΊΟΣ 1365.5 135 A. D.
κἂν φανῶσι ------ ποιήσει τὰ προσήκοντα.
P. Tebt. 288, 11 226 A. D.
ἐάν τι φανῇ [κεϊκακουργημένο]ν ἢ ob δεόντως πεπρ[α]γμένον
(Proclamation of Strategus.)
ἐὰν δέῃ
P. Hib. 5 c. 245 B.C.
ἐάν τι δέηι ἀνηλῶσαι δός.
*P. Tebt. 58 (= Witk. 47), 55-56 iiijesc:
ἐὰν det σε συνπεσῖν τῶι A. σύνπεσαι.
(Apparently the indicative.)
be brik s024 15 19 A. D.
ἐὰν yap dén, with διαδώσει in apodosis.
Be GN 245556 2nd A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν δέῃ λογοθέτην δοῦναι, δῶσι.
ΓΟ ΒΒ 1710 16-17 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δεήσῃ] καὶ αὐτοῖς γράψαι μὴ ὑπερθῇ.
ἐὰν εἰδῶ, ἐὰν ἴδω
These are naturally confused, because of etacism; nor is the
difference in meaning great enough to aid in distinguishing them.
I give the examples without accent.
arte eClr li 46) 016 255 ἘΠΕῚ
ἐὰν γὰρ εἰδωσιν ὅτι οὗτοι καταπεφρονήκασιν, οὐθὲν τῶν ἔργων συντε-
λεσθήσεται. (Mahaffy, the editor, writes eléwow = ἴδωσιν.
This is the complaint of an ignorant man.)
*P. Par. 47 (= Witk. 39), 11-13 153*H acs
κἂν idns ὄτι μέλλομεν σωθῆναι, τότε βαπτιζώμεθα.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 61
*B. 6. U. 827, 18-19 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
[ἐϊὰν ἰδω ὅτι οὐδὲν γέγονε, ἐξέρχομαι.
*B. Ὁ. U. 814, margin, 3rd A. D.
meéuplils πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐὰν εἰδῃς οὐδεὶς Tol
FO SP A1770,720 ff. Late 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ εἰδης ὅτι παρὰ col μένις, ἀπόστιλόν μοι Θώνιον.
Pa Gens 1,732 c. 350 A. D.
ἐὰν εἰδῃς.
(Context uncertain.)
*B. G. U. 1027 (Pt. 2), 13-14 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
εἰ yap ὑπερείδίητε ταῦτα διὰ] βραχυτάτων ἀποσταλήσονται.
In the last example, which might be the most certain, the text
is not sound; ε, 1, 6 of the verb are not certain. It will be
observed that practically all the examples are from careless
papyri.
ἐὰν μάθω
FOUR 55:2 »Κ τον ἢ:
ἐὰν οὖν μάθῃς.
ΟΠ 57. }:}5 Late 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ μάθηται (= μάθητε.)
ΟΡ 0714 5th-6th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν μάθω.
ἐὰν κρίνῃς
P.S. I. 537, 8-9 1718: αἱ
καὶ ἐάϊνπερ συνκρίνηις.
P. Petr. II, 22, 4-5 Propelilvs: c:
ἐὰν δὲ τις. . αβει. αὐτῶν κρίνηι ἢ κριθῆι ἄκυρα ἔστω
(Ρ. Petr. III, 26 reads here παρὰ ταῦτα κρίνη. This is
probably a Decree.)
Opes 1470; 16 336 A. D.
ἐὰν ἐπικρίνῃς
(Petition).
προσπίπτῃ
B, G.U1011,.10 ff: 18 Sashaten
ὡς βραχύτατα γράφειν, κἄν τί σοι προσπίπτηι περὶ τῶν ἐναντίων,
ὧι πιστεύσειεν Gly] τις, διασάφει.
62 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
ΒΟ 206,; 015 2O°B AG.
ἐάν τι ἄλλο προσπέσῃ σημανῶι σοι,
ἡδέως ἔχῃς
Several letters of the third century A. D. or later contain this.
We may compare ἐὰν εὐκαίρως ἔχηις of P. Hal. 17, III B.C.
ΠΡΟ 2229 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν ἡδέως ἔχῃς, Tapacyes.
Pe Flora272 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν ἡδέως ἔχῃς, κέλευσον.
ῬΈΘΟΙ 251:27 5th-6th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἐὰν ἡδέως ἔχετε, δέσποτα, Kal αὐτὰς ἐπιτάσσω.
ἐπιστέλλω AND κελεύω
Pehetrailss (1), Col. ΒΥ ΓΞ 5 ΠῚ ΒΟ!
ἐὰν μή τισιν ἡμεῖς ἐπ᾽ ὀνόματος ἐπιστείλωμεν δ[ιδ]όναι.
Ti Dew. 236,18 c. 346 A. D.
ἐὰν κελεύσῃς.
συντελῆται
P. Lille 1 (Verso), 9 200 Hoc
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ πρὸ TOD θερισμοῦ συντελῆται, συντελῆται εἰς τὸ ὑποκείμενον
κτλ.
Ib. (Recto), 14 259 Boe
ἐὰν μὲν κατὰ χειμῶνα συντελῆται τὰ ἔργα, τίθεμεν ἔσεσθαι κτλ.
O. P. 1674, 6 3rd A. D.
ἐὰν συντελεσθῇ τὸ ἔργον.
(The conclusion has καταβληθήτω -- -- -- καὶ ἰσωθήτω).
ἐὰν ὀφειλήσῃς
P. Petr. III, 48, 11-12 Prob. III B. c.
ἐὰν δὲ προσοφειλήσηις [ ] σωνται οἱ τεχνῖται.
B. G. U. 599, 23 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν μηδὲν ὀφειληΪ
εἰ WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE IN ῬΕΟΤΑΞΙ5
In the earlier examples we seem to have real monitory condi-
tions; but in the later examples, those of the late Byzantine
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 63
period particularly, in view of the common confusion of sub-
junctive and indicative and the confusion of o and w, it would
be hard to say whether we have the subjunctive or the indicative
mood. See ei with the subjunctive.
*P. Petr. II, 4, (6), 14 250k B.C
εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει οἵ TE λοιποί μοι τὰς χέρας
προσοίσωσιν (In this ‘letter of an ignorant man,” as Ma-
haffy calls it, προσοίσωσιν seems to be for προσοίσουσιν. The
letter has many errors.)
Poretroil {10 c. 240 B. c.
eli yap] ἄλλο δράσεις συμβήσεταί σοι κινδυνεύειν.
P. Petr. II, 15 (10) ς. 240 Β. σ.
εἰ δὲ μὴ τραχηλιοῦσι.
(After this too much of the text is lost.)
P. Alex. 4 (= Witk. 33 and P. Prk. 4305), 9-11 ΠῚ 8. Cc
εἰ μὴ τὴν μήκωνα συνάξεις, μ[η]δείς σε ἀνθρώπων μὴ ὠφελήσηι.
ἘΠ (Col ΠῚ 10 L2iPA. Ὁ:
[e]é δὲ μὴ ἐκτίσι.
P. Tebt. 293, 20 ff. c. 187 A. D.
διὰ [τ]ὸ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς te||poulpylas ἐκτελεῖν εἰ μὴ τοῦτ[ο γενήσεϊ-]
[τα]ι, ἢ ἔνοχοι εἴημ[εν] τῷ ὅρκῳ.
P. Rein. 57, 9-10 4th A. D.
εἰ [τ]οίνυν ἐθε[λήσ]ετε -- — — καλῶς [ἂ]ν (ε erased) ποιήσετε. (First
ἐθελήσατε, then aire, then ere; few of the letters of εἰ τοίνυν
are read with certainty.)
ΓΗ 50 487 A.D
εἰ δὲ μ[ὴ] τοῦτο ποιήσει
Op. teed bey ees, c. 488 A. D.
ἀναγιγνώσκω, εἰ προστάξει σου τὸ μέγεθος.
Ο. Ρ. 140 (= Ρ. Cair. 10057), 25 550 Α. Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ τοῦτο ποιήσω, ὁμολογῶ, but 26-27 εἰ δὲ ἡ [ὑμῶν] μεγαλοπρ-
(ἐπεια) ἐθελήσῃ ἐκβαλεῖν με.
This phrase εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσω Or εἰ δὲ τοῦτο ποιήσω OCCUrS
quite often at this time.)
OF-F71100;,'5 6th A D..
el τινες ἐπι[χ]ειρήσουσιν, with παρεγγύησον in apodosis.
SP E1901): 2 6th A. D.
el ἐθελήσω ε.
(After this there is hardly any text.)
64 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. R. 145, 7 6th A. D.
εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσ[οϊμεν παράσχομεν ἐν διπλῷ.
P. Grenf. II, 87, 29-30 602 A. D.
εἰ δὲ τοῦτο ποιήσομεν παρέξομεν.
εἰ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE IN FUTURE PROTASIS IN
PTOLEMAIC TIMES _
This is exceedingly unusual. There are, however, two inter-
esting examples of the third century B. C., the first of which
helps to identify the form in the second.
PSAs 407 1 00h. 18 ἢ ἐπ τε:
εἰ δὲ μὴ διδῶις, καλῶς ἂμ ποιήσαις συμβαλόμενός μοι ἐφόδιον ἵν᾽
ἀπέλθω.
ἜΡΓΟΝ ΤΙ VA ES ae III B. c.
ὥστε εἰ μὲν διδοῖς ἡμεῖν᾽ εἰ δὲ μὴ, ἀποδραμοὐμεθα᾽ οὐ γὰρ ἰσχύομεν.
(Perhaps, instead of treating the first condition as lacking
apodosis, we should place a comma after ἡμεῖν and make
both protases dependent on ἀποδραμούμεθα).
εἰ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE ΙΝ FUTURE PROTASIS
ei, instead of ἐάν, with the subjunctive in a future protasis
becomes more common from the second century A. D. onwards.
In the Byzantine period it becomes difficult, if not impossible,
to distinguish εἰ with the subjunctive from εἰ with the
future indicative. See the examples given under εἰ with
Future Indicative.
B. G. U. 811, 7-8 c. 100 A. D.
εἰ μικρὰν ἐμοὶ αὐτὴν κατενέγκῃ ἥδε αὐτῷ
(Text is not quite sound.)
P. Giess. 67, 17-18 2nd A. D.
εἰ μή τι χρεία [γ]ένηται.
P. Ryl. 234, 10 ff. “ 2nd A. D.
πάλιν δὲ μου παρακαλέσαντος αὐτὸν καὶ λέγοντος μὴ δύνασθαι ἀπο-
[χ]ωρῆσαι, εἰ μὴ ἀντιφωνηθῇ.
P. Lips. 10, 31--32 240 A. D.
dv’ οἰ] προσεγράφη μὴ πρότερον περιλύσω τὴν προκειμ[ξϊνην [μισθο-
καρπίαν εἰ μὴ καὶ τὰ κατὰ τὸ χειρόγραφον ἀποδοῖ.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 65
*P. Grenf. II, 79 (Col. I), 9-10 Late 3rd A. D.
εἰ δὲ μὴ παριστῶ, [ya] ὁ αὐτὸς ὑπεύθυνος [ἔσομαι] τοῖς πρὸς αὐτὸν
[ζη]τουμένοις.
P. Rein. 57, 11-13 Ath A. D.
εἰ δὲ — — — καταν[αγκ]ἀσητίεϊ -- — — ἀπόδοτε αὐτῷ.
P. 5.1. 825, 23--24 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἠξίωσεν [ | εἴ τι οὖν [ἀϊναλώσῃς, Ὑράψον.
*O. P. 904, 4 Sth A. D.
εἰ καὶ συμβῇ.
P. R. 144, 11-12 5th-6th cent. A. D.
εἰ δὲ μ[ὴ δώσω σοι τὸν αὐτὸν] οἶνον.
ΤΟ. P. 1996 (= Ρ. Cair. 10009), 5 5th-6th cent. A. Ὁ.
el δὲ εὑρεθῶ ἔγὼ χρεωστῶν, ἐπὶ τῷ ἐμὲ ταῦτα καταβαλῖν. :
O. P. 136 (= P. Cair. 10103), 24 583 A. D.
ei δὲ συμβῇ ἔχθεσιν γενέσθαι.
P. Cair. 67089, 34-35 Byz.
εἰ δὲ καὶ, ὡς εἰκός, δούλην [αὐτ]ὴν ἐπιχ[ειρήσαι τις λέγειν (?)] γινέσθω]
- -- -- ἐλευθέρα.
(This is the reading οἵ the editor. I shoud substitute
ἐπιχ[ειρήσῃ for ἐπιχ[ειρῆσαι. A long argument seems un-
necessary.)
Par 20,729 c. 600 A. D.
el δὲ δόξῃ αὐτοῖς ἐπελ[θεῖϊν]. Line 35 reads thus: εἰ δέ τις ἐξ αὐτῶν
τολμήϊσει τι] παραβῆναι. I should read τολμήσῃ; and compare
our next example.
P. Grenf. I, 62, 18 6th-7th cent. A. D.
el, ὅπερ ἄν εἴη, τολμήσῃ τοιοῦτο.
O. Ρ. 139 (= Ρ. Cair. 10049), 18 ff. 612 Α. ΡΥ.
εἴ ποτε καιρῷ ἤ χρόνῳ φανομεν κλέψαντες.
(This is a Promise to be Honest. φανομὲν is for φανῶμεν;
Cp. εἰ φανῶσι in P. B. M. 1345, 30.)
OF RTI ΟΊ 019 sf; ΟΥΑΙ
el ποτε καιρῷ ἢ χρόνῳ «φανῶμεν cp. 139, 19)» κλέψαντες -- -- -- [ὁ]μο-
λογο[ῦμε(ν) παρασχεῖν.
P. Grenf. II, 99a, 4 ff. 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ὥστε αὐτὴν ἀπελθῖν εἰς διαίτην καὶ τὰ ἀπὸ διαίτης ποιήσῃ εἰ δὲ
μὴ ποιήσῃ ,
Poor. 1052, 0 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ei δὲ ἴδῃς αὐτόν.
66 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
¥P, BAM 4394, Az 6th-7th cent. A. D.
εἴθ.. τις ἐξ ἡμῶν θελήσῃ ἀναπαλεῦσαι, With δότωι in apodosis.
ΡΒΟΝ 193035 After 700 A. D.
εἰ δόξῃ τινα ἀποδρᾶσ[αι.
BEBE 952... 710 A. D.
ὅπως ἡ δόξῃ ἀποστραφῇ τι ἐξ αὐτῶν To ἂν ταῦτα δώσῃ.
(I think the editor’s interpretation is correct. He says that
the reading seems certain, but the meaning obscure. ἢ is
perhaps for ei, and τὸ may be for τῷ, used as a relative.
The editor translates thus: ‘That, if it seems right, some-
thing may be returned to whomsoever he—the messenger—
gives them.’’)
P. B. M. 1370, 14 710 A. D.
εἰ καταλάβῃς — — — καὶ εὑρεθῇ.
ἐὰν WITH INDICATIVE
ἐὰν, instead of εἰ, with the indicative is found occasionally
from the first century A. D. onwards. It is more frequent in
the later Byzantine period. The examples are rather interesting.
ἘΒ' Οὐ} 5907 0. ἡ 75 A.D.
kal ἐὰν εἰπόσει ὅτι Eke αὐτ[ὸ]ν, πέμψον ᾿Ατρῆν.
(The Greek of this letter is very bad.)
ΡΣ 3.33 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ πλέονας ἢ ἀπολήμψετε (= ἀπολήψεται.)
O. P. 237, Col. VIII, 38 186 A. D.
ἐὰν δ᾽ εἰσὶν.
P. Β. Μ. 237, 30-31 ς. 346 Α. Ρ.
ἐάν σοι δοκοῦν ἐστιν ἀπόστιλον.
Pisa sais 5th-6th cent. A. D.
καὶ εἰπεῖν αὐτῷ ὅτι ἐὰν ἐδεξάμην παρέχω ἀντὶ αὐτῶν δέκα, ἐὰν δὲ
καὶ αὐτὸς οὐκ ἔδωκες ὀφείλει τὰ ἴσα δοῦναι.
Of 1926.02 the 6th A. D.
παρακαλῶ ὑμᾶς -- — — ἐὰν οὐκ ἔστιν θέλημα ὑμῶν μὴ λαλῆσαι -- -- --
παρακελεῦσαί με μαθεῖν κτλ. (Christian Prayer.)
(ἐάν is here seen to be conditional, rather than interroga-
tive. So in O. P. 1150, 2. Probably, as the editor says,
εἰ in O. P. 1148, 2 and elsewhere is to be similarly ex-
plained.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 67
OrP-941, 7 6th A. ἢ.
ἐὰν θέλεις.
PeBaM. 1073, 28: 6th A. D.
καταξιώσατε ------ συγχωρῆσαι αὐτοὺς οἰκοδομῆσαι ἐὰν τὸ δίκαι[ον]
οὐ κωλύει αὐτούς.
P. R. 212, 3-4 6th-7th cent. A. D.
μάθε δὲ καὶ περὶ τῶν φυλάκων ἐὰν οὐδέποτε ἔπεσφράγισαν κεφραλωτὰ
μηδὲ ἄρτι ἐπισφραγίσωσιν. (ἐάν for εἰ, for this is no condition.)
*P. Mil. 5, 24 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἐὰν θέλ[ε]ις ἔγιρε.
P. Β. Μ. 1404, 9-10 700 + A. D.
ἐὰν θέλεις τὸ σῶσμ[α] τῆς ψυχῆς σου ἔκπεμψον μετὰ πάσης ov[y]ro-
μ[ία]ς τὸ τα[γὲν] μέτρον
(Some letters are not read with certainty.)
P. B. M. 1346, 15-16 710 A. D.
ἐὰν μέντοι συνίεις Kal ἔχεις φρένας.
(But in Ρ. Β. Μ. 1348, of same time, εἰ μέντοι συνίεις καὶ
ἔχεις φρένας).
GENERAL RELATIVE CLAUSES
General relative clauses are exceedingly numerous at all
periods. Most refer to the future; some are really present
general. The subjunctive mood is used; for the optative see
p. 144. Our interest really lies in the different phrases used.
οἷς ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι AND ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι
These phrases are very common in leases of land, vineyards,
and the like. They occur at all times.
Pe Tebtai05, 23 103 B. Οἱ
γένεσιν oils] élaly αἱρῆται πλὴν ἔλαικῶν φορτίων.
O. P. 280 89 A. D.
᾿ς σπεῖραι καὶ ξυλαμῆσαι Tablras ols ἐὰν αἱρῆται γένεσι.
ῬΟΘΜ 1227 15 2 ΛΑ τος
εἰς σπορὰν κ(αὶ) κ[ατ]άθεσιν ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι.
P. Amh. 91, 14-15 159 A.D.
σπείρων οἷς ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι γένεσι πλὴν κνήκου.
C. P. R. 243, 16 224 A.D,
> ὁ e | « ,
εἰς σπόρον ὧν ἐὰν αἱρώ[μεθα.
68 56 of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Nb-Literary Papyrt
B. G. U. 1092, 12-13 372 As Di
Εἰ εἰς σπορὰν καὶ κατάθεσιν ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι.
*P. Β. Μ. 1006, 13-14 556 A. D.
καρπῶν ὧν ἂν ἐρουμοι φόρου kat’ ἔτος χρυσοῦ νομισμάτια ( = αἱρῶμαι.
Style very illiterate, says the editor.)
P. Grenf. I, 57, 9 561 A. ὃ.
εἰς διϊάθεσιν καρπῶν ὧν ἐὰν ἱρῶμαι.
P. B. M. 1012, 35-36 633 A. Ὁ.
> A — A 4, ld Ὁ - 31 « FF
els πορὰν (= σπορὰν) καὶ κατάθεσιν καρπῶν ὧν ἐὰν ἕλωμαι φόρου
σίτου.
ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν αἱρῆται
This is a phrase characteristic of various kinds of agreements,
including leases and loans. The phrase seems to belong par-
ticularly to the Ptolemaic and Roman periods.
P. Grenf. I, 18, 27 ΤΠ ΟΣ
καὶ ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν αἱρῆται.
Ο. Ρ. 1639, 14-15 73 or 44?°B. c.
τῆς πράξεώς σοι οὔσης ἔκ τε ἀμφοτέρων καὶ ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν αἱρῆι.
O. Ρ. 1124, 18-19 26 A. D.
ἡ πίρ]ᾶξις ἔστω Διονυσίῳ ἔκ τε τοῦ μεμισθωμένου [κ]αὶ ἐξ οὗ ἐ[ ἀν]
αἱρῆται.
P. B. M. 1166, 16 42 A.D.
ἐκ τε τῶν ὁμολογούντων Kal ἐξ ov ἐὰν αὐτῶν αἱρῆται.
P. Flor. 20, 32-33 127¢A.
λήμψεται ὁ Ὧρος ἐξ ὦ «ν) ἐὰν κληρώσηται
(Lines 18-19, however, are not the usual phrase:
ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν ὁ Ὧρος αἱρῆται ἀνέμου.
*O. P. 1040, 28 229 noes
[ἢ mlap’ ov ἐὰν ἡμῶν αἱρῇ.
Palins, 10.910: 320 A. D.
φόρον [ἀϊποδώσομεν καὶ μετρήσομεν ἐξ ἀὰ “Χ)»ηλεγγύης ἢ ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν
αἱρῇ ἡμῶν εἰς ἔκτησιν.
ΝΟΤΕ.--Απ interesting variant is found in a papyrus of 109
ByC:
P. Rein. 16, 33-34 109 B. Cc.
παρ᾽ ov ἂν αὐτῶν νοῆται.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Liierary Papyri 69
ᾧ ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπῳ
The phrase belongs to such documents as agreements, sales,
and wills.
P. B. M. 45 (= U. P. Z.10), 26 160 B. Cc.
Kal χρῆσθ᾽ ὧι ἂν προαιρῶνται τρόπωι.
ΒΝ 70 5:18 ς. 100 Α. Dz
[ᾧ] ἐ[ ἀν] αἱρῶνται τρόπῳ.
(There is no doubt about the emendation, as οἰκονομοῦϊντας
περὶ αὐτῶν precedes.)
POR 117;)9 411 A.D.
[εἰν καὶ πάντα] πράσσιν ᾧ ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι τρόπῳ 1.
Ρ. Β. Μ. 1722, 38-39 ΘΚ ΣΟ ΡῈ
ἐπιτελεῖν τὰ περὶ αὐτῆς τρόπῳ ᾧ ἐὰν αἱρῇ ἀκωλύτως καὶ ἀνεμποδίστως.
Ρ. Β. Μ. 1724, 54 c. 580 A. D.
ἐποικοδομεῖν κτᾶσθαι χρᾶσθαι παντὶ ἀρέσκοντι ὑμῖν τρόπῳ.
(Observe the variant expression.)
P. Mon. 8, 22 End 6th A. D.
2 tad ‘ ‘ > an ? Gee ae. | LPT oh if ,
ἐπιτελεῖν τὰ περὶ αὐτῶν τρόπῳ ᾧ ἐὰν αἱρῇ ἀκωλύτως.
καθ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι τρόπον
This phrase is found in the same kind of documents as the
preceding, and is perhaps a little commoner.
O. P. 265, 43 (3rd Hand) c. 90 A. D.
καθ᾽ ὃν] ἐ[ὰ]ν αἱρῶμαι τρόπον.
(Marriage Contract)
O. P. 489, 4 LEAD.
οἰκονομεῖν περὶ αὐτῶν καὶ μεταδιατίθεσθαι καθ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι
[τρόπον.
ἘΌΝ i155 12 ΚΑ Ὁ.
οἰκονομοῦντας περὶ αὐτοῦ καθ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπον.
P. R. 80, 6 J22hA 188
ο΄ καθ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπον. |
P. R. 110, 18-19 5th A. D.
οἰκονομοῦντας καὶ διοικοῦντας περὶ αὐτοῦ καθ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῇ τρόπον.
ὡς ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι
This phrase occurs in the same kind of documents as the two
preceding phrases; and is perhaps more frequent than either of
the others.
70 ὅὕϑο of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P. B. M. 154, 15 68 A. D.
χρομένους αὐτοῖς ws ἐὰν αἱρῶνται.
ΟΡ ἸΟΒῚ 139 Α. ἢ.
οἰκοδομῖν ὡς ἐὰν ἑρῇ καὶ ὁπότε ἠάν μοι συτασι ποιήσομε.
(The editor is right in calling this vulgar Greek. ἑρῇ =
αἱρῇ, ποιήσομε = ποιήσομαι. συτάσι I believe is not for ζητήσεις
but for συντάσσῃς"“.
ῬΎΠΟΥ 25 0 2nd A. D.
als ἐὰν αἱρῆται ἀνυπερθέτως.
C. P. R. 218, 14 2nd A. D.
olxovoluety περὶ αὐτῶν ὡς ἐὰν αἱρῆται.
B. G. U. 859, 14-15 2nd A. D.
οἰκονομεῖν κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ 6 τι ἐὰν αἱρῶνται.
(Observe variant.)
P. B. M. 932, 18 211 AUD:
ἐξέσται αὐτοῖς χρᾶσθαι καὶ οἰκονομεῖν ὡς ἐὰν αἱρῶνται ἀνεμποδίστως.
P. Β. Μ. 1164 ἢ, 18 21. ΤΑ ΤΣ
καὶ διοικεῖν καὶ ἐπιτελεῖν περὶ αὐτοῦ ὡς ἐὰν aipdv[rat] τρ[όϊπον
ἀνεμποδίστως.
(Observe the mixture of two constructions, and compare
the next example.)
P. B. M. 978, 15 331 A. D.
οἰκονομεῖν καὶ διοικεῖν ws ἐὰν ἑρῆται τρόπῳ ἀκωλύτως.
OTHER RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι
Other relative clauses with ἐὰν αἰρῶμαι are found, particu-
larly in leases and agreements of various kinds.
P. Par. 39, end 161 B. c.
ὑμῖν δὲ γένοιτο κρατεῖν πάσης ἧς ἂν αἱρῆσθε χώρας.
B. G. U. 912, 17-18 33 A. D.
els π[άϊντ[α] ὃ ἐὰν αἱρῆται.
(Rent of an Ass.)
*B. G. U. 1067, 13 ΤΟΣ
καὶ κόψωι καὶ ἀλέσω κατ᾽ ἔτος ἃς ἐὰν αἱ(ρῇ) κατὰ μῆνα σιτίας ἄρτων.
* Cp. P. Leid, B. and P. Amh. 44, of the Ptolemaic period; and P. B. M,
256, of 15 A. D.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 71
C. P. R. 11, 25-26 108 A. D.
ἕκαστον δ᾽ αὐτῶν κρατεῖν καὶ κυριεύειν ὧν κεκλήρωται καὶ [θέϊσθαι
περὶ αὐτῶν als] ἐὰν αἱρῆται οἰκονομίας.
Ο. Ρ. 494, 19-20 156 Α. ἢ.
ἐξέστω δι᾽ αὐτῆς πωλεῖν καὶ ὑποτίθεσθαι ἃ ἐὰν αἱρῆται ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἐὰν
ἀπολίπω.
P. Tebt. 319, 28-29 248 A. Ὁ.
περὶ ὧν ἂν ἑτέρων εὑρίσκωσιν.
O. Ρ. 1187, 9-10 254 A. ἢ.
ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶνται.
P. S.-15°34,; 13 397 A. D.
[ἣν ἐὰ]ν αἱρῶμα[ι].
¥O 5 }164.0 6th-7th cent. A. D.
\ a «- U
πρὸς ὃν ἂν ἑρήσωνται.
βούλωμαι
βούλωμαι appears in various clauses of the same kind in
which αἱρῶμαι appears. Apparently either verb might be used.
We note the τρόπῳ, τρόπον, ἐξ οὗ, ἐν οἷς γενήμασι, ws, and ordinary
relative types.
P. Petr. III, 1, 5-6 23%, B.C;
διοικοῦντα τρόπωι wy βούλωμαι.
(Above ων, va is written, showing it is for ὧι ἂν.)
ReGrenie leo, 2.7.1: 102 B.C.
καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς καὶ ὁποτέρου αὐτῶν καὶ οὗ ἂν βού[λη]ται.
ΟΡ 4:25 52 A. D.
χρώμενον αὐτοῖς ws ἐὰν βούληται ὁ ’A.
*P. Hamb. 30, 11
το[ὺ]ς παρ᾽ αὐτῆς καὶ obs ἐὰν βούληται. 89 A. ἢ.
(See also lines 21 and 34.)
OSE 249153 Ff; 126A. D.
ἔχειν ple] τὴν τῶν ἰδίων ἐξου[σί]ζαν ὃ ἐὰν βούλωμαι ἐπιτελεῖν καὶ
μεταδιατίθεσθαι ---- -- ὃ δ᾽ ἂν ἐπιτελέσω κύριον ὑπάρχειν.
ΘΟ. ΡΒ 729: 11 137 A.D.
ὃν δὲ ἐὰν βούληται (πέμψει aS main verb.)
ΡΝ 1 5670 145 A.D.
ἐργαζομένην map’ ov (corr. ex a gov) ἐὰν βούληται (n corr. ex €)
ὁ “Αγχίωφι]ς γερδίω (1. ov).
12 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
O. P. 494, 4 156 A. D.
ὃ ἐὰν βούλωμαι κτλ.
B. 6. U. 46, 15-16 193 A. D.
ἐμοῦ μὲν ἀναζητοῦντος τούτους ἐν ols ἐὰν βούλωμαι τόποις, ὅπως κτλ.
CREA ΟΞ ΕΠ 27 216 A. D.
[eli<s> σπορὰν πυροῦ ἢ ὃ ἂν Bovd[nOd] (Perhaps βοὐλ|ωμαι)
should be supplied.)
P. Grenf. II, 76, 10-11 305 A. D.
ἐξεῖναι αὐτῇ ἀποστῆϊναι καὶ] γαμηθῆναι ὡς ἂν βουληθῇ.
P. Lips, 26, 11 Beg. 4th A. D.
διοικ[εἴ]ν ὡς ἐὰν βουληθῇ ἀκωλύτως.
*P. Edmonstone (quoted O. P. 722), 10 354 A. D.
νέμεσθε eis ods ἐὰν βούλητε τόπους ἀκωλύτως (= νέμεσθαι and βούλησθε).
C. P. R. 42 Prob. 4th A. D.
eis σπορὰν ἣ ἐὰν βουληθῶμεν.
SPAS. 9167 4th? A. Ὁ.
καὶ σπῖραι Tas πάσας ἐν οἷς ἐὰν βούϊλωμαι γενή(μασι))].
*O. P. 1126, 9-10 5th A. D.
eis <a >7ropay olay ἂν βουληθοῦμεν.
(This papyrus contains many errors of w and o.)
P. B. M. 1689, 15 52774 ὩΣ
[ἰκαταθ]εῖναι ἐν ots βούλομαι γενήμασιν ἰδίοις μου ἀναλώμασι.
(Note apparent indicative.)
P. B. M. 1691, 17 S32iK. Dy
εἰς πᾶσαν μου χρείαν πρὸς ὃ ἂν βούλομαι [χρῆ]σιν (= πρὸς ἣν ἂν
βούλωμαι, Ed.)
ΕΘ 955515 ΘΟ ALD:
[ἔϊρ ᾿ ᾧ σε ταύτας καταθεῖν[αι ἐν οἷς βούλῃ [γενήμασι»].
P. Β. Μ. 1044, 19-21 6th A. ἢ.
καὶ διοικεῖν περὶ αὐτὸ οἵῳ τρόπῳ ἂν βουληθῇς καὶ φιλοκαλεῖν καὶ
βελτιοῦν καὶ εἰς ἣν ἂν βουλ[ηθῇς
(after which the text has disappeared.)
POR. M21714538 . 570 A. D-
ἐφ᾽ ἣν δ᾽ ἂν βούλεσθε ἐργασίαν (= βούλησθε, δὲ is superfluous.) .
P. B. M. 1727, 26-27 τ oe ΤῊ
χρησόμεθα πάντων τῶν πραγμάτων ἡμῶν καθ᾽ ἣν ἂν βουλόμεθα
διοίκησιν. (As the editor says, we should have χρήσασθαι).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary.Papyri 73
Bein 209, 12 6th-7th cent. A. D.
καθ᾽ ὃν βούλεσθαι τρόπον.
(In this late period there is great confusion between indica-
tive and subjunctive forms. This seems to be indicative;
we have no ἄν.)
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν βουληθῇς χρόνον
This phrase seems to occur in leases of a late period. The
indicative also occurs freely.
ΒΒ ΝΜ 1715,.5 6th A. D.
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν βουλη[θ]ῇς xpldvor].
(In line 13 the indicative is used as follows: μεθ᾽ ὃν βούλει
χρόνον παραδώσω σοι).
P. B. M. 1872, 8 548 A. D.
ὁμολογῶ — — — μεμισθῶσθαι παρά σου ἐφ᾽ [d]v ἐὰν βουληθῇς χρόνον.
P. B. M. 1003, 5 562 A. D.
μ[εἰμισθῶσθαι παρά a6 ἐφ᾽ [ὅσ]ον ἐὰν βδληθῇς χρόνον.
P. Cair. 67109, 14-16 565 A. D.
μεμίσθωμαι παρ᾽ ὑμῶν πρὸς ὃν βούλεσθε χρόνον
(Apparently the indicative. So in lines 33-34: καταθεῖναι
ἐν οἷς βούλομαι γενήμασι).
P. Flor. 306, 14 635 A. ἢ.
ἐφ᾽ ὃν βούλῃ χρόνον (ἂν wanting.)
ἢ
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν ζῇς χρόνον, ἐφ᾽ ὅσον περιῇ χρόνον AND THE LIKE
Such phrases are found particularly in wills and marriage
contracts; they seem not to occur in very late papyri. The
indicative may take the place of the subjunctive, particularly in
the later examples.
P. B. M. 401, 16 cali Speci
ἐφ᾽ ὅσον [π]εριῆι χρόνον.
P. Grenf. II, 23, 19-20 108? B.c.
ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ἂν χρόνον περὶ τὸ προκείμενον ἦι (χρημάτιζε κατὰ μῆνα is
in the preceding clause).
Po. 4..04, 3 ῬΓΟΡ ΙΗ Ὁ
[ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰ]ν ζῇς [χ]ρόνον συνπαραμένειν σύν σοι
(The editor compares B. G. U. 183, 24: ἐφ᾽ ὃν χρόνον ζῶσα ἢ).
14. Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
OP 65:57) 81-95 A. Ὁ.
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν συνῶσιν ἀλλήλοις χρ[όΪνον.
O. P. 489, 7 ΠΣ ΤΗΝ
ἐφ᾽ ὃν περίεστι χρόνον,
-also in 1. 14. (Accordingly it is safe to emend with the
indicative in lines 4 and 6.)
OSPAL05 710 117-137 a. Ὁ.
καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο αἰὰν <E>xw, καὶ ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῇ (καταλείπω precedes.)
Ο. Ρ. 496, 6 127 A.D
ἐφ᾽ ὅσον σύνεισι ἀλλήϊλοι]ς.
P. Hamb. 100, 6-7 2nd A. D.
ἀπὸ τοῦ viv ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν περιῇς χρόνον.
ΒΝ 5.1531.9 138-161 A. D.
ἐφ᾽ ὃν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπι[σὶ) ζ non μοι [χρόνον 1 (In 1. 2 ἐπιζήσῃ occurs
in the same phrase; and in |. 14 and other places we note
ἐφ᾽ ὃν περίεστιν χρόνον.)
OSPR 231 e052 186 A. De
ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῇ χρόνον.
ἘΝ 15 ΞΡ ΟΡ 27,14 190 A. D.
ἐφ᾽ dv χρόνον μένει αὐτοῖς (ἡ συμβίωσις is the subject.)
ΟΡ 1568 Prob. 3rd A. D.
ἐφ᾽ dv περίεστιν χρόνον.
Ο. Ρ. 907, 23 276 Α. Ὁ.
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ζήσεται χρόνον.
ἢ ὅσαι ἐὰν ὦσι
This phrase occurs again and again at all periods in descrip-
tions of landed property. ἀρούρας or ἀρουρῶν with a number
precedes. Most interesting is the way in which the phrase
often conforms to the case of the preceding word; it is a fixed
formula.
P. Lille 60, 7 4 Ptol. Per.
ἢ ὅσαι ἐὰν ὦσιν τῶι πρώὠϊτ]ωι ἀγγέλματι.
(This is a letter. The number οἵ artabae precedes.)
Pore slip 13210 Ptol. Per.
ἢ ὅσαι ἂν ὦσιν.
GRP Re 22410 2 Ae Ὁ
ἀρουρῶν ἢ ὅσων ἐνὰν ἢ (= ἐὰν).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 75
B. G. U. 644, 19 69 A. ἢ.
ἀρουρῶν εἴκοσι ἢ ὅσων ἐὰν ὦσι.
ΡΝ 26 83 A. D.
ἀρούρας τρεῖς ἢ ὅσαι ἐὰν ὦσι.
P. B. Μ. 163, 10-11 88 A. D.
ἀρουρῶν τεσσάρων juilcoluls] ἢ ὅσων ἐὰν Gor.
ΡΒ M2285, 8 90 A. D.
ἢ ὅσε ἂν dou.
ΦΡΝ 2850 110 A. D.
καὶ αὐλὴν ὅσων ἐστὶν μέτρων καὶ πηχισμῶν. (This papyrus likes
the indicative; compare 1.12: καὶ ὀνικὰ κτήνη ὅσα ἐστὶν ἀριθμῷ).
Β. G. U. 444, 7 2nd A. D.
[ἄρουραν] μίαν ἢ done ἐὰν ἦι.
P. Β. M. 314, 9-10 149 A. D.
ἀρούρας ἑπτὰ ἢ ὥσας ἐὰν ὦσι.
Ρ. Β. Μ. 334, 17-18 166 A. D.
τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος μέρους — — — ὅσου [ἂν ἢ] τῆς αὐτῆς οἰκίας (For this
phrase, τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος, which is common in the papyri,
cp. St. Luke’s Gospel xv, 12.)
ΒΟΟΣ 252..28 After 175 A. D.
ἐπὶ δὲ παντὸς τοῦ ἀρου[ρ]οδοῦ κατ᾽ ἐπίκίλησι]ν τοῦ ἐνόντος παντὸς
ἐδάφους ἢ ὅσοι ἐὰν ὦσι ἐπὶ τὸ πλεῖον ἢ ἔλασσον (B-Liste: ἀρου-
[ρ]ηδοῦ κατ᾽ ἐπιβ[ολὴ]ν.)
*B. G. U. 586, 8-9 Prob. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἀρούρας] d[é]ka τρῖς ἢ ὅσας ἐὰν dor.
P. B. M. 157b, 6 Prob. 3rd A. D.
ἀρούρης μιᾶς ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσον ἐὰν 7.
ἘΣΘ 33385:95 246 A. D.
ἢ ὅσαι ἂν ey γεωμετρίας γένωνται.
ΞΕ Use 201. Δ De
ἀρούρης μιᾶς ἢ ὅσε ἠὰν ὦσιν.
Pepe oo; Ll 266 A. Ὁ.
ἀρουρῶν ἑπτὰ [ἢ] ὧν ἐὰν ὦσι.
ΟΡ 705: ἡ 298 A. D.
καὶ τὴν οὖσαν ἔν[0]α ἀπόκειται ἐξαρτίαν πᾶσαν ὅσην ἐὰν 7.
(This is a little different from most of the other examples.)
76 ὅὔσεοε of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
Brow het Sit. 2 4th A. D.
ἀρούρας ἕνδ[ εἶκα ἢ ὅσας ἐὰν ὦσει.
BeLins 22.1.0 388 A. D.
Tas ὑπαρχούσας σοι ἀρούρας ὅσαι ἐὰν Got.
P. Flor. 310, 15 c. 430 A. D.
πηχῶν τεσσάρων ὅσαν ἐστὶν πηχισμοῦ
(This part is very fragmentary. The editor is probably
right in suggesting οὗ ἐὰν, but certainly not ὡσὰν.)
Ρ. Β. Μ. 1313, 16 507 A. Ὡς
σπορίμης γῆς ὅσων ἐὰν Gow ἀρ]ορῶν.
P. Cair. 67106, 12 539 A. De
[alpopa&v ὅσων ἐστίν.
P. Giess. 56, 7 6th A. D.
ἀρουρῶν ὅσων ἐστίν.
ἣ οἵ ἂν ὦσιν γείτονες πάντοθεν
This phrase is common in descriptions of property, and con-
sequently occurs frequently in contracts of sale. It occurs at
all periods; but in the very late examples, πάντη is regularly
inserted before πάντοθεν. A few early examples have πάντου
or πάντων before πάντοθεν.
B. G. U. 993, Col. III, 9 127 Beer
ἢ οἵ ἂν ὦσιν γείτονες πάντοθεν.
ῬΡΕΓ 5, 10 114 B.c.
ἢ οἱ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντου πάντοθεν.
P. B. M. 1209, 15 89 8. Cc.
ἢ ot ἐὰν ὦσιν γείτονες πάντων πάντοθεν.
ΟΡΌΪΝ 1457.5 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἢ ot ἐὰν ὦσι νυνὶ γείτονες.
PAR iz. 438 A.D.
ἢ ot ἐὰν ὦσι γείτονες.
ΣΡ ΘΠ 66) 5 ᾿ 5th cent. A. D.
ἢ ot ἂν doer [γεί]τονης πάντη πάντοθεν.
Pepa 722.08 573 A. D.
ἢ ot ἐὰν ὦσι γείτονες πάντη πάντοθεν.
P. Β. Μ. 1724, 38-39 c. 580 A. D.
οἷοι δ᾽ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντη πάντοθεν.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 77
P. Mon. 9, 57 ΚΟ ΝΣ τὸς
ἢ οἱ δ᾽ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντα πάντοθεν.
(Observe the intrusive δὲ.)
Pik ar.2l bis,-16 c. 600 A. D.
οἱ ἡ ἂν οσυ γείτονες πάντη πάνδοθεν. (Certainly this is ἢ οἱ ἂν ὦσι)
P. B. M. 483, 38 616 A. D.
ἢ οἷοί εἰσιν νυνὶ γείτονες καὶ ἂν ὦσι πάντη πάντοθεν.
τ] 28 616 Α. Ὁ.
ἢ ow (sic)dou γίτονες πάντι πάντοθεν (Certainly οἱ ἂν.)
a
ὃ ἐὰν προσοφειλέσῃ AND THE LIKE
ὃ ἐὰν προσοφειλέσῃ and ὃ ἐὰν φανῶ ὀφείλων are characteristic of
leases and wills respectively. They seem to belong almost
entirely to the Roman period.
PS Pete tli 4.(2), 22 Tien,
καὶ ὅσα ὀφείλωσίν τινές μ[οι].
P. Ryl. 178, 6-7 Early 1st Α. Ὁ.
a
ἀποδώσει αὐτῶι [ὃ] ἐὰν φανῆι ὀφείλουσα
(Agreement with a Nurse.)
O. P. 640 120 A. D.
ἀποτισάτω ὃ ἐὰν πἰρ]οσοφειλέσῃ μεθ᾽ ἡμιολίας.
ΤΕ 551,718 123 Α. Ὁ.
διευλυτώσει ὧν ἐὰν φανῆι ἡ Θαῆσις ὀφίλουσα ἰδιοτικῶν χρεῶν.
Ο. Ρ. 101, 42-44 142 Α. Ὁ.
ὃ δ᾽ ἂν προσοφειλέσῃ ὁ μεμισθωμένος ἀποτεισάτω.
ἘΠΊ 9:90 2nd A. ἢ.
ἐφ᾽ 5(v) xpd(vov) [ὀϊφείλῃ ἀργύριον BeB(atot) ’A.
O. P. 494, 22 156 A. D.
ἀποδώσει πάντα ἃ ἐὰν φανῶ ὀφείλων.
OF P.502,°38-39 164 A. D.
ἀποτεισάτω ov ἐὰν μὴ παραδῷ τὴν ἀξίαν, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν προσοφειλέσῃ
ἐνοίκιον μεθ᾽ ἡμιολίας.
O. P. 495, 9 181-189 a. ἢ.
ὅσα ἐὰν φανῶ ὀφείλων.
OF F..912; 30 235 Α. ἢ.
ὃ ὃ ᾿[ἐὰ]ϊν προσοφιλέσῃ.
Note—The indicative mood is frequently found in relative clauses, particu-
larly when the verb is in the present tense and expresses a fact,
78 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
ΕΣ PASel 5190 1st-2nd cent. A. Ὁ.
lxwpis ὧν]ἄλλων ὀφείλει.
οὗ ἂν ἐπιφέρηται
This phrase occurs in loans and contracts of different kinds.
It seems to belong to the Ptolemaic period.
P. Hib. 90, 20 . 22 ΙΒ
ἡ δὲ συγγραφὴ ἥδε κυρία ἔστω οὗ ἂν ἐπιφέρηται.
(The letters of the last three words are not clear.)
P. Hamb. 26, 3 215 5.0"
ἡ δὲ συγγραφὴ ἥδε κυρία ἔστω οὗ «ἂν» ἐπιφέρηται.
P. Grenf. I, 10, 19 174 B.C.
|xupia ἔστω ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἂν ἐπιφέρηται.
ΡΒ 0, ΟΠ 22-24 1353:85:
ἡ δὲ χεὶρ ἥδε κυρία ἔστω πανταχοῦ οὗ ἐὰν ἐπιφέ[ρ]ητίαι.
Βα U. 998, (ΟΡ 19 100 B. οἱ
€ Vee ss a a f " A“ Le | 3 LA
ἡ δὲ ὁμολογία ἥτε (= ἥδε) κυρία ἔστω πανταχῆ οὗ ἂν ἐπιφέρηται.
Note—For this phrase, as well as for some of the others, commonly found
in loans, it is interesting to compare the Nicareta Inscription, 1. G. VII,
3172 (11. 104-112).
ὅπου ἂν
This occurs in various contracts and agreements.
O. P. 1639, 18-20 73 or 44? B.C.
ἀϊ γ!ώὠγιμοί cole δὲ] ἐσόμεθα -- -- -- καὶ ὅπου ἂν τῶι καθόλου περιπίπτῃς
ἡμῖν.
Basse 4ons 42 B.C.
] ὅπου ἐὰν συντάσσῃς ἐμοί.
Ο. P. 728, 11-12 142 a. D.
μετενέγκαι ὅϊπ]ου ἐὰν αἱρῆται.
Pielapsr297 6 295 A. D.
καθίστημι [ὥστε αὐτεξοὐσ]ιόν σε εἶναι, ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν βουληθῇς, πορεύεσθαι.
PT 7O5e1 2 ᾿ 298 A. D.
μετενεγκεῖς ὅπου ἐὰν θέλῃς ἀκωλύτως.
*P. Thead. 8 (= P. Cair. 10877), 19 306 A. D.
καὶ ἀποφέριν ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν βούλεσθαι (= ἀποφέρειν ὅπου ἂν βούλησθε, Ed.)
TOP 21881718 427 A.D.
ὅπου δ᾽ ἂν διάγει τὸ δικαστήριον.
(Again the intrusive δὲ.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 79
ἃ ἂν ἀπολίπω
This formula is found in wills.
O. P. 490, 10 124 Α. Ὁ.
καὶ ἃ ἐὰν ἄΐλλα ἀϊπολίπω πάντα.
O. P. 491, 5 126 A. D.
ὧν ἐὰν ἀπολίπω οἰκοπέδων.
Ο. Ρ. 494,9 156. Δ: Ὁ.
ἃ ἐὰν ἀπολίπω ἔπιπλα καὶ σκεύη.
O. P. 495, 6 181-9 A. Ὁ.
καὶ ὧν ἐὰν [ἀϊπολίπω ἐπί! πλων.
κτήσωμαι
κτήσωμαι is found in wills as well as some other documents.
P. Petr. III 6(a), 31 ΤΊ ΒΟ:
ὅσα [aly πρί[ο]σ[κ]τήσωμαι καταλείπω.
Βα 7250 12554. Ὁ.
πάντα ὅσα ἔχει καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα ἐὰν ἐπικτήσηται.
(Observe the difference between present fact and the future,
expressed by the subjunctive, in which there is an element
of uncertainty. This is characteristic of such documents.)
παραβαίνω
ΡΤ 90 83 A. D.
ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν τούτων παραβῆι — — — ἀποτισ[άτωι.
παρασυγγραφῇ
Ο. Ρ. 270, 44 θ4 A.D.
Δ ae
καθ᾽ ὃ ἐὰν παρα[σ]υνγραφῇ εἶδος.
(The main verb is προσαποτισάτω).
OTHER EXPRESSIONS FOUND IN WILLS
Examples of a few other expressions found in wills may be of
interest.
O. P. 494, 25 ΤΌ ΓΑ ᾿ς
ὅσα δ᾽ ἂν ὑπὸ τὸ ἐκδόσιμον τῆς διαθήκης γράψω ---- -- αὐτὰ ἔστω κύρια.
Ο. Ρ. 495, 3 180-9740 ΤῊ
ὃ δ᾽ ἂν ἐπιτελέσω κύριον ὑπάρχειν.
80 ὕστε of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
Ib., line 13 181-9 A. Ὁ.
a
ὧν ἐὰν ἐξ ὀνόματός μου διαδέξηται μεθ᾽ ἃ ἐὰν εἰς αὐτὸν ἀναλώσῃ.
RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH βούλωμαι, αἱρῶμαι, θέλω
βούλωμαι
The indicative occurs in some of the later examples instead of
the subjunctive. αἱρῶμαι occurs sometimes instead of βούλωμαι,
and χρήζω occasionally. Most examples are from letters.
P. Hib. 72, 6-7 241 B.C.
ὧν [ἂ]ν βούλωνται γράφειν Μανεθῶι καὶ οἷς ἂν βούλωνται.
Po Parr4a2s Prob. 156 B. c.
καὶ παρεκάλεσα αὐτὸν ἔρχεσθαι περὶ ὧν ἂν βούληται.
P. Grenf. I, 35 99 B.C.
ἔγράψαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ Gv βουλόμεθα.
P. Grenf. II, 36 (= Witk. 54), 14 95 B.C.
περὶ ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῆτε, Ὑράψατέ μοι (= αἱρῆσθε).
ΟἿ 787 16 A. D.
[σ]ὺ δὲ ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῇ γράφε.
vd og Cet hg aiclebe foie tes 3rd A. D.
γράμματά μοι δίαπεμψον περὶ οὗ ἐὰν βούλῃ.
ἘΟ, Ῥ, 1218, 8-9 3rd A. D.
περὶ οὕτινος αἰὰν χρήζῃς ἡδέως ποιοῦντι ἀνόκνως δήλωσον.
P. Gen. 50, end c. 350 Aon:
[πε]ρὶ ὧν βούλει κέ[λε]υέ μοι.
ΓΘ 8720, 5 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
δεύτερα δὲ περὶ ὧν βούλῃ.
θέλῃς
θέλῃς is used in about the same way as βούλωμαι. The
indicative occurs sometimes. Most examples of θέλῃς (θέλεις) are
from letters.
QO. P. 1061221 2 ΒΤ τ
γράφε ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς καὶ ἥδιστα ποιήσωι.
*Q. P. 743, 39 Pay sae 4
ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς Ὑράφε μοι Kal ἀνόκνως ποήσω.
ΟΡ 1675.» 2nd A. L.
γράψαντός μοι ἐκείνου δοῦναι αὐτῶι ὅσον ἐὰν θέλῃ.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 81
ἘΟ, Ῥ, 531, end 2nd A. D.
περὶ ὧν θέλεις SnAwody μοι.
ἘΠῚ ΝΜ 902. 510: 254 or 261 A. D.
καὶ ἔχε ἀυτὰς els τε περιχωματισμὸν ἢ Kal λόγον ὀψωνίων ws ἐὰν
θέλῃς διοίκησον αὐτὰς κτὰ. (αὐτὰς -- δραχμάς.)
Ρ, Lips. 30, 8-9 3rd A. D.
αἷς ἐὰν θέλῃ ἡμέραις] ἀκωλύτως.
ΣΕ 10.7.9 4th A. Ὁ.
καὶ λαβὲ Hoa θέλις κνίδια.
4 pal ’ 2
ὧν ἂν χρείαν ἔχῃς
This also belongs to letters. Sometimes we find the indicative.
P. Hib. 64, end 264 B.C.
χρὴ δὲ καὶ [γὙράϊφειν μοι πίερ]ὶ ὧν ἂν χρείαν ἔχῃς.
ΘΙ 9302.:19 242 Bec,
ἐν οἷς ἂν τυγχάνωμεν χρείαν ἔχοντες.
P. S. I. 413, 9-10 III B.c.
γεγράφαμέν σοι ὧν χρείαν ἔχομεν.
Pah 256.) orks 1st A. D.
καλῶς ποιήσεις ἰδίωι κινδύνῳ τὸ καλὸν πωλήσας ἐξ ὧν ἐάν σοι εἴ πῃ
φαρμάκων ἔχεινχρείαν Σώτας ὁ φίλος [μου.
*O. P. 1216, 18-19 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
δήλωσόν μοι περὶ Gv xplay αἴχεται παρ᾽ ἐμοί.
O. P. 930, beg. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
μὴ ὄκνι μοι [γ]ράφειν καὶ περὶ ὧν ἐὰ]ν χρείαν ἔχῃς.
Ο. Ρ. 1769, 6-7 3rd A. D.
ἔγραψα τῷ ἀδελφῷ ὅτι περὶ ov ἐὰν χρίαν σχῇς ἵνα λάβῃς.
Ss ah ae 4th A. Ὁ.
πέμψον ἐμοὶ περὶ 7 <a τινος χρήαν ἔχεται.
δύνωμαι, δυνατόν
This is used in letters.
P. S. I. 552 (Recto), 7-8 269'Or 231 Β. Ce
ὅπως ὃ ἂν δύνηται προσερανίσαι μοι εἰς THY ἀπαγωγήν.
(Again in 10 ff.)
P. Hib. 54; 23 ff. οὐ οῦΒχοςι
> ’ \ « cal ‘ ι ov bal U
ἀπόστειλον δὲ ἡμῖν Kal τυροὺς ὅσους ἂν δύνηι.
82 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P.S. I. 624, 14-15 ΤΠ ΒΙῸΣ
ὅσαι ἂν δυναταὶ ὦσι τῶν ἀμπέλων.
(This is of a type different from the others.)
Petals Hhpeec:
ἐφ᾽ ἰὅσ]ον ἂν ἐκποιῆι σοι (ἐκποιῆι σοι is a correction for je σοι
δυνατόν. This is a draft of a letter, and is fragmentary.)
ΟΥ̓ ΤΆ 80. 23:1: ᾿ SpAd Oley >
γράψον μοι περὶ] ὧν ἠ[ἀ]ν δύν[ωϊμε.
P. Flor. 178 3rd A. D.
ὅσον δυνατόν σοί ἐστιν προνόησον.
(Observe the indicative mood.)
P. Amh. 145, 21-22 4th-5th cent. A. D.
[ἀξίϊωσον συνβοηθῆναι αὐτῷ eis ὃ ἐὰν [δυνα]τόν σοι τῇ τιμιότητι.
(The verb is omitted.)
OTHER COMMON PHRASES
Of other phrases which occur commonly or a fair number of
times, I shall give only one or two examples.
εὕρω
P. Petr. III 43 (2), Recto, Col. IV, 39 ff. Lit pe
καὶ ὅσωι ἂν πλεῖον εὕρηι ἀϊναπωλούμενον ἢ ἐπιμισθούμενόν τι Kad’
[ἡμέραν ἀνη]λωθῆι ἀποτείσει ὁ ἐργολάβ]ος τό τε ἀργύ]ριον ὃ ἂν
προειληφὼς ἦι.
(The whole is quite certain upon comparison of all the
documents under 43(2) and 42 f.)
P. Amh. 85, 8 78 A.D.
kal ὅσα ἄλλα ἐὰν ἀφεύρω. ͵
(Application for Lease.)
O. P. 286, 20-21 82 A. D.
ἐξ ὧν ἐὰν εὑρίσκω.
(Petition). ἣ
On 1043 83 A. D.
ἧς ἐὰν εὕρῃ τιμῆς. (Agreement of Sale.)
*B. G. U. 380, 17-19 3rd A. D.
kal χαταβένω περπατῶ μετὰ οὗ ἐὰν εὕρω. (= καταβαίνω and περι-
πατῶ, used with future meaning.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 83
P. Flor. 242, 10 3rd A. D.
ὅσας δὲ ἐὰν εὕρῃς (apTaBas) Kal ws ἂν αὐτὰς ἐκ πλέονος ἐπίστειλόν μοι.
*P. B. M. 1343, 20-21 709 A. D.
ζημιοῦντες καὶ τοὺς τοῦ χωρίου ἔνθα εὑρεθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος φυγάς.
συντάσσω AND THE LIKE
Bereta 11{713(5) 298-3 B.C;
τ]ὴν λοιπὴν [xlopnylav ἡμεῖς παρέξομέν σοι ὅϊσηϊν ἂν συντάσσηις.
P. Tebt. 105, 41 1035: 870:
οὗ ἂν συντάσσηι. (Main verb is ἀποδότω.)
P. Amh. 85, 14-15 78 A.D.
ἀποδώσομεν — — — οἷς ἐὰν σὺ ὁ ἐξηγητὴς ἐπιστί[είϊλῃς (instead of
συντάσσῃς.)
BOR. 5628 230 A. D.
ὧν ἐὰν ὁ μεταξυμεσίτης προσφωνήσῃ.
ΘΟ. 2605 14 286 A. D.
δώσω οἷς ἐὰν κελευσθῶ.
ἘΣ 5 Ξ ΘΒ 5273). 487 A.D.
ἢ καὶ ἄλλων ὧν ἐπιτρέψῃ τὸ σὸν μέγεθος.
δοκιμάσῃς
*P. Tebt. 24, 78 117 Bac.
καθότι [ἂ]ν δοκιμήσῃς.
B. G. U. 248, 18-19 c. 80 A. D.
διὸ, ἀδελφὲ, ws ἐὰν δοκιμάζῃς, γεινέσθω.
ΒΟ ΕΠ 3245. 2: Ἢ: 156 A. D.
καλῶς ποιήσις τοὺς φοίνικας τοὺς ἐν τῶι παραδίσωι πολήσας ws ἂν
δοκειμάσῃς.
P. Flor. 278 (Col. 3), 14-15 SrCeAn:
ὃν ἐὰν δοκιμάσῃς τῶν βοηθῶν cov πέμψεις.
Pape 67: 50-51 S317 ALD:
καὶ τούτου Bond . . μοι δοθῆναι ὃ ἐὰν ἡ σὴ τύχη δοκιμάσῃ
(Petition. Perhaps βοηθόν, and ὃ is for ᾧ, or better ὃν, as
editor suggests.)
πράξῃς
P, Eleph. 11 222 B.C.
ὧν δ᾽ ἂν πράξηις οἰκ[ονομιῶν], γράφε ἡμῖν.
84 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Flor. 278, Col. 2, lines 14 and 29 3rd A. D.
ὅσ᾽ ἂν πράξῃς.
ἣν ἂν (ὡς ἂν) παραλάβω
This is used particularly in leases; ὡς παρείληφα is sometimes
used in its place.
O. P. 1641, 19 68 A.D.
παραδοὺς ἣν ἂν παραλάβῃς θύραν καὶ κλεῖδαν. (ἐκχωρήσις is in
apodosis.)
BP, BeM<331; 12-13 165 A. D.
παραδώσω [alo ὅσα ἐὰν παρελαβόμην
(Aorist indicative for subjunctive.)
OPM 1272122 183 Av ἢ.
παραδότω τὸν αὐτὸν τόπον καὶ τὸν περι[[σ]]στερεῶνα ὡς ἐὰν παραλάβῃ
κτλ.
Ο. Ρ. 1694 280 A. D.
καὶ ἃς ἐὰν παραλάβῃ θύρας καὶ κλεῖδας (παραδότω in apodosis.)
P. Giess. 52 affords an example of ὡς παρείληφα. 397 Α. Ὁ.
« pal ,
ws ἂν κρίνῃς
ῬΑ 37,7 51 Prob..163/5ac:
ws ἂν κρίνῃς.
Ο. Ρ. 1492, 13-14 3rd-4th cent. A. Ὁ.
ὡς ἐὰν κρείνῃς περὶ τοῦ ἔ[ρ] γ[ου] θάρρει.
ὡς ἂν δοκῇ (δόξῃ)
O. P. 493, 8 Early 2nd A. Ὁ.
ὡς ἐὰν αὐτῶι τῶι ἐπιζήϊσανἾτι δοκῇ ἐφ᾽ ὧι ἐὰν αἱρῆται μερισμῶι.
(ΕΙΣ End 3rd A. D.
καὶ ὃ ἐὰν αὐτοῦ δόξῃ τῷ μεγέθι.
ὧν ἐὰν ἐπενξγκῃ
This phrase seems to occur in a great number of contracts
and agreements of different kinds, dated just before the time of
Christ. One example will be sufficient.
Βα 115} 36 te Is Be
ἀκύρων οὐσῶν. καὶ ὧν ἐὰν ἐπενξγκῃ πίστεων πασῶν σκέπης πάσης.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 85
Compare this instance of ἐὰν ἐπενέγκῃ from a later date:
ἘΡ͵ Οτοπί. 11, 71 ((οἱ. 1), 10-11 244-248 A. D.
ἐὰν δέ τις ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐπενέγκῃ τοῦτο ἄκηρον [= ἄκυρον] εἶναι.
δίδωμι
The examples with δίδωμι are most interesting for the forms
of the word.
The first example is of special interest.
ee iiers (Col..3) After 240 B. Cc.
συνχρημάτιζε ὅϊσα]ς ἂν ἡμέρας ἐπιδώηι Κτήσων, καὶ σύμ[βοϊλον
πο(ίει) πρ(ὸς) αὐτόν.
The editor calls this an optative and refers to Mayser, pp’
326-7, where certainly the form is so regarded. Crénert quotes
similar forms for the optative.*} Cr6nert and Mayser are
decided for the optative; but Moulton holds dey: in the New
Testament for a subjunctive, tor syntactic reasons.4 The
subjunctive is consistently used elsewhere in this papyrus. I
am inclined to regard this as a subjunctive, but to leave the
question open.
ῬΥΘΝ 515. 12 1st-2nd cent. A. Ὁ.
ἀποτισάτω αὐτῷ ἣν ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι [ἀνα-] [φοράν Ὁ].
Sr ls GUL ALO 157 A. D.
als ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδιδῶ.
ΟΥΡ455.22 178 A.D.
ὧν [ἐὰ]ν μὴ ἀπίο]δοῖ.
Ο. Ρ. 1694, 28-29 280 A. Ὁ.
ἀποτεισάτω οὗ ἐὰν μὴ παραδῷ τὴν ἀξίαν τιμήν.
προσδέομαι AND δέομαι
ΡΒ (Cols 1), 11 164 B.c-
ὑπὲρ ὧν ἂν προσδεώμεθα ἑτέρων.
P. Tebt. 59 (= Witk. 52), 8 99 B.C.
ἐν ols ἐὰν προσδέησθέ μου.
(This letter is very dignified in tone.)
13 Crénert, p. 215.
4 Proleg. pp. 55 and 193f.
86 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Giess. 71 2nd A. D.
ἐν ots ἐάν σου δέηται σπουδάσαι αὐτῶι (dependent on ἐρωτῶ, sc. σε.)
P. Tebt. 342, 18 Late 2nd A. D.
ὅσων ἐὰν δέηται.
OB. 901s 22 276 A. D.
ἐν οἷς ἐὰν αὐτοῦ [δέηται (βοηθήσειν in main clause. The emenda-
tion is probably correct.)
δέῃ
This is infrequent.
P. Tebt. 105, 30 103 B.C.
τὸν συγγεγραμμένον χρόνον καὶ ὃν ἂν dent.
Β. G. U. 614, 26 216 A. ὩΣ
ἢ ἐφ᾽ ὧν ἐὰν ἑτέρων δέῃ δικαστῶν.
ἐγβῇ
This occurs occasionally in marriage contracts.
ἘΡ, Ryl. 154, 28-29 66 A. D.
τὰ παράφερνα οἷα ἐὰν ἐκ τῆς τρίψεως ἔγβῆι.
CE Ree Oe, 110 A. D.
καὶ τὰ mapalyep|va οἷα ἐὰν ἐκ τῆς τρέψεως γεινομένης.
ποιήσωμαι
ΡῬ. Τοσ. 1, 11--12 Ptol. Period
καὶ ἃς ἂν ποιήσηται οἰκονομίας ἀκύρους εἶναι.
Ps Grenie lee de Colas) 109 B.c.
ἣν δ᾽ ἂν ποιήσηται ἄκυρον εἶναι κτλ.
ΡΠ ΕΠ. 53903..21 150 A. D.
ἣν ἐὰν ποιήσονται -- — — ἔφοδο(ν) (= ποιήσωνται. ἄκυρος ἔστω is the
conclusion.)
ὃς ἂν
P, Lille 29 (Col. I), 28 ἢ: like: οἰ
ds ἂν ἐγκαλῆι ὑπὸ δούλου ἢ δούλης ἀδικεῖσθαι, -- -- — ἀπογραφέσθω.
(Fragment of Code.)
Pf. Par,-63:(Colms) £147 165%BaG,
ὃν ἂν ὑπολαμβάνητε χρήσιμον εἶναι πρὸς [τ]αῦτα.
ΟΡ ΒΟ 20 ΤΑ ΤΣ
ὃς δ᾽ ἄν τις αὐτῶν παραβῇ.
(Contract of Sale.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 87
ΟΥ̓ΕΕ [857,31 Prob. c. 200 A. Ὁ.
ὃς ἂν ἀπειθήσει.
(The indicative is probably an error for ἀπειθήσῃ; the
papyrus shows etacism and other mistakes.)
OTHER RELATIVE CLAUSES
Here may be given a few interesting examples which could
not be grouped under particular phrases.
P. Lille, 1 (Verso), 17 259 BC.
ὅσα ἂν ἐνπίπτηι τοῖς γεωργοῖς, ὑπολογηθήσεται.
Pie τ050195 ΤΠ ΒΤ ΟΣ
ὃ ἄν σοι δόξηι καλῶς ἔχειν.
P. Petr. II, 38c (Verso), 60 ff. ΤΙ ΡΟΣ
καὶ περὶ βουτῶν ὃν ἂν [τρόπον οἰκονομηθ[ῆι] ἀντίγρα[ψον] πρὸς αὐτόν.
P. Magd. 13, 12 21GB ΟΣ
ἃ ἂν ἐνδειξώμεθα.
P. Magd. 26, 12-13 210 ΒΙΟΣ
ὅσον ἂν κατομοσώμεθα.
O. P. 286, 11 ΒΖ...
ἐκτείσειν ὃ ἐὰν πραχθῶμεν ἢ βλαβῶμεν.
ἢ το {1 1036..28 108 A. D.
συλήσαντες ὅσα [ἔϊχωι ἐν TH κέλλαι.
(I hold this to be an indicative.)
Buk owes 136A. D.
τὸϊν ἱματισμὸν Kal Ta ἄλλα ὅσα προσήκει γυναικὶ γαμετῇ.
(A certain indicative.)
ΟἿ: 506: 21 143 A. Ὁ.
ὧν ἐὰν μὴ ἀπολάβῃ τόκων.
O. P. 498, 31 ἢ: 2nd A. D.
= 2
λήμψεται δὲ ἕκαστος ἡμῶν éx[do]rns ἡμέρας ἧς ἐὰν ἐργάζηται Kall ἄρ- ]
τον ἕνα καὶ προσφάγιον.
ΕΠ 1559. δ 2nd cent. A. Ὁ.
πέ[μ͵ψατε ἡμεῖν ἃς αἰὰν ἧς εἰληφώς.
B. G. U. 432, Col. II, 2nd Frg., 9 190 A. D.
ὅ τι ἐὰν πράξῃς δήλωσόν por.
88
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P, Fay. 136, 2-3 4th cent. A. D.
ὅσ᾽ ἂν πάσχετε.
(= πάσχητε, as editor says. The subjunctive is used lower
down. However, it might be a careless use of the indi-
cative in a general relative clause.)
Ib. 8 ff. 4th cent. A. D.
ἄμινον ὑμᾶς ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις οἷς ἐὰν τύχοι εἶναι ἢ ἐπὶ ξένης. (τύχοι is
pretty certainly an error for τύχηι in this present general
relative clause. This was the epoch when subjunctive and
optative, and indicative too, were badly confused.)
P. B. M. 1877, 2-3 6th cent. A. D.
ὁμολογοῦμεν -- — — μεμισθῷ «σθαι παρά cov ἐφ᾽ 6<y> ἐὰν διακα-
τέχομεν χρόνον. (Compare No. 1874).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 89
ty
ΤῊΕ SuBJUNCTIVE Moop (Concluded)
THE HorTATORY SUBJUNCTIVE
The subjunctive of exhortation is almost entirely wanting in
the non-literary papyri. An instance of 117 A. D. is from a
papyrus of semi-literary nature; for it isan Invitation to a Festival
of Hadrian’s Accession, P. Giess. 3, 7—8, τοιγαροῦν θύοντες τὰς
ἑστίας ἀνάπτωμεν. The other examples are very few in number
and from the very late Byzantine Period.
P. Cair. 67068, 8 After 500 A. D.
μὴ ἀποτύχω δὲ εἰς τοῦτο θαρρῶν ὑμᾶς.
(P. Cair. 67020 is quite similar, but the text is not so certain.)
O. P. 1841, 4-5 6th cent. A. D.
μὴ ἀποτύχω τῆς [αἰτήσεως iva καὶ ἐν τούτῳ εὐχαριστήσω ὑμῖν.
Ps Cair..6/003, 15 ΟΠ DIA SD:
διδάσκωμεν οὖν τὸ φιλάνθρωπον ὕψος ὑμῶν.
In line 14 προσπίπτωμεν.
*O. P. 1874, 14 6th cent. A. D.
δωξάζωμεν τὸν Θεὸν ὅτι αὐτὸς ἔδωσεν καὶ αὐτὸς ἔλαβεν.
(In the last two examples the forms might be interpreted as
indicatives; and indeed this is done by the editor of O. P.
1874).
DELIBERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE
The independent deliberative subjunctive seems not to occur;
but there are a number of examples of this construction dependent
on γράψον, ἔχω and other verbs. Instances occur in all periods;
they are found particularly in letters.
Exs. γράψον. Almost all the examples are from private letters.
*P.S. I. 437, 5-6 247 B.C.
σὺ οὖν γράψον ἡμῖν τίνα οἰκονομίαν ποιήσηται.
PP, 9.215.668, 9-12 Hisere,
γράψον οὖν μοιϊ πῶς τὴν τειμὴν κομίσωμαι ὅπως ἀν] ταγορεύσω.
90 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P. Fay. 137, 2-3 (Question to Oracle) Ist A. D.
χρημάτισόν μοι, ἦ μείνωι ἐν Βακχιάδι ; ἦ μέλ « Dw ἐντυνχάνιν ;
P. Giess. 68, 15 Early 2nd A. D.
ypayis μοι οὖν, τίνι δῶ.
Ὁ ΡΒ 1 618:16 3rd A. D.
γράψον wv, ποταπὸν θέλεις ἐνήκω γράψον pv.
Again, in line 17, πόσον ἐνήκω γράψον μυ.
ἘΡ, Tebt. 417 24 ff. 3rd A. D.
μάθε τοῦ [Μώρου ὅτι τί θέλις [ἀγοράσομεν els ’Avti|v6<o>v.
(ἀγοράσομεν looks like a future indicative but I believe is
to be regarded as intended for the subjunctive in a letter
which has many errors. The next example is similar.)
ὮΟ. Ρ, 1671, 22-23 3rd A. Ὁ.
γράψον μοι ὅτι ποῦ εὑρίσκομεν.
ἘΟ. P. 1495, 9 4th A. D.
δήλωσόν μοι δῶ τὰς ἴσας.
Exs. ἔχω.
P.S. I. 351, 12-14 254 B.C.
οὐκ εἴ [χο]μεν ὅθεν αὐτῶι δῶμεν.
nf Bese ΤΥ 605: Ὁ III B. c.
ob yap ἔχω πῶς ἐπιτειμήσω αὐτῆ <u>.
*B. G. U. 884, 3-5 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
νὴ γὰρ τοὺς ἰθεὸυς [οὐκ ἔχω <e> λο[ιπὸϊν τί σοι Ὑράψω <i> [πρὸς
ἃς γράφι μοι ἐπισ[το]λάς.
Exs. Other Verbs.
P. Tebt. 289, 5 ff. acca Ὁ]
οὕτως yap γνώσομαιΪ πότερον ἐπὶ τόπων σε ἐάσω πράττοντά τι
ἢ μεταπεμψάμείνος) [πέμψωι τῶι ἡγεμί[όνι] ὡς ἀμε! [λοῦντα τῆς
εἰσπράϊξεως.
ΒΊΗΣ 5999. 6. ΠῚ 2nd A. D.
ἀλλ᾽ ἐπιζητεῖ νῦν μετὰ καὶ Gd|Awy γυμναστικῶν φίλων πῶς ἐ[πιθῆταί
μοι ἀπόντος σοῦ,
ΟΡ 1773: 8 i 3rd A. Ὁ.
οὐκ εὗρον πῶς ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς.
*O. P. 939, 19 4th A. Ὁ.
viv δὲ πῶς πλίονα γράψω περὶ αὐτῆς ἀπορῶ.
Two more examples may be given here; one of which, however-
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 91
has been largely supplied, and the other, perhaps, should be
referred to Relative Clauses Expressing Purpose."
| aa POLY gpa 248 B.C.
οὐ δίδωσιν ᾿Ιάσων, φάμενος μὴ ὑπάρχειν ὅθεν δῶι.
Ib. 6-7
ὅϊτι οὐκ ἐπίσταται ὅθεν] [δῶι.
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING PURPOSE
In Attic Greek*® the future indicative is used; a well known
example is Plat. Ap. 37 C. οὐ γὰρ ἔστι μοι χρήματα ὁπόθεν ἐκτίσω.
The subjunctive, says Goodwin, is not used in this construc-
tion in Attic Greek. We find very interesting examples of the
subjunctive in Xenophon. Such constructions as ἔχοιμεν ἂν ὅποι
φυγόντες ἡμεῖς σωθῶμεν and οὐχ ἕξουσιν ἐκεῖνοι ὅποι φύγωσιν (Xen.
Anab. II, 4, 19 and 20) show a subjunctive which combines
functions οἱ both purpose and the deliberative idea. This usage
isfound in N. T. Greek.?7 Another interesting passage may be
quoted from Xenophon (Anab. I, 7, 7), where we have a com-
bination of relative and interrogative subjunctives: ὥστε οὐ τοῦτο
δέδοικα μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι δῶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν φίλων, ἂν εὖ γένηται, ἀλλὰ μὴ
οὐκ ἔχω ἱκανοὺς οἷς δῶ." ὃ
I find in the non-literary papyri only a few examples of this
relative clause of purpose:
P. S, I. 440, 19-20 III B.c.
πρὸς Sy yap καταβοήσωμεν οὐκ ἔχομεν σοῦ παρόντος.
These two interesting examples may be placed here:
*B. G. U. 822, 4-6 3rd A. ἢ.
εὗρον γεοργόν, τίς αὐτὰ ἑλκύσῃ, ἀλλὰ τὰ σπέρματα Tis διδοῖ;
τίς as a relative seems to occur occasionally; Cp. O. P.
ΠΟ 0.254. A. 10: 1155: 13: η Ὁ. B. M..239,.10. ‘It's
15 For the deliberative subjunctive i in Classical Greek, see GMTS$$287-288,
ἸΟΗΣ ne App. VI; for this construction in N. T. Greek, see Burton $§168
and
poe For ‘Final Relative Clauses Expressing Purpose,’’ see GMT$$565 and
2
17 Burton, §§317-319.
pees further discussion of the subject, see GMT, App. VI and Burton,
$31
92 Use of Subjunctive and Opiatize Moods tn the Non-Literary Papyrt
doubtful whether this use is found in the New Testament:
Moulton is rather favorable to the view ;?9 Blass?° accepts it;
but Radermacher” expresses himself positively against it.
Such passages as Mark 14, 36 and Luke 17, 8 would be
considered in this connection.)
| SP (0) oA ee 6th A. D.
ov χάρτης χωρεῖ τὴν ἐκ μέρους σύναψιν ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τι ἄσωμεν ὑμῖν τῶν
κακῶν ἔργων ἐκ[ εἰνων πρῶϊτ]ον [μ]έν κτλ.
SUBJUNCTIVE IN STRONG NEGATIVE ASSERTIONS
Instances of οὐ μὴ with the aorist subjunctive, in the sense
of an emphatic future indicative, occur from the middle of the
third century B. C. until 710 A. D.
P. Hib. 40, 6 fff. 26 1 ΒΒ re.
ἐπίστασοϊμέντον (Ξε μέντοι) ἀκριβῶς δραχμὴν μίαν οὐθείς σοι μὴ
πλὴηρ <wo >.
(In the last three words there are many uncertain letters.)
PAE Petr, 1 13919 Mid. III
τοῦτο « δ᾽ »ΈἜχε τῆι δια[νοία]ι ὅτι οὐθέν σοι μὴ γενηθῆι λυπηρόν, ἀλλὰ
πᾶν ἐϊμοὶ ἔστ]αι πεφροντισμένον.
SE bare 10 160 B. c.
λέγων" ob μὴ ἀφῶ αὐτὴν φυγῖν.
Biss ar Uo ΠΟΥ 11 18 2nd A. D.
ὅτι [olb[ . . ] με λοιπήσῃς (= ob μὴ με λυπήσῃς).
*O. P. 119, 4-5 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ob μὴ Ὑράψω σε ἐΪπιστολὴν οὔτε λαλῶ σε οὔτε ὑγιένω σε
(also 1. 14, οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω.).
POR 903, 16 4th A.D.
ov μὴ κρύψω.
Further examples until the beginning of the eighth century
are wanting.
P. B. M. 1338, 8 Ξ 709 A.D.
γινώσκει yap ὁ Θεὸς ὡς ob μὴ ἀποκεινηθῇς ἐξ ἡμῶν.
P. B. M. 1345, 18 710 A. D.
ov μὴ παρακροὐσωσιν).
19 Proleg.. p. 93.
20 Gram., p. 179,
41 Gram., p. 62
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 93
BeBe Mi. 1362, .15 710 A. D.
ov μὴ δέξονται.
(I should place this last example here. δέξονται should be
regarded as a subjunctive; for in these latter days o and w
were frequently confused.)
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF PROHIBITION
The subjunctive of prohibition is exceedingly common; it is
found in letters, as might be expected from the nature of the
phrases. Μὴ ἀμελήσῃς occurs again and again, and is the
commonest of all the phrases; μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσῃς is found fre-
quently. The aorist subjunctive is almost always used, though
occasionally we find the present. The present imperative is
sometimes found, generally used with care; a few examples of
the aorist imperative occur from the late period.
After showing briefly by examples that this construction is
common from the third century B. C. to 700 A. D., I shall con-
sider the subject under the different phrases.
ΘΟ 530, Ὁ 258 B.C.
μὴ οὖν περιίδηις ἡμᾶς καταφθαρέντας, ἀλλ᾽ ἀντιλαβοῦ.
*P, Par. 50, 8-9 (-U.P.Z. 79) 160 B. Cc.
μηθαμῶς ἔργῇις ἢ ἀπολέσῃς σου τὸν maida.
Ο. Ρ. 742, 14 ΒΟῸΣ
μὴ ἀμελήσηις.
παν 111..21]--22 100 A. D.
μὴ οὖν ληρήσῃς τὸν ἐκτιναγμόν σου.
P. Fay. 54, 3 118 A. D.
μὴ προσχρή(σῃ) ἑτέρωι συμβόλ[ῳ].
Po tand..9, 35 2nd A. D.
μὴ οὗ <v> ἀποσιωπήσηται. (= ἀποσιωπήσητε.)
LO ed 533}. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
μὴ μισθώσῃς μηδενί.
P. Prk. 4254 (= Meyer Ostr. 64) c. 3rd A. D.
μὴ ἀντιλογήσῃς.
*P. Gen..62, 12-13 2 aD:
καὶ μηδένα ἐπιτρέψῃς βίαν αὐτοῖς π[ο]ιεῖν. (In Add. et Corr. μήτινα).
*O. P. 1683, 16 Late 4th A. ἢ.
μὴ λυπήσις οὖν ἐμένα. (ἐμένα for ἐμέ is noteworthy.)
94 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Cair. 67084, 3 Byz.
μὴ οὖν ἀπαραίτητος γένηται ἡ αἴτησις
(The context is not quite certain.)
P. Cair. 67083, 1 Byz.
μὴ συγχωρήσῃ ἡ σὴ [eddoxiunors?].
|e SEM ΑΝ 6th? A. D.
μὴ νομίσητε.
*O. P. 1874, 17-18 6th A. D.
ἀλλὰ παρακαλῶ σε, κύριξ pov, μὲ βάλης [λύπη]ν εἰς τὸ ψυχί σου καὶ
ἀπολήσις τὸ πράγματά σου (μὲ = μὴ, ἀπολήσις = ἀπολέσῃς.)
Be (0317 6th-7th cent A.D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ ὑπερθῖ ἡ ὑμετέρα εὐλαβία (= ὑπερθῇ and εὐλάβεια).
AP VATING 1592}}2 6th-7th cent. A. D.
μὴ πέμψῃς.
P. B. M. 1338, 25-27 709 A. D.
καὶ ἁπλῶς εἰπεῖν μὴ εὑρεθῇς παραλείψας τίποτε ἐν τῇ ἐπιτροπῇ!
ἡμῶν εἰς τοῦτο μήτε μὴν διδῶν καθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ τὴν οἱανοῦν πρόφασιν
ἢ σκάνδαλον.
SPECIAL PHRASES
μὴ ἀμελήσῃς
Very few examples of this phrase occur before the second
century A. D.; from that time on we find it very frequently.
P. Par. 18, 4 Ptolemaic Period
μὴ ἀμελήσις τῷ υἱῷ μου and in line 11 μὴ ἀμελήσις.
O. P. 742, 14 (= Witk. 56) 2B. Ca
μὴ ἀμελήσηις.
πο ΡΥ ΟΊ 0 26 A. D.
[μὴ oliv ἀμελήσῃς.
(The emendation seems quite certain.)
P. Bas. 17, 4-5 Early Roman
μή μου ἀμελήσῃς. Ε
P. Iand. 9, 16 2nd A. D.
μὴ ἀμελήσῃς.
ἘΡ, Tebt. 315, 31-33 2nd A. D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς σαυτοῦ μηδὲ Gv σοι ἔγραψα ὠνήσασθαι μοι.
O. P. 934, 9 Probably 3rd A. "Ὁ.
μὴ οὖν ἀμελήσῃς τοῦ βαλεῖν τὴν κόπρον.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 95
See 1 215. 2 Probably 3rd A. D.
μὴ ἀμελήσῃς περὶ τῶν ἔργων
P. Strasb. 32, 16 261 A. D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς.
*P. Amh. 143, 2 4th A. D.
μὴ ἀμελήσῃς ἐν τῇ αὔριον ἀπαντῆσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς.
ton 925717 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
ταῦτα δὲ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς.
(ΡΟ 1834:6 5th-6th cent. A. D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς, δέσποτα.
P. Β. M. 1404, 19-20 c. 709 A. D.
λοιπὸν μὴ ἀμελήσῃς ἐν] τ[οὐ]τίῳ.
P. B. M. 1374, 12-13 ΜΉ ΤΑ Ds
καὶ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς εἰς τοῦτο.
Instead of the simple μὴ ἀμελήσῃς, ὅρα μὴ ἀμελήσῃς occurs freely, as:
BreGauelOsts tt 2nd A. D.
ἀλλ᾽ ὅρα μὴ ἀμελήσῃς τὸν ἁλοητὸν τῆς νήσου.
Ο. Ρ. 527, 6-7 2nd-3rd cent. A. Ὁ.
dpa μὴ ἀμελήσῃς.
In the following instance, in a papyrus with many errors, we
have an interesting confusion of two constructions: the sub-
junctive of prohibition and the participle with καλῶς ποιήσεις ; or
should we emend to πίοιϊήϊσας Ὁ
P. Tebt. 415, 3-4 2nd cent. A. D.
καλῶς πίοι]ή[σεις μὴ ἀϊμελήσις περὶ 1].
A peculiar variant of the phrase is this:
P. Iand. 23, 14 6th-7th cent. A. D.
μὴ γένηται ἀμέλειαν (Observe the addition of ν, just as in οἶδαν
above.)??
It is not surprising to find an example of the present imperative
μὴ ἀμέλει.
Β. G. U. 624, 17-19 Time of Diocletian.
μὴ ἀμέλει, ἐὰν εὕρῃς χρήσιμον γεωργὸν μισθ[ωϊτ(ὴν) [τοῦ γεωργοῦ"
ἱερᾶς μὴ ἀμέλει ὀφιλῆ[5].
2 Cp. Mayser, p. 197 a and p. 198 ε.
96 Use of Subjunctive and Optaiive Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrs
(In the same papyrus ἀμελήσῃς is used earlier.)
One might expect to find so convenient a phrase in the Greek
of the New Testament. However, I find it only once in a pas-
sage where the present imperative is used repeatedly and con-
sistently, I Tim. 4, 14:
μὴ ἀμέλει τοῦ ἐν σοὶ χαρίσματος.
μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσῃς
This phrase seems to be common in the third century Β. C.
and the first and second centuries A. D.; there are only a few
examples from other periods.
P.S. I. 499, 7 25), Bates
καὶ μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσηις.
P. Hib. 58, end 245 or 243 B.C.
μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσηιϊς.
P. Tebt. 459 Siaece
kal μὴ ἄλ[λ]ως ποήσῃς.
ΟΡ ΟΝ Phd Ne ἐν,
μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσις (line 26 ποιήσῃ).
μεν. 115..0 101 A. D.
μὴ οὖν ἄλλως πυήσῃς.
Wilcken, Gr. Ostr. 1153 Roman Period
μὴ ἄλλως morhont(e)| εἰδότ(ες) τὴν ἀνάγκην.
VARIANTS WITH πράξῃς.
I have found only two examples.
O. P. 79 (Verso), 3-5 End 2nd cent. A. D.
μηδὲ ἀγενὲς μη ἰδὲ ἄδοξ[ο]ν καὶ μὴ[[δε]] ἀνάλκιμον πράξῃς.
(This may be a school composition.)
OPP i552 745-17 2nd cent. A. D.
ὅρα οὖν μὴ ἄλλως πράξῃς [[μὴ]] καὶ ποιήσῃς με mpds|oe ἐλθεῖν συν-
ζητήσον τά σοι.
As we note in the preceding example ὅρα may be used to intro-
duce the prohibitory subjunctive. So the following example
with βλέπε is probably correctly emended:
Pe land. 2059 6th-7th cent. A. D.
βλέπε οὖν μὴ [ἄλλως ποιήσῃς].
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrs 97
μὴ δόξῃς
A few examples of the second and third centuries A. D. occur.
Certs 1S 2nd A. D.
μὴ δόξῃς με ἠμεληκότα THs κλειδός.
μὴ δόξῃ
From the very late Byzantine Period there are a few instances.
P. B. M. 483, 76 (Perpetual Lease) 616 A. Ὁ.
καὶ μὴ δόξῃ τῷ mpoyeyp ᾿Ιωάννῃ.
Pr ΒΟ 1351}11 710 A. Ὁ.᾿
καὶ μὴ δόξῃ σοι δοῦναι.
μὴ δῷς AND SIMILAR FORMS
There are not many examples; but we find represented. the
Ptolemaic, Roman, and Byzantine Periods. It will be observed
that the form of the verb in the Byzantine Period is δώσῃς.
P. Tebt. 21, 7-8 115 5 Ὁ:
σὺ οὖν μὴ δῶς [νῶτον μηδενί.
P. Lips. 106, 18 98 A.D.
βλέπε δὲ μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ dots χαλκόν.
(Such an expression might easily be placed under Fear and
Caution.)
O. P. 1063, 14-15 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
τὸ πιττάϊκ]ιον ἀναγνοὺς μὴ ἀναδῷς [τῷ Ἡρώ[δ]ῃ.
ΒΟ ΤΠ 4653 Byz.
μὴ δόσῃς αὐτὰ τὸν elpnvapx (nv).
*P2Amh. 153;°14-15 6th-7th cent. A. D.
μὴ dwon<s>|rpiunoa μηδὲ κριθήν.
P. B. M. 1360, 11 710 A. D.
kal μὴ δώσῃς αὐτῷ ἀφορμὴν.
μὴ κατάσχῃς
This phrase occurs for the most part in the first four centuries
A. D.; but there is one example from the third century B. C.
P. Lille 18 Th Bec:
καὶ μὴ κατάσχῃς αὐτόν.
*P. Fay. 109, 11 Early 1st A. Ὁ.
μὴ κατάσχῃς Κλέωνα.
98 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
B. G. U. 37, 5-6 50 A. ἢ.
ὅρα οὖν μὴ αὐτὸν κατάσχῃς.
Ρ. Hamb. 54 C215 20D;
μὴ οὖν κατάσχῃϊς] τὸ πλοῖον.
ΟἿ Ρ.᾽ 69 3rd-4th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἀλλ᾽ Spa μὴ κατάσχητε τὸν ὑπηρέτη <v>.
μὴ ἀφῇς
There are only a few examples.
O. P. 1581, 5-6 (Probably) 2nd A. D.
Σαραπίωνα μὴ ἀφῇς ἀργεῖν καὶ ῥέμβεσθαι, ἀλλὰ ἐργασίαν αὐτὸν
βάλε.
SO Perle oka 3rd A. D.
μὴ ἀφῇς αὐτοὺς ἀργῆσε ὅλους. (= ἀργῆσαι ὅλως.)
*Ib. 25-26 3rd A. Ὁ.
τοὺς τέκτονες μὴ ἀφῇς ὅλως apynoe’ ὄχλει αὐτοῖς.
*B. 6. U. 814, 27 3rd A. D.
μὴ ἀφήσις μοι οὗτος.
(This is perhaps intended for μὴ ἀφήσῃς με οὕτως. It is
very badly written and the forms are not certain.)
μὴ λείπῃς
There are two interesting examples, one early and one late.
aos bol 2515} Ὁ:
καὶ σὺ δὲ μὴ ἔγκαταλ{ε)ίπηις ἡμᾶς.
O. P. 120 4th A. D.
GX<A>’ dpa μὴ καταλίψῃς μαι θλιβόμενον.
μὴ γνωσθῇ
This occurs in several papyri of about 700 A. Ὁ.
P. B. M. 1354, 18-19 710 A. D.
λοιπὸν μὴ γνωσθῇ ἡμῖν ὡς ἠνύσθη.
μὴ δεηθῇς
This occurs in papyri of the same kind and date as those just
mentioned.
P. B. M. 1338, 30 709 A. Ὁ.
λοιπὸν μὴ δεηθῇς ἑτέρων ἡμῶν γραμμάτων περὶ τούτο μετὰ τὰ παρόντα
γράμματα.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 99
P. B. M. 1360 710 A. D.
μήτε δὲ ἑτέρων γραμμάτων ἡμῶν περὶ τούτου.
(Here δὲ is probably an abbreviation for δεηθῇῆς as the
editor suggests, though he adopts a different interpretation.)
OTHER PHRASES OCCURRING OCCASIONALLY
P. S. I. 343, 2 : 256 B.C.
μὴ θαυμάσῃς.
ΣΡ ΝΠ Ιοτ 2 1050 3rd A. D.
μὴ θελήσῃς μοι πέμψε.
P. Iand. 20, 6 6th-7th cent. A. D.
μὴ Oednoare. (Aor. Imp.)
ἘΒ, 6. Oe 1095, 8 57 A.D.
μὴ οὖν ὀϊλ]υγωρ ἡσῃς]περὶ μηδενός.
B. G. U. 874, 11 Byz.
μὴ οὖν ὀληγωρήσατε. (Aor. Imp.)
ῬΤΒΙΝΙ: 1359 710 A. D.
λοιπὸν ἐὰν ἀγαπᾶς τὴν ψυχὴν σὸ μὴ καταφρονήσῃς ἐν τούτῳ.
PHRASES MEANING ‘‘Don’r FEAR’”’ AND THE LIKE
P. Petr. 11 40a (= Witk. 16), 12 III B.c.
μὴ οὖν ὀλιγοψυχήσητε, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνδρίζεσθε.
(The word may be compared with ὀλιγόψυχοι found in Ν.
T., 1 Thess. 5, 14; and with εὐψυχέω, its opposite, occurring
ῬΙΠ 2519
ῬΥΘῚΙ 435, 21 2595:8. Ge
σὺ οὖν μὴ καταπλαγῆις.
*Po Lebt. 9157.15 2nd A. D.
[μη]δὲν ταραχ[θ]ῇς.
P. Tebt. 411, 10-12 2nd A. D.
μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσῃς, μηδὲν [μέντοι θορυβηθῇς.
ἘΟ, P. 1769, 7-9 3rd A. D.
μὴ ὀκνήσις οὖν προσελθὶν αὐτῷ περὶ οὗ ἐὰν χρήζῃς.
P. Giess. 57, end 6th A. D.
μὴ ὀκνήσῃς, δέσποτα.
Ρ, Β. Μ. 1787, 6 6th-7th cent. A. Ὁ.
μήτε φοβηθῆτε.
100 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
PRESENT IMPERATIVE IN PROHIBITIONS
Examples of the present imperative in prohibitions, generally
carefully and accurately used, occur in every period until the
4th century A. D. at any rate.
P. Petr. II, 22, 10-11 (Decree) Probably III ps. c.
τὰ κρίσεως δὲ μηθεὶς ἐνεχυραζέτω μηδὲ ἀποβιαζέσθω μηδέν.
Py Hibi'S6 ; 249 B.C.
σὺ οὖν μὴ ἐνόχλει [α] ὑτόν.
(This verb cccurs again in prohibitions, in both aorist sub-
junctive and present imperative, in papyri of the third or
fourth century A. D )
*P. Tebt. 34, 8-9 c. 100 B. c.
ἀπολυθήτωι δὲ Kal μὴ παρανοχλεί <a >Ow.
P. Grenf. II, 36 (= Witk. 54), 9 95 B.C.
μὴ λυπεῖσθε.
ΟΕ ΔΘΑ Early 2nd A. ἢ.
ὥστε μὴ λοιποῦ (= λυποῦ).
OS PUS3048 2nd A. D.
μὴ μελέτω.
eo. ΤΠ ΟΔ 16 2nd A. Ὁ.
μὴ ἀγωνία.
Pooiies 20,309 Srd. Ao De
μὴ ἀγωνιᾶτε περὶ ἐμοῦ.
ΟΕ 1079.) 10 3rd A. D.
μὴ μετεωρίζου, καλῶς διάγομεν.
rh.) Gen. 51,12 c. 350 A. D.
μὴ λυπίσθω δὲ ἡ [ψυ]χή σου.
(Cp. Gospel of St. John 14, 1 and 27 μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ
καρδία.
AORIST IMPERATIVE IN PROHIBITIONS
This usage seems to belong to the late period; several examples
of the third and fourth centuries occur in very carelessly and
badly written letters.
*B. G. U. 822, 3—4 3rd A. D.
γινώσκιν σε θέλω, μὴ μελησάτω 'σοι περὶ τῶν σιτικῶν.
*P. B. M. 248, 8 c. 346 A. D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ auednolarle δοῦναι.
Use of Subjunctive and Optaiive Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 101
(This is the reading of the editor; but I should emend to
ἀμελήσ[ητ]ε. Yet it may be like the next ex.)
B. G. U. 1082, 9-10 4th A. D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀμελή σατε.
ΒΟ 099...) Byz.
μὴ ὀλιγωρήσατε δὲ.
5 Ἐ.236:4 5th-6th cent. A. Ὁ.
μὴ οὖν ἀμελήσατε.
P. Flor. 359, 7-8 6th A. D.
ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀμελήσατε.
PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE IN PROHIBITIONS
Occasionally we find the present subjunctive in prohibitions,
generally in papyri with many errors. The examples are from
private letters.
*O. P. 744 (= Witk. 58), 4 Year1B.c.
μὴ ἀγωνιᾶις. ᾿
ol Al Sues OWES Pale aes: ϑτα Α. Ὁ.
βλέπε δαὶ (= δὲ) μὴ ἁμαρίτ]άνῃς κ[αὶ eve] ἰδρεύσῃς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους.
PROHIBITORY SUBJUNCTIVE IN DIRECT QUOTATION
In the vivid style of letters, as in popular speech, the tendency
is to quote directly. The quotation may be introduced by
ὅτι, as so often in the New Testament.
τῷ P. 744 (= Witk. 58), 11-12 Y ty Be Οἱ
εἴρηκας — — — ὅτι μή με ἐπιλάθῃς.
*B. G. U. 1097, 9-10 1st A. Ὁ.
ἐμοῦ yap λεγούσης αὐτῷ μὴ otp<a>rtebon λέγει μοι ὅτι ὁ πατήρ ulolv
εἶπε μοι στρατεὐσα[σ]θία]ι.
OpyEct CLAUSES AFTER VERBS OF FEAR AND DANGER
The construction of μὴ with the subjunctive after verbs of
fear, danger, caution is very common; the occurrence of the
optative is almost negligible (for examples see Optative).
P. Magd. 9, 3 C22 2:85.
φοβουμένη μὴ συμπέσηι.
102 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P. Par. 30, 16-19 162 B. cc.
ἀξιῶ oe, ἐπὶ προορῶμαι μὴ προσχωρηθέντος σου els τοὺς ἄνω τόπους
οὐ λαμβάνω] σιν αἱ Δίδυμαι.
*P. Tebt. 43 118 B.C.
προ[ορ]ώμενοι μήποτε ------[π]αρε] ἰνοχληθῶμεν μηδὲὶ -- -- -- συκοφαντ-
θῶμεν. .
Β. 6. Uy 650, 11 60 A.D.
ὑφορῶμαι δὲ μή τίς μοι ἔνκλησις γέν[ηται].
Β. G. U. 242, 16-17 End 2nd A. D.
εὐλαβούμενός τε μὴ ὡς εἶπεν Kal ἔργῳ διαπράξηται.
P. Β. Μ. 964, 9-10 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
βλέπε μὴ ἐπιλάθῃ μηδὲν τοὺς στεφανούς.
(It is hard to know whether to place the examples of βλέπε
μὴ with the subjunctive here or under Prohibition. Further
examples may be found there. The same is true of ὅρα μὴ
with the subjunctive.)
P. S. I. 177, 8-10 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
μάθε δὲ ὅτι, ἐὰν ἀϊποθάνῃ] σοῦ μὴ ὄντος ὧδε, φεῦγ | ]
με εὑρήσῃ ἀπαγχομένην.
(The editor suggests φεῦγίε, ὅπως μή] and we should have
a clause of Effort. I am inclined to think the reading .was
φεῦγίε μή], and we have a clause of Fear. This is not
unlike the βλέπω examples.)
The verb of fear is often not expressed.
¥Pabare50s20 160 B. Cc.
συνεῖχον αὐτὴν καὶ Bae (sic) μήποτε φυγῇ.
Ο. P. 486, 35 131 A.D.
μὴ odjy τοῖς ὑπάρχουσί μου κἀγὼ λειμῷ συναπόλωμαι.
ΒΥ ΘΒ ΘΟ 5232. 24 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἔλεγον" ἄρον ταῦτα ἐκ τοῦ μ[ἐ]σίου], μὴ ὁ ἐξηγητὴς εἰσελθὼν ἐπ’
[ἀν]α[ γραφῆς αὐτὰ ποιήσῃ.
*B. 6. Ὁ. 1030, 3-5 3rd A. D.
ed[]é μοι εἰς ᾿Ιβίωνα [διὰ Ναρμούθεως, μήπως [ἀνταμφοδήσῃς ἡμεῖν.
P. Rein, 56, 14-18 4th A. ἢ.
οὐ θέϊλομεν yap ἄχυρον, μήϊπως μὴ λημφθῇ καὶ ἀναγκασθῶμεν [τὴν
τιμὴν διαγράψαι.
Ο. P. 1834, 5 5th-6th cent. A. Ὁ.
μὴ συλλάβῃ αὐτὸ <tr> ὕδωρ.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Ῥαῤγτὲ 103
(Such an expression is almost equivalent to a negative
purpose.)
Be Bote 1337 12208: 709 A. Ὁ.
ἐκτέλεσον τὴν διὰ γραμμάτων ἡμῶν ἐπιτροπὴν μὴ λήθῃ παραπέμπον
(= παραπέμπων)τι ἐκ τούτων ἀλλ᾽ ἐμπόνως [ἀϊποτελῶν.
Two examples (both from letters) show the indicative; the
object of fear is conceived of as fact. Some interesting New
Testament parallels are quoted in Burton, §227.
Pebares9 131-52 c. 160 B. Cc.
ἀγωνιῶ, [μή ποτε ἀρ[ρ]ωστεῖ τὸ παιδάριον, [καὶ οὐκ ἔχω σχολὴν ἀνα-
βῆναι πρὸς ὑμᾶς.
Β. G. U. 1141, 34-35 ς. 14 Β. .
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν δὲ τὸν θυλωρὸν (= θυρωρὸν) ἐξερωτῶι μή τις ἔξω ὕπνωκε.
I quote below two passages from a papyrus whose date is not
indicated in any way by the editors. I should suppose from the
language and style that it belongs to the late Roman or early
Byzantine Period. |
*P, Prk. 4650, 13-14
εὐλαβήθητι μήπως μὴ καταλάβουσίν σε ἐν] [᾿ ΑἸλεξανδρείᾳ.
(This is for καταλάβωσιν ; nore the opposice error οἱ δῶναι for
δοῦναι in line 21.)
Ib. 21-22
οὐκ ἐδό[κει οἴ]καδε δῶναι αὐτῷ τὸ κιθώνιον καὶ τὰ ἄλλα, μήπως ἀνῆλθας"
ἔλεγεν yap. (The reading is not quite certain; the interpreta-
tion not at all.)
OpjEect CLAUSES AFTER VERBS OF EXHORTING
In the papyri ὅπως, or ἵνα, with the subjunctive is used after
verbs of exhorting, commanding, entreating and persuading.
The same construction is common after γράφω, evidently
meaning give a command in writing. Verbs of praying also take
this construction. κελεύω and the compounds of τάσσω take
this construction too. θέλω ἵνα with subjunctive is to be
included; also εἶπον (= command). The infinitive may be used
after these verbs.”
% For a comparison of N. T. usage, cp. Burton §§200—203.
104 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
εὔχομαι
This verb is common from the second century A. D. on.
B. G. U. 1081, 3-4 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἐχάρην ἵνα σε ἀσπάζομαι καὶ εὔχομαι τοῖς θεοῖς ὑπὲρ] σοῦ, ἵνα σὲ
διαφυλά[ξ]ωσι.
P. Ἐν]. 244, 3-5 3rd A. D.
πρὸ μὲν πάντων εὔχομαι θεοῖς πᾶσιν [ὅϊπως ὑγιαίνοντας ὑμᾶς ἀπο[λ]άβω.
(This phrase, or a variation of it, is characteristic of letters).
*P. Lips. 110, 6-8 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
εὐχόμενος ὅπως ὁλοκληροῦσάν σε Kai ὑγιαίνουσαν ἀπολάβω.
*P. B. M. 405, 3-5 c. 346 A. D.
εὔχομε τῇ Bia προνοίᾳ ὅπως εὐθυμοῦντί σοι ἀποδοθῆνξ σοι τὰ Tap’
ἐμοῦ γράμματα. '
(In this badly spelled letter we have a mixture of two
constructions.)
*P. B. M. 413, 3-4 c. 346 A.D.
εἰὔχομ]αι o [Ἰὼ τῷ θεῷ περὶ [τῆ]ς σ[ωτ]ηρίας ἵνα ῥύσει σαι, and line 8
εὔχ[οϊμαι αὐτῷ ἵνα ἀνταποδώσει.
(It would be hard to say in the case of this letter of an
ignorant man whether we have here simply confusions in
spelling, or whether we have also a confusion between future
indicative and aorist subjunctive—a confusion which is
common enough in the later period.)
*P. B. M. 244, 3-5 c. 346 A. Ὁ.
εὔχομε τὸν παντοκράτορα θεόν [δ] πως] ὑγιένοντί σαι μετὰ [τ]οῦ
Kou (= οἴκου) ἀπολάβῃς τὰ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ γράμματα.
(In this letter of an ignorant person, as the editor points
out, the writer has confused two constructions, ὅπως ὑγιαίν-
οντί σοι... ἀποδοθῇ and ὅπως ὑγιαίνων... ἀπολάβῃ).
*P. Gen. 53, 5-8 c. 350 A. D.
εὔχομαι -- — — ὅπως — — — προσδέξῃ.
*O. P. 1874, 14-15 6th cent. A. D.
ἀλλὰ εὖξε ἕνα ὁ κύριος aration αὐτοῖς καὶ καταξιώσι ὑμᾶς ἔδιν.
ἀξιῶ
We find ἀξιῶ from Ptolemaic times until the Byzantine period.
It is particularly to be found in requests and petitions.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Ραῤγγὲ 105
Pe Dam is 162 B.C.
ἠξίωσά σε ὅπως ἀποδ[ο]θῇ.
P. Tebt. 40, 13-14 1 5 ς-:
ἀξιῶ συντάξαι γράψαι.
(Here we note the infinitive; but see P. Tebt. 39, 34 for the
same verb with iva and the subjunctive.)
eR sS87,:1 lik. 202 A.D.
ὅθεν ἐϊπιϊδίδωμι καὶ ἀ[ξιῶ] τὸ δόξ[ α]ν σοι κελεύσῃς γενέσθαι.
(Either ἵνα is omitted; or κελεύσῃς is an independent sub-
junctive of command or request; see this subject.)
B. G. U. 159, 10-11 216 A. D.
2 , ‘ ᾽ ca) J a“ ὃ A > ‘ ‘ \ Ὁ ,
ἐπιδίδωμει καὶ ἀξιῶ ἀκοῦσαί μου πρὸς αὐτοὺς καὶ τὸ δοκοῦν σοι κελεύσῃς
γενέσθαι.
*P. Gen. 51, 30 é.4350:47 D:
ἠξίωσεν δὲ εἵνα ἔλθῃ.
Palins 40, Cor ll 12 4th-5th cent. A. D.
ἠξιώθη Kal ὁ λογιστὴς ἵνα ταῦτα εἴπῃ.
(Judicial Hearing.)
δέομαι
δέομαι is found from Ptolemaic to Byzantine times. My
examples are from the later period; but see the examples of ἀξιῶ
and δέομαι in combination.
P39, 6 Tile sc:
δέομαι οὖν σου γράψαι Pavia ἀφεῖναι.
Example of the infinitive, preferred by this verb in Ptolemaic
times.)
P. Giess. 25, 7 Roman Period
δεόμενος αὐτοῦ ὅπως πέρας ἐπιθῆι τῷ πράγματι.
ΡΠ ρὲ; 315.»6Ξ7 2nd A. D.
ὅπως μοιΐ [πέμψῃς] ὅσου [élav ἢ.
(Dependent on ἐδεόμην which precedes.)
OVRS1762,.10-12 2nd-3rd cent. A. Ὁ.
διὰ τοῦτο οὖν σοῦ δεόμεθα [ἵϊνα αὐτῷ περὶ τούτων συμβουἰλε]ύσῃς.
ἀξιῶ AND δέομαι IN COMBINATION
In Ptolemaic times we find sentences in which one of these
verbs is dependent upon the other, as:
106 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
B. G. U. 1006, 3 ff. ἀξιῶ οὖν σε δεόμενος Ὑράψαι Ὥρωι — -- --
ἐξαγαγεῖν (III B. C.) and Ρ. 8. I. 419, 1 δεόμεθά σου ἀξιῶσαι Φιλίσκον
ἵνα -- -- -- διακριθῶμεν (III Β. C.) But the phrase ἀξιῶ καὶ δέομαι
ὅπως + subjunctive occurs much later; all the instances I have
found belong to the fourth century A. D.
*P. Thead. 23 (= P. Cair. 10892), 12-13 342 A. D.
ἀξιῶ καὶ δέομαί σου τῆς ἰφ]ιλανθρωπίας ὅπως τοῦτον συνλαβώμενος
κα[τα]ναγκάσῃς.
These letters in which this phrase occurs are very similar,
and indeed all belong to the same group of correspondence.
But it is worth noting one variant, which follows.
ἘΡ, Β. Μ. 240, 14 ff. 346 A.D.
ἀξιῶ καὶ δέωμαί cov τῆς φιλανθρωπίας, κύριε, τούτους συνλαβέσθαι
καὶ παραπέμψαι.
παρακαλῶ
We find examples οἵ παρακαλῶ from the late Ptolemaic period
to the seventh century A. D. It is found commonly in letters.
P. Leid. K (= Witk. 53), 9 ς. 99 BoC?
παρακαλῶ δὲ καὶ αὐτὸς τοὺς θεοὺς, ὅπως δῶσιν αὐτοῖς χάριν.
P. Ryl. 229, 17-19 38 A.D.
παρακάλεσον οὖν τὴν γυναῖκά σου τοῖς ἐμοῖς λόγοις ἵνα ἐπιμελῆται
τῶν χοιριδίων.
*P. Giess. 85 2nd A. D.
παρακαλῶ dé ce[...].. εἰν τῷ ἐπιτρόπῳ ἵνα μοι παρέξσῃ τὰ ἐπιτήδια
τῇ σχολῇ.
(Some word like γράφειν or κελεύειν is to be supplied in the
lacuna.)
SORE By aot: 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
σὲ παρακέκληκα ὅπως ἀπαρτισθῇ τὸ ἐν τῇ βιβλιοθήκῃ μετεωρίδιν.
PBs Mi232%i1 c. 346 Α. D.
παρακαλέσαι σε ἔσπευσα ὅπως συνχωρήσῃς.
Ρ, ΚΕ. 129, 13 Ε΄. ᾿ 497 A. D.
διὸ παρακαλῶ τὴν σὴν παίδευσιν κελεῦσαι.
B. G. U. 954, 7-8 Probably 6th A. ἢ.
αἰτῶν καὶ παρακαλῶν, ὅπως διώξῃς am’ ἐμοῦ τοῦ δούλου σου τὸν
δαίμονα προβασκανίας.
(Christian Amulet.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 107
P. land. 24 6th-7th cent. A. D.
παρακαλῶ σε οὖν, ἵνα ἡ σὴΪ [γνησία ἀδελφότης Ὑράψῃ αὐτῷ, ἵνα
δώσῃ μοι αὐτώ.
©. P..1865 (= Ρ Cair. 10130) 6th-7th cent. A. D.
παρακ[αἸλ[ὦ] τὴν σὴν λαμπρὰν ἀδελφότητα Yypayy μοι περὶ τούτου.
(The ἵνα is omitted; or γράψῃ is to be regarded as independ-
ent command.)
COMBINATIONS: εὔχομαι, δέομαι, παρακαλῶ
These belong to the later period, Byzantine Age.
P. Thead. 18 (= P. Cair. 10887), 16-17 3rd-4th cent. A. Ὁ.
δαιομένη καὶ παρακαλοῦσα ὅπως [κελεύσῃς 1.
*P. Β. Μ. 410, 15-16 c. 346 A. D.
ἀξιῶ σε καὶ παρακαλῶ σε κύριε ἵνα συνχωρήσῃς.
*P. Β. Μ. 1244, 6-7 4th A.D.
εὐχόμενος καὶ παρακαλῶν τὸν θεὸν ἵνα cat ἀπολάβω εὐθυμοῦντα.
ἘΡ, Grenf. I, 61, 7-12 6th A. ἢ.
πρὸ μὲν πάντων εὐχὰς καὶ δεήσις ἀναπέμπω πρὸς [τὸν θεόν μου καὶ
σωτῆραν ἡμῶν τὸν] [Xpliordv ὅπως ὑγιένοντας ὑμᾶς καὶ [εὐθυμοῦντάς
μοι συνήθως διατηρήσιν.
(Grenfell says “‘read διατηρήσειν. ὅπως in line 10 is super-
fluous.”’ I think the writer, who was probably a slave,
intended to write ὅπως with the subjunctive.)
θέλω
This is very unusual. I can give two examples, from letters.
*O. P. 1770, 8-10 Late 3rd A. D.
θέλω γὰρ ὅ] πως καθ᾽ ἑκάστην [ἡμέραν] ὑμεῖν ypagu.
P. R. 234, 4 7th cent. A. D.
λοιπὸν ἐὰν θέλεις ἵνα ἀγοράσω.
αἰτέω AND ἐρωτάω
Examples of these verbs come from papyri dating from the
beginning of the Christian era onwards. For épwraw = alréw,
it will be interesting to compare N. T. usage. This is a specimen
of the popular language. My examples come from letters, with
one exception.
108 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
*O. P. 744 (= Witk. 58), 13-14 Year 1B.C.
ἐρωτῶ σε οὖν, ἵνα μὴ ἀγωνιάσηις.
*P. Tebt. 409, 4 ff. ΘΈΛ ΤΣ
σὲ ἠρώτησα δοὺς σοι (δραχμὰς) ιβ ὅπως Λυσιμάχῳ dots καὶ ἐρωτήσῃς
αὐτὸν οἱπὲρ [= ὑπὲρ] ἐμοῦ ὅπως -- -- -- πέπψηι.
ἘΒ. 6. ὕ-. 811, 5-6 c. 100 A.D.
ἐρωτῶ σε ἵνα δῦς τῷ] κομίζοντί σοι τὸ ἐπιστόλιον.
*P, Fay. 113, 6-} 100 A. D.
ἐρώτησέ με εἵνα ἐφίδῃ τὸν [ἐϊλαιῶνα αὐτοῦ.
OF Pelosi 258 A. D.
ἐρωτῶ, κύριε, δοῦναι μοι
(Observe the infinitive instead οἵ ἵνα + subjunctive. The
Latin original, of which this is a translation, has: rogo
domine des mihi. The letters of δοῦναι are not perfectly
clear.)
*P. Gen, 15 C. 30 Aes
καὶ aire? ἵΐνα τ]αῦτα θρέψῃς.
P. Β. Μ. 1788, 1-2 6th A. D.
ἦλθεν πρὸς ἐμὲ ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἔχουσα τὸΪ [ ? ovloa μοι ἵνα λάβω αὐτό.
(The lacuna, as the editor suggests, may be filled thus: [κέρμα,
ἀιτοῦ]σα).
ἐντυγχάνω
We find ἐντυγχάνω used occasionally, both early and late.
It is not surprising to find this used of a request or petition.
Compare ἔντευξις.
P.S. I. 486, 3-5 258 B.C.
ἐνέτ[υϊχον ἡμῖν of γεωργοὶ of [ἐϊκ Tatz[d]ow, ἵνα τὰ χώματα τὰ ἐν
the] γῆι αὐτῶν χωννύηται. '
ῬΎΜΗΙ: c. ΤΟ ΟΣ
ἐνέτυχον σοι ---- -- ὅπως φέρηται.
PORYE Slit. c. 104 4. Ὁ.
Ud 2 f ev id e la Ὁ ,
κωϊμογραμματέα ἐντετευϊἰχότα alo ἵνα πλείονα ὑδάτια τοῖς πεδίοις
[τῆς κώμης ἐπιχαλασθῇ.
P. Prk. 4224, 24-25 2nd A. ἢ.
καὶ τὰ νῦν πάλιν ἐντυχόντος μοι τοῦ ’A. ὅπως ἐξῇ αὐτοῖς ἀναθεῖναι
δέλτον.
(See also line 18:)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 109
PPaori. 830, 14 ff. 4th-5th cent. A. Ὁ.
eytu<y >xavw yap αὐτῷ ὅτι ἐδέχεται ἡμᾶς μικροὺς ὄντας.
(I agree with the editor that ὅπως δέχηται was intended.)
OTHER EXPRESSIONS OF PRAYER
ΟΡ. tay oi Π| 4th A. Ὁ.
τὸ προσκὐνημά gov ποιῶ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν παρὰ τῷ δεσπότῃ θεῷ
ὅπως ὁλόκληρόν σε ἀπολάβω.
(P. 5.1. 825, of nearly the same period, is very similar.)
B. G. U. 954 Probably 6th A. D.
‘Ayre Σερῆνε, πρόσπεσε ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ, ἵνα τελείως ὑγιανῶ.
(Christian amulet)
Two Uncertain Cases, because of the Text.
*P. Amh. 79, 46 ff. c. 186 A. D.
προσφεύγί 1... Jaoxw λιπαροῦντες αὐτὸν ὅπως repp|..J|[...]
τὴν ἀπαίτησιν τὴν κελευσθῖσαν γείνεσθαι ὑ [π᾿ αὐ]τοῦ.
(This looks like a clear case of ὅπως + subjunctive after λιπ-
αροῦντες)
Ὦ. Ρ. 1161, 4-6 4th A. D.
ὅπως οὗτοιϊπάντες β]ο]ηθήσωσιν ἡμῶν τῷ σώματι, τῇ ψυχῇ, τῷ
πνεύματι.
(In this Christian letter what precedes is fragmentary; but
there must have been an expression of prayer.)
Ὑράφω
γράφω followed by ὅπως + subjunctive or ἵνα + subjunctive
is exceedingly common. This use of ypagw, to direct in writing,
is of course characteristic of letters. The expression is found
from the earliest time to the latest. ὅπως and ἵνα are found at
all times except the later Byzantine, when iva alone is used.
wa has been forcing out πως. In the earlier Ptolemaic
examples ὅπως ἄν is sometimes found.
Pee aiei2, 31-39 269 or 231 B.C.
γέγραφα δὲ καὶ αὐτοῖς ὅπως μεταδῶσίν σοι.
ἘΦΕΙ 20..93:6 261 B.C.
γεγράφαμεν Κρίτωνι καὶ Καλλικλεῖ ἵνα γένηται ws ἐπέσταλκας.
110 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
P. Hib. 49, 6-8 ch 25 7/BSc.
e[{xlov δὲ αὐτῶι καθάπερ ἔγραψα [αὐτῶι ὅπως ἂν ἐμβάληται τὰς
ἐλαίας εἰς βίκους ἢ εἰς μώια.
Ρ. 5.1. 433,1-2 ΠΠΊΡΗ ΟΣ
ἔγραψας μοι τὰ σκόρδα τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς πέτρας ἀρεστά σοι εἶναι, [εἰ δὲ
καὶ τὰ παρ᾽ ἐμοί ἐστι τοιαῦτα, ἵνα ὑπάρχηι εἰς τὰς ἀποστολάς.
P.S. I. 538, 4-5 III B.c.
δεόμαθα οὖν σου γράψαι Zwirar ὅπως ἂν ods ἂν προσαγάγωμεν τούτους
καταχωρίζειν. (Evidently for καταχωρίζῃ).
*P. Tebt. 34: ¢: 100 B. ΟΣ
γράφω σοι δὲ διαστολὰς αὐτοῖς δοῦναι.
(Observe in this example the infinitive after γράφω; for
this is also found.)
P. Ryl. 229 38 A.D.
ἔγραψα ἐπιστολὴν πρὸς “Hpaxdn(ov) -- -- -- ἵνα dot σοι ὄνον.
P. Ryl. 148, 24 ff. 40 A.D.
διὸ ἀξιῶι γράψαι τῶι τῆς κὠμη(ς) ἀρχεφόδωι ὅπως τὴν ὑπὲρ τούτων
ἀναζήτησιν ποιήσηταικαὶ ἐκπέμψῃ σοι τοὺς αἰτίους.
(We may compare 147, 231. ἀξιῶ γράψαι ἀχθῆναι; and 146, end,
ἀξιῶ γράψαι ἀναζητῆσαι).
*B. Gio, 249 ΠῚ c. 80 A. D.
καὶ δι’ érlépas ἐπι]στολῆς ἔγραψά σοι, iva δύο ἀρτάβαι σει[ταρίου)
ἰδισθῶσί μοι. :
*PHay oli 7010 108 A. D.
διὸ ypago ov eivla.] .[ . |ns.
(Probably λάβῃς is the word needed, in view of what
follows.)
O. P. 899, 42 200 A. D.
γραφῆναι τῷ viv στ[ρ]ατηγῷ τοῦ νόμου ὅπως ἐπαναγκάσῃ.
*P, Tebt. 423, 16-17 Early 3rd A. D.
ἔγραψά σοι οὖν [ὅϊπων (sic) πέμψῃς.
Meyer, Ostr. 67 (Ρ. 8. B.) 3rd A. D.
γράφομέν σοι περὶ Πλήνι[ο5] Βησάμμωνος, ὅπως μὴ ἐνοχλήσῃς αὐτῷ
πρὸς τὸν μῆνα τοῦτον.
P. Flor. 127, 16-17 3rd A. D.
ἀπέστειλα δέ σοι Ὑράμματα πρὸς ’Qpeiwva ἵνα σοι ἀποστείλῃ χόρτου
δεσμὰς πεντακοσίας.
(Observe the variant οἵ γράφω).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 111
*P. B. M. 409, 9-11 c. 346 A.D.
ἔπιτα Ὑράφω τῇ σῇ χρηστότητι ὅπως σπουδάσῃς Kal συμβουλεύσῃς.
P. 5.1. 825, 19-20 4th-5th cent. A. D.
ἡθατρῆ <s > ἠξίωσεν μὲν ὅτι γράψον αὐτῷ εἵνα r<a>pé [[ρ]σχῃς αὐτῷ.
O. P. 1855 (= P. Cair. 10137), 13-14 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἔγράφη μοι yap mapa τῶν σὺν ὑμῖν, δέσπο[τά] μου, ἵνα ἐμοῦ πάσχοντος
ἀπόκρισιν εἰς Πινῦριν ἀπἰ ο]δὠ[σ]ωμε().
P. Β. Μ. 1075, 16-17 7thieAS Ds
ὀφείλατε γράψαι τῷ αὐτῷ ὑμῶν] γεωργῷ ᾿Ιωσηφίῳ iva μὴ τοῦ λοιποί]
παρεξέλθῃ τοῦ σκοποῦ ὑμῶν.
The next two examples are very peculiar and unusual. A
construction common enough under other circumstances has
usurped the place of ὅπως, or ἵνα, + subjunctive, after γράφω.
Both are in careless letters.
*O. P. 1068, 9-11 OrueAe Dy
of ἐνέγκαντες αὐτὸ ἔλαβαν καὶ γὙρ(ά)μματα ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ Κληματίου
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ μηδὶς ἐνοχλήσι αὐτῷ κατὰ τόπον.
ΝΟΤΕ---ἐφ᾽ ᾧ with future indicative or with the infinitive is a common construc-
tion; but twice in a carefully written document of the end of the first century
A. D. ἐφ᾽ ᾧ with the subjunctive occurs.
P. Flor. 101, 6 End 1st A. D.
ἐφ᾽ @ ἀναλέξῃς.
Ib. 8-9
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ -- -- — στήσωμεν.
*B. 6. U. 874, 1-2 Byz.
ἄλλοτε γεγράφηκα ὑμῖν ὥστε πέμψηται εἰς Ναρμοῦθιν καὶ δέξηται
τὰ δύο χρύσινα παρὰ τοῦ διάκονος.
(= πέμψητε and δέξησθε.)
ἐντέλλομαι
ἐντέλλομαι is occasionally found in the Christian era.
P. Ryl. 229 38 A. Ὁ.
Ὠρφελίωνι ἐνετειλάμην iva καὶ αὐτὸς dot ἑτέραν καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους μοι
πέμψηι.
ἘΡΈΤερι. 423, 10 f. Early 3rd A. D.
ἐνετιλάμηϊν] σοι — — — γενέσθαι.
112 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Rein. 55 3rd A. D.
ἐνετειλάμην σοι καὶ δι᾽ ἐπιστολῆς ἄλλης ἵνα, -- -- -- , γέμισον αὐτὸν
οἴνου.
(Observe the imperative of direct command substituted for
the dependent subjunctive.)
*P. B.-M. 233, 4 ff. 345 A. D.
ἐντέλλομαί σοι καὶ ἐπιτρέπω κατὰ τήνδε THY ἐντολὴν ὅπως ἐπιστολὴν
-- - - ἐνέγκῃς.
ΤΟΙ 75.7.8 4th A. D.
ἐντολήν μοι παρέδωκας ἐν.κλ. [ . ] λάβω els ᾿Αλεξάνδριαν.
(The editor’s note is as follows: “Αἴ the end of line 7 a
conjunction like ὅπως or ἵνα is expected. εἵνα for ἵνα can
certainly not be read after παρέδωκας, and ἕνεκα οὗ is
hardly satisfactory.” If eiva cannot be read, I suggest
ἕνα as an error for ἵνα in a papyrus which is not free from
errors.)
COMPOUNDS OF τάττω
Compounds of τάττω, mainly συντάττω, occur principally
in the Ptolemaic period; very few instances are from a later
time.
P. S. I. 508, 7-8 256 B.C.
π[ροϊστάξει (= προστάξεις) ὅπως ὁ οἶνος {cou} ἀφεθῆι.
ΡΟΝ 65 .17.η: 2515 οἱ
σύνταξον τε (= δὲ) καὶ τὰ κείμενα ὅπως γίνηται καὶ τὸ 8.... ον ὅπως
ἀποστείλῃς καὶ μὴ κατακωλυθησόμεθα (sic).
*P.S. 1. 611, 2-4 Lila yes
τὰ πυρίδια ἃ συνέταξας τῶι παιδὶ ὅπως ἂν δῶι, οὐκ ἀποδέδοκέ μοι.
(Compare lines 5-6 εἰ 0o<8>v σοι δοκεῖ, σύντασον (= σύνταξον)
δοῦναί μοι ὅπως ἂν ἔχω.)
ΒΑΘ 515: ὁ ΤΙ ΡΟΣ
σύνταξον ὅπως ἂν ἔμμηνον ἀποδιδῶται ἡμῖν ἐπιμελῶς.
P. Eleph. 19 223 B.C.
ἐπιτάξαι αὐτῶι ὅπως πλεῖον γίνηται τῶι βασιλεῖ.
Ο. P. 533, 17-18 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
Kaas ovveragtacbe μοι δοῦναι κεράμια οἴνου καὶ iva τηρήσωσι αὐτῶν
τὴν δεξιάν.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 113
PES; 4598 6th A.D.
καταξιώσίϊῃ 27 11.} συντάξασθαι τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἵνα καταξιώσῃ συνευ-
ρεθῆναι.
The two following examples are not perfectly clear.
P. Amh. 68, 15-16 Late ist A. D.
τὸ ἀντί[γρ]αφον ὑμεῖν [ὑποτέτακται ὅπως οὖν τὸ ἀκόλουθον τούτῳ
γίνηται ὡς καθήκει.
(If οὖν is right we have an independent command. But if
οὖν is not right, we have acommand implied after ὑποτέτακται.
Compare the next example.)
P. Fay. 106, 20-21 c. 140 A. D.
ὑποτάξα[ι ὅπως] τέλεον ἀπολύονται.
(The editor suggests ἀπολύωνται ; but is inclined to interpret:
“‘to subjoin instructions how.’’)
The following gives us a very clear instance of the use of
ὑποτάττω followed by ὅπως with the subjunctive. It is hard to
decide whether we should. classify this as an object clause or
whether we should call it purpose, with a command implied; the
latter seems reasonable.
ΟΡ 2377 Coll; 34 186 A. Ὁ.
ὑποταχθῆναι ἐκέλευσα ὅπως φροντίσῃς.
Ib. Col. VI, 16
ἔγραψεν — — — ὑποτάξας ἀντίγραφα ὅπως — — — φροντίσῃ.
(These examples are from the Petition of Dionysia.)
ἐπιστέλλω
Examples are found in the earlier Ptolemaic period and in the
second, third, and fourth centuries of the Christian era.
P. S. I. 438, 10 ff. Tihs Cc:
περὶ δὲ τῆς λείας κεκόμισμαι παρὰ Φανίου ἐπιστολὴν ὅπως κομισώμεθα
τὴν λείαν.
ῬΕΘ955;,132 25... 8: Οἱ
ἐπισϑ]τέλλων [ πα]ρακομίζηται.
B. G. ΟΣ Ο ΘΙ IV; 2-10 2nd A. D.
ἐπ[ε]σίτ]ειλα δὲ [καὶ τ]οῖς τῶν ἐνκτήσεωϊν] βιβλιοφύλαξι —— — ὅπως ------
δηλώσωσι, ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ [τ]ῷ κέ[σ]τω[ι], ἵνα -- -- -- μεταδῷ μοι
114 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Liierary Papyri
PeRyki77, 51 192 A.D.
ἐπιστέλλεταί σοι ὅπως ἀκόλουθα τοῖς ἐπὶ σοῦ γενομένοις προνοησαι
πρᾶξαι.
(Probably for προνοήσῃ in a papyrus which has some errors-
The editor interprets this as purpose. It is hard in such a
case to decide between purpose and an object clause after a
verb meaning command.)
O. P. 899, 47 200 A. D.
[alia ἐπιστεῖλαί σε -- — — brw[s} — — — ποιήσωνται.
PoPiogesoo°bs 21 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἔπεσταλ ὅπως ypay τῷ | (Probably ἐπέσταλκα ὅπως γραφῇ.
This document is fragmentary.)
O. P. 1662, 15-17 246 A. D.
ἐπιστέλλω σοι, φίλτατε, ὅπως φανερὸν ποιήσῃς Αὐρηλίῳ ᾿Ισιδώρῳ.
A eg ΕἸοσ. 176 3rd A. D.
καὶ πρὸ ἡμερῶν ἐπέστειλα ἵνα ἀρτίδια καλὰ ποιήσηται Kal ἀναπέμ-
ψηται ἡμεῖν.
P. Flor. 118, 1-3 3rd A. oe
ἐπέστειλα ὅπως χόρτου μοι ἡμιξήρου φροντίδα ποιήσασθαι.
(Perhaps for ποιήσησθε; editor thinks ποιήσητε Was in-
tended. There may be a confusion of constructions.)
ORL 502 Ὁ .:ῃ: 338 A. D.
ἵνα τοῦ ἔργου [ἀ]ντιλάβῃ καὶ διὰ ταχέων ταῦτα ἐκκόψας παρενεχθῆναι
ποιήσῃς — — — ἐπιστέλλῃ ἀδελφέ.
ἀποστέλλω
Occasionally we find ἀποστέλλω ὅπως, or ἵνα, with the sub-
junctive. This would seem to be in reality a clause of purpose.
But a direction or command is implied; the word almost means
send with orders. In one instance we find it joined with ἐπιστέλλω,
and in another we have the phrase ἀποστέλλω γράμματα (see P.
Flor. 127 under γράφω).
Pes Ais3300) 5 tte 252.Ὲ ΟἹ
γράφεις ἡμεῖν ἀπεσταλκέναι ᾿Ιάσονα καὶ Ἡρόδοτον ἵνα κο[μ]ίσωνται
τὸν προσοφειλόμενόν σοι σῖτον ἐν ᾽᾿Αρσινόηι.
P. Tebt. 8, 21--.23 (Probably) c. 201 B. c.
[ἀἸπόσ(τειλον) -- — — [d]s ἀντι[τεθ]ῆι πρὸς τὸ ἀφεύρεμα.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 115
(If ὡς is the correct emendation it is noteworthy, especially
as we find ὅπως in the same papyrus after ἀπόστειλον in
line 11.)
P. Flor. 367, 6-8 ὍΤΟΥ ἢ:
καὶ γὰρ καὶ πολλάκις μου ἐπιστείλαντός σοι καὶ χάρτας ἐπιστολικο[ὺς
ἀπο]στείλαντος, ἵν᾽ εὐπορῇς τοῦ γράϊφειν] μοι.
P. B. M. 1384, 27 ff. LLDLCR AAD:
ἀπόστίειλον πρὸς ἡμᾶς] [ἐπιτρέπων τῷ στελλωμένῳ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ J |
ὅπως ------ἰ[ Ἰ] κομίσηται.
OTHER EXPRESSIONS OF COMMAND, INCLUDING
εἶπον, κελεύω, AND μιμνήσκω
P. Hib. 49, 11-13 ΟΕ ΒΊΟΣ
ὑπόμνησον ὅπως ἂν λάβηι τὰς ἐλαίας τὰς καλὰς καθάπερ αὐτῶι ἔγραψα.
P. Lille 7, Col. II TiTsser
εἶπεν τῶι δεσμοφύ(λακι) δι᾽ ἣν αἰτίαν συνέσχημαι, καὶ iva, ἂν ᾿Απολ-
, ; ? “
λώνιος συντάξηι, ἀφῆι με.
P. Lille 8 III B.c.
καλῶς οὖν monfoeles μνησθεὶς Θεοδώρωι ἵνα προστάξηι [αὐτὸν]
ἀποδοῦναι.
*O. P. 1479, 9 Late Ist A. D.
Φιλομούσῳ [εἸἰρήκαμεν ἵνα ἐξέλθηι πρὸς σέ.
P. Ryl. 81, 9-11 c. 1044. D.
διὰ σοῦ αὐτοῖς παρανγείλας ἵν᾽ ὅσου ἐὰν χρείαν ἔχωσι ὕδατους (= ὕδα-
τος) ἑαυϊτοῖς ἐϊπιχαλῶσι.
*B. G. U. 843, 11-12 1st-2nd cent. A. D.
ἴρηκα τῷ υ[ἱῷ] σου, εἵνα σοι πεμψ (sic) (= πέμψῃ) κιθών[ιο]ν.
*P. Tebt. 315, 29-31 2nd A. ἢ.
ἔχι yap συστατικὰς [ὅϊπως τὸν ἀπιθοῦντα μετὰ φρουρᾶς TH ἀρχιερῖ
πέμπιν.
*P, Tebt. 303, 13-15 c. 180 A. D.
ἀξιοῦμεν δι᾿ ἑνὸς τῶν περὶ σὲ ὑπηρετῶν παραγγεῖλα[ι] αὐτῷ ὅπως
παρατύχῃ.
P. Thead. 15 (= P. Cair. 10884), 15-16 280 A. D.
καὶ διὰ τοῦτο Kal νῦν μαρτυρόμεθα ὅπως ἤδη ποτὲ κε[[λε]]λεύσῃς αὐτὸν
ἀχθῆναι καὶ ἀποδοῦναι τοῖς παιδίοις ἃ ἥρπασεν.
ΣΡ 625. 8:9 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ἐδήλωσα Aovyeivw εἵνα ἑτυμ[ἀσ]ῃ πάντα.
116 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Flor. 230 3rd A. D.
ἔπεμψα φάσιν πρὸς [oe] iva κἄλλο ν[Ὁ]ν μοι πέμψῃς.
Ο. Ρ. 937, 8 ff. 3rd A. D.
παραγγέλλω σοι ---- — ἵνα παραβάλῃς — — — καὶ μάθῃς — — — καὶ wapay-
γείλῃς.
ΧΟΥΡΕΊΩΙ 3rd A. D.
καθὼς εἶπά σοι περεὶ τῶν δύο ἀκάνθων εἵνα δώσωσιν ἡμῖν αὐτά, ἤδη
ἐν τῇ σήμερον περειορυγήτωσαν.
SPAR wi ΔΟΟΣ ΤΊ ΠῚ c. 346 A. D.
συμβουλεύσῃς τῷ πραιποσίτῳ Kal τῷ πρίγκεπι καὶ axrovapiw καὶ
τοῖς λοιποῖς ὑπευθύνοις παράσχωσι τῷ ἰδίῳ ῥογάτῳ τὰς τοῦ λαχα-
νοσπέρμου τοῦ ὀρφανοῦ ἀρτάβας δέκα.
(The editor suggests that ὅπως must be supplied before
παράσχωσι.)
SPS Rl SO 23 4th-5th cent. A. D.
καὶ ἄλλοτέ σοι ἐδήλωσα ἵνα παρασκευάσῃς τοὺς σκυτέας TOD ᾿Αμμω-
νίου παρασχεῖν.
SORE 1071, 6 Sth A. D.
ἐὰν πάλιν κελεύεις ἵνα πέμψουσιν τὸν σῖτον els τὴν ᾿Ιβίονος, πάλιν
γράψον αὐτοῖς.
(We find this apparent future indicative in the same con-
struction again in lines 5 and 6.)
P. Grenf. II, 92 6-7 6th-7th cent. A. D.
κελεύειν δὲ Kai περὶ τῶν δοκούντων ὅπως καὶ ἡμεῖς εὕρωμεν μετὰ
παρρησίας ὀχλῆσαι ὑμῖν περὶ ὧν χρεία.
ΡΟΈ 2354: 7th A. D.
ἰδ[οὺ ἐκέϊλευσές μοίι] -- — — ἵνα ἀγοράσω.
P. Β. Μ. 1335, 8-10 709 A. D.
ἐντάγια ποιϊήσαντε:] -- — — ἐπέμψαμέν σοι ἐνθέμενοι] εἰς αὐτὰ ἵνα
ἐὰν στενωθῶσιν οἱ τῶν χωρίων δοῦναι] τὸν σῖτον καὶ δώσωσιν
ἀπαργυρισμὸν δώσ[ουσιν)
ΟΒΙΕΟΥ CLAUSES AFTER VERBS OF EFFORT
In the papyri, ὅπως, or ἵνα, with the subjunctive is used
after verbs meaning strive for, take care, plan, effect. The infini-
tive is often used after these verbs.4 We find these expressions
3: For N. T. usage, cp. Burton, §$205-210.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 117
particularly in letters; the main verb is often in the imperative
mood or some other form implying a command.
φρόντισον
There are many instances of φρόντισον followed by ὅπως, or
ἵνα, with the subjunctive dating from the Ptolemaic period.
The construction seems very unusual, if it occurs at all, after
that period. ὅπως is far more common than ἵνα. Occasionally
we find ὅπως ἄν; and ina few of the later examples ὡς with
the future indicative. The infinitive may also be used after
φρόντισον.
P. Hib. 43 261 Β.6.
ἵνα οὖν μηθὲν ὑστερῆι τὰ ἐϊλ]αιουργῖα φρόντισον, ἵνα μὴ αἰτίας
ἔχῃς.
ῬῚ ῬΕΙ͂ 260 B.C.
φροντίσαι ὅπως τῶν δικαίων τύχηι.
P. Tebt. 10 119 B.C.
φρόντισον ὡς Ta τῆς ὑποσχέσεως ἐκπληρωθήσεται.
ΒΕ 03: 5. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
σὺ φρόντισον, ὡς ἁρμόζει (= ἁρμόζῃ) καὶ εὐθύς, -- -- — μετ᾽ αὐτῆς κατέλ-
θῃς πρὸς ἐμέ.
O. Ρ. 1414 (Report of Proceedings), 6 CHDIOPASD.
After very bad text the reading is ὅπως καὶ περὶ τοῦτο ὅρον δῶτε.
(The editor would supply in the lacuna φροντίσατε or γενέσθω
ἐπιμελές. In view of what I have stated above, I am particu-
larly doubtful about the use of φροντίζω here).
FORPH18714.6 Late 5th A. D.
μη[δ)]ὲν οὖν ἀμελήσις τοῦτο φρόντισον.
(We have here a combination of two constructions.)
προνοέξομαι
The examples are not numerous and belong almost wholly to
the Ptolemaic age. We find both ὅπως and wa with the sub-
junctive, ὡς and ὅπως with the future indicative.
P. Par. 63, 47-48 165 B.C.
[ποιϊήσασθαι πρόνοιαν ὅπως — — — μερ[ιἸσθῇ τὰ γεώργια.
PB. Par. 36 163 B.C.
προνόησον ὅπως τεύξεται τῶν δικαίων.
118 Use of Subjunctie and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Tebt. 27, 67 113 5 1Ὸὺ:
προϊνο]εῖσθαι δὲ ἵνα πάντες [ὅπως] τάχιστα ἀποδῶσι.
Ib. line 69
προνοήσεσθαι ws κατὰ ταῦτα ἐπιτελεσθήσεται.
*P. Tebt. 43, 35 118 B.c.
προνοεῖται ws οὐθεὶς ἂν adukn...... B. Liste: ἀδικηθῆι ποτε.
(In view of the preceding example, this should probably be
filled out as a future indicative, rather than as a subjunctive.)
P. Amh. 137, 18 ff. Παυλίνῳ xparior[w 289 A.D.
]. ἵνα τοίνυν ai σιτοπομπίαι κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον. . [
Ἰτῇ ‘“Eravopig xali Θ]ηβαίδι ἑκατέρου πρόνοιαν ποιησαμενΐ
(This is an uncertain example, because of the lacunae in
the text.)
OTHER EXPRESSIONS OF CARE AND EFFORT
Most of the examples are from the Ptolemaic period. ὅπως
and ἵνα seem about equally distributed. ὡς with future indica-
tive occurs in the Ptolemaic period, and ὡς with subjunctive
once in the third century A. D. There are other expressions
occurring occasionally.
P. Hib. 41, 20 ff. 261 8. ς.
ἐπιμέλειαν δὲ ποίησαι ὅπως καὶ τὸ ὑπάρχον ἔλαιον δι᾽ αὐτοῦ ἤδη πραθῆι,
καὶ ἡ τιμὴ ἀνακομισθεῖσα πέσηι ἐπὶ τὴν [βασιλικὴν] τράπεζαν.
PSs 1.°502,/4-5 257\ Boge
σπούδασον μνησθῆναι αὐτῶι iva τὰ προστάγματα λάβηι.
P. 5.1. 347, 4-6 255 B.C.
καλῶς οὖν ποιήσεις -- -- -- σπουδάσας ὅπως ἐν τοῖς TOD βασιλέως γενεθλίοις
καιρὸν λαβὼν] [ἐντύϊχηις ἀντῶι μετὰ τῶν λοιπῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν.
Ρ. 5.1. 402, 2-3 lieve:
δίδωμι κατὰ μῆνα. λε καὶ ἀνδρίζομαι ἵνα ἀναπληρῶ τοὺς φόρους κατὰ
μῆνα.
P. Par. 61, 3-4 c. 145 B.c.
σκοπεῖτε ἵνα μηδὲν παρὰ ταῦτα γίνηται, μήδ᾽ ἡμᾶς τῶν κακῶς πραχ-
θησομένων διαλανθάνῃ.
P. Tebt. 17, 5-7 114 B.c.
στόχασαι ὡς πάντα τὰ ἐνοφειλόμενα περὶ τὴν κώμην ἐν μέτρωι ἔσται.
P. Tebt. 27, 14-15 113 B.c.
προσφέρου σπουδὴν ἵνα τἄλλα γένητ᾽ ἀκολούθως τοῖς ὑποδεδειγμένοις.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 119
Ib. lines 70-71 113;B: C.
στόχασαι ὅπως Kal ἐν ταῖς κώμαις ἐκτεθῆι προγράμματα.
*P, Amh. 131, 8 ff. Early 2nd A. D.
μελησάτω σοι ὅπως ἀγορασθῇ τὰ κενώματα καὶ ὅπως τὰ παιδία περὶ
τὴν ἰδιοσπορίαν ἡμῶν καὶ τοὺς γεωργοὺς ἐπιμελῶς ἀναστραφῶσιν,
μάλιστα δὲ περὶ τοὺς ἐν ὑραντῶνι ὅπως μὴ δίκας λέγωμεν.
10. P. 1678, 7-9 3rd A. D.
πᾶν οὖν πυήσῃς, Kupela μου μήτρη, μὴ ἀμελῆσε (= ἀμελῆσαι) τῆς
θυγατρός σου.
ΡΟ ΊΓ220..2 3rd A. D.
πᾶν ποίησον ws ἐπισταθῇς.
*P. Flor. 262, 7-9 3rd A. ἢ.
ἔργον μὲν ποίησον Taxa εὕρῃς μοι αὐτὸν, ἐπὶ ὁ κῆπος ἀργεῖ.
(The conjunction before εὕρῃς is wanting. For the phrase
compare δὸς ἐργασίαν, in O. P. 742, of 2 B. C.)
ΟΡ 58:29 288 A. D.
τοιούτους αἱρεθῆναι ποιήσειτε.
ΒΡ. 1.50, 10-13 4th-5th cent. A. D.
rloliln|cov τοίνυν αὐτοὺς παρασχεῖν αὐτῶι καὶ μάθουσιν ὅτι κτλ.
(μάθουσιν is apparently for μάθωσιν and seems to be an
independent subjunctive in command; compare P. Flor.
262 above.)
O. P. 1939 (= P. Cair. 10069), 3-4 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἤτησέν μοι πρᾶξαι αὐτῇ ἵνα πέμψαι αὐτοὺς δύο νεώτερον καὶ φυλάξαι
τὰ χώματα αὐτῶν.
ἐλπίζω
The apparent subjunctive after this verb in some papyri of the
late Byzantine age is probably to be explained as the equivalent
of a future indicative. The examples are interesting.
P. Amh. 144, 19-21 5th A. D.
ἐλπείδα δὲ ἔχομεν els τὸν θ(εὸ)ν ἵνα αὐτὸς πρόνοιαν ἡμῶν ποι «ἡ» σει.
SPL 001. off. 5th A. D.
ἐλπίζωμεν yap els τὸν θεὸν τὸν παντοκράτορα ὅτι ὑμεῖς (Ξ ἡμεῖς)
ἔχωμεν νικῆσαι.
O. P. 1940 (= P. Cair. 10093), 3 6th-7th cent. A. D.
καὶ ἐλπίζω els τὸν θεὸν ὅτι πέμπω σοι αὐτὰ ἢ μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ φέρω ἐρχόμενος.
120 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*O. P. 1874, 20-21 6th A. D.
καὶ ἐλπίζομεν els τὸν θεὼν ὅταν διὰ τις λο[{]πις ταὐ[τ]ης χαρὰν πέμ-
{μ)πι ὑμαυ ὁ κὐριως(Ξε τῆς λύπης, ὑμῖν ; and prob. ὅταν is for ὅτι).
, iva + SUBJUNCTIVE IN OTHER CLAUSES
There are a few scattered and unusual uses of ἵνα and the
subjunctive.
*In P. Fay. 124 (2nd cent. A. D.) εἵνα δόξῃς is probably to be
explained as a clause of conceived result (cp. Burton §218); it
would be very difficult to explain it as a clause of purpose. Lines
15 ff. ἀλλὰ roils} θ[ εο]15] ἐστίι]ν χάρις ὅτι οὐδεμία ἐστὶν πρόλημψις ἡμεῖν
γεγενημένη εἵνα δόξῃς ἄνευ νομίμων ἡμᾶς ἀποθεῖσθαι.
In P. Β. Μ. 1708 (567? A. D.), 152, the subjunctive may be
an extension of the object clause dependent on a verb of effort,
effecting, for ἐποίησαν precedes: ἐποίησαν aitw ἁπαξαπλῶς iva ἕκαστος
τούτων λάχῃ εἰς μοῖραν αὐτοῦ. But when we consider this in con-
nection with Il. 168 ff. (ἵνα ὦσιν) and Il. 183-184 (ὅπως ἔσονται), it
looks as if all of these conjunctions are used in the place of ὥστε.
These are to be regarded as result clauses.?5
The following examples show tva with the subjunctive in
subject and object clause, where the infinitive is normal and
natural. As both examples are very late, they are interesting
as showing the growth of the construction ἵνα + subjunctive.
O. P. 1847 (= P. Cair. 10050), 5 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἔδοξεν iva αὐτὴ λάβῃ αὐτὰ χωρὶς λόγου.
*O..P.31862:(= P, πιρ 10101), 40-41 7th A. D.
Kal ὅρκον δέδωκα τῷ Βίκτωρι ἵνα ἀνέλθῃ καὶ ἔλθῃ πρός με.
INDEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE OF COMMAND
In the Ptolemaic age occur several examples introduced by
ὅπως Or ὅπως ἂν or even iva. ὅπως may occur also with the
future indicative. ὅπως and ἵνα with the subjunctive may
occur later; but the subjunctive without introductory word is
increasing rapidly, until in the Byzantine age παρακληθῇι,
καταξιώσῃ and θελήσῃ occur very commonly in requests. Some-
times the third person of the subjunctive is found as a
substitute for the imperative.
* For constructions of this kind, cp. Jannaris, δ} 1756, 1758f, and 1951.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 121
P. Hib. 45, 14 ff. 257 Bae.
καὶ τὸν παρὰ Φίλωνος σῖτον ὅπως μηθὲν ὑπολείψεσθε ἐν αὐτῶι ἀλλὰ
πάντα παραμετρήσασθε.
ΕΎΡΕΕ ΤΠ 4 {19}.2 254 B.C.
ὅπως καὶ σὺ ἐνταθῆις τῶι] Τιμοξένωι χορηγεῖν.
Pease i430 047 fh: ΠΠ|8.ς.
’
εἰ yap ὑπάρχει μοι ἀντίγραφα αὐτῶν eis ἀνήλωμα, ὅπως ἂν ἐξ ἀρχῆς
εἰς ταῦτα ἀνηλίσκωμεν.
τ Re 10 ΣΧ ΊΣΕ: ΤΠ ΒΟ:
ὑπόμνημα Ζήνωνι. ἵνα λαλήσηις Εὐνόμωι μετὰ Ἴστρου, καθάπερ σοι
| Κρίτων ἐνετείλατο.
ΣΕ OG 1029.10 ἢ: 41 A: Ὁ.
πολλοὺς δανιστὰς ἔχομεν ᾿ μὴ ἵνα ἀναστατώσῃς ἡμᾶς ᾿ ἐρώτα αὐτὸν
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν. :
(Apparently μὴ ἵνα is inverted for ἵνα μή. Milligan?® punct-
uates thus, and interprets: Do not drive us out. Of course
we might punctuate with a comma after ἡμᾶς, and treat
the ἵνα clause as dependent on épwra. See Object Clauses
with Verbs of Asking.)
*B. G. U. 916, 15 (Lease) ist cent. A. D.
[ἡ] μίσθωσις ἥδ᾽ ἢ εἰς ἐνιαυτόν.
*P. Tebt: 414, 26 ff. 2nd A. Ὁ.
δότω καὶ ἡ θυγάτηρ Κεφαλᾶτος τὸ μέτρον Tegépoatt, πωλήσῃ,
πέμψῃ μοι τὸν χαλκόν, ἐπὶ ἔρχομαι.
P. Prk. 5280, 12-13 158 A.D.
ὁ vids μου ἐντύχῃ σοι Kal πέμψῃς “AvovBiwva ὑπηρέ[τἼην.
Buds 683) 28 199 Α. Ὁ.
ὁ τ᾽ ἔφη ἅπαντες. |... Ἰωσι καὶ εἴ τις μέμψασθαι ἔχει προσξλθῃ.
(The editor suggests ὁ δ᾽ ἔρη ; and I should fill the lacuna with
[ἔλθ]ωσι. This is a report of komogrammateis.)
ΠΤ O20; OL tf. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
διὸ οὖν, ἀδελφέ, ὅπως ἐνταλῇς τῷ ἀνδρί.
*P. Flor. 209, 10 3rd A. D.
iva πέμψῃς μοι φάσιν περὶ τούτου.
(The editor calls attention to the vulgarism and compares
the present vulgar expression νά μου πέμψῃς).
26 Selections, p. 40.
122 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrs
*P. Goodsp. XIV (= P. Cair. 10265), 8-9 343 A. Ὁ.
δηναρίων διακοσίων καὶ ταῦτα κατακομίσωσι ἐπὶ τὴν λαμπροτάτην
[Νέαν πόλιν] καὶ παραδώσωσιν εἰς τοὺς δημοσίους.
(The text just before is very bad.)
*P. B. M. 243, 23-24 346 A. D.
ποιήσῃς αὐτοῖς τὸ ζμῆμα γενέσθαι καὶ πἰέμ]ψῃς.
(These may be intended for future indicatives.)
fl Sl Era 52. 51Π: ΟΣ 950. Aa:
καλῶς ποιήσῃς, κύριε πά[τ]ερ, ἀπαιτῆσαι ᾿Ασκληπιάδη ἅπερ χρεωστῖ
μοι ν[ομ]ίσματα δύο καὶ ἀποστίλη μοι ἐπὶ τῆς πόλεως.
(I believe ἀποστιληῆ is for ἀποστεῖλαι, as in the original
edition of Nicole, not ἀποστείλῃς as in Addenda et Corri-
genda, where Nicole follows Wilcken, Archiv III, 368 ff.)
*P. Gen. 79 beg. 4th A. ἢ.
ὥστε ἀναζητήσῃς — — — καὶ ἀπαιτήσῃς.
(In the title occurs ὑπομνηστικόν).
O. P. 924 4th A. D.
ἦ μὴν φυλάξῃς καὶ συντηρήσῃς ’Apias.
(Gnostic Charm.)
AO A ea Wr GCE Bet Late 4th A. D.
αὐτὸς ὁ ναύτης ἀπαντήσῃ.
*P, Strasb. 35, 8 4th-5th cent. A. D.
θελήσῃ ἡ σὴ ἀρετή.
Ib. 1. 16
θελήσῃ οὖν ἡ σὴ ἀδελφότης.
P. Lips. 40 (Judicial Hearing) Col. II, 3 4th-5th cent. A. D.
Filammon d(ixit) — -- -- εἴπῃ, τίνες εἰσὶν of μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ,
(Many other instances in the following lines.)
*P. S. I. 479 beg. Sth? A. D.
κατ[α]ξ[ι]Ἰώσῃ τὸ σὸν μέγεθος πληρῶσαι.
*B. G. U. 874, 3-4 Byz.
καταξιώσηται οὖν πέμψατε πρὸς Φοιβάμμωνα καὶ δέξηται παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ
σῖτον καὶ μάθηται τί λαμβάνεται παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ (= καταξιώσητε, etc.
Observe the imperative here, instead of the infinitive, after
καταξιώσητε).
P. Cair. 67075, 2 Byz.
φροντίσῃ ἡ ὑμετέρα ἀδελφόϊΪτης.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 123
P. Cair. 67085, 3-4 Byz.
καταξίωσον οὖν, δέσποίτα ]| προσελθη (perhaps for προσελθεῖν.
The imperative καταξίωσον is sometimes used instead of the
subjunctive.)
P. Prk. 4744 Byz.
παρακληθῇ ὁ δεσπότης μου καὶ κελεύσῃ.
ΝΞ ]..937 5th-6th cent. A. D.
ὁ θεὸς δὲ ποιήσῃ αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν ἐν ᾿Αλεξανδρείᾳ.
(Requests and prayers are not very different.)
ΕΘ 9117 ΠῚ 5th-6th cent. A. D.
λαίγουσίν μου [ἵνα φθάσῃ πρὸς τὴν μητέρα ἡμῶ(ν) (= λέγουσιν por).
P. Cair. 67060, 4 500+ A. D.
Ἵνα tle] μάθητε ὅτι κτλ.
P. Cair. 67066 beg. 500+ A. D.
πληροφορήσῃ ὁ θεὸς τὴν ὑμετέραν ἀδελφικὴν διάθεσιν.
Ot 15957516 Early 6th A. Ὁ.
ὁ θεὸς ἀξιώσι ἡμᾶς προσκ(υνεῖν) ἐν οἱγίᾳ. (=déiwon and ὑγίᾳ).
Cat 1935: 6th A. D.
καταξιώσῃ ἡ σὴ ἀδελφότης παρασκεύασον.
P. Flor. 303, 7 6th A. D.
καταξιώσῃ οὖν ἡ ὑμετέρα μεγαλόνοια ἀποστεῖλαί μοι.
ΟἽ ΡΤ 505.6 6th A. D.
καὶ ἐξέλθῃ τὸ πιττ[άϊκ[ιον.
(This is a Christian prayer. Editor interprets: Let this
prayer be accomplished.)
O. P. 1847 (= P. Cair. 10050), 2 6th-7th cent. A. D.
παρασκευάσῃ οὖν αὐτὸν ἡ σὴ γνησία ἀδελφ[ότηϊς.
(In line 5 occurs the imperative παρασκεύασον).
ΒΝ 55225..2 6th-7th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἰδοὺ ἔχω αὐτὸν καὶ ἵνα μάθῃ ἡ κύρα pov ὅτι οὐ πέμπ[ω] ἐι[5] Βαβυλῶνι
ἀκαίρωϊς.
P. B. Μ. 1323 beg. 7th A. Ὁ.
θελήσῃ σου ἡ θαυμασιότης δεχομένη ταῦτά μου τὰ γράμματα λογί-
σασθαι τοῖς κτήτορσι.
P,. Amh. 156 7th A. Ὁ.
θελήσῃ ἡ σὴ ἀδελφ(ότης) δοῦναι.
(Order for Payment.)
*B. Ὁ. U. 605, 2-3 7th-8th cent. A. D.
τὸ δὲ ἀναγκαῖον τῆς ἐπιστολῆς ὁ κύριος φυλάξῃ σε.
124 Use of Subjunctive and Optavive Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
SUBJUNCTIVE FOR FUTURE INDICATIVE
Examples of the subjunctive in the sense of the future indica-
tive are fairly common from the third century A. D. onwards.??
I find two instances of an earlier date.
*P, Amh. 130, 11-14 70 A. Ὁ.
ἀλλὰ μεθ’ ἡμέρας dPwyat,| περί τε τῶν μετρημάϊτων Θαήσι <o>s
μεθ᾽ ἡμέρας πλίονας ἀποφέρωμεν.
(The editor notes correctly that the spelling and grammar
are more than usually atrocious.)
O. P. 1757, 9-10 2nd A. D.
ἀνερχόμενος ἀνανεΎ [κῶ σοι τὰ KaN<A> dua.
*O. P. 1069, 16 ὍΤΩΙ
δυνασθῶμεν.
O. P. 1587, 10 Late 3rd A. D.
οὕτω] yap Taxa δυνηθῶμεν.
P. Lips. 110, 16-18 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
Ta|xa δὲ ἀξιώσω τὸν πάτρωνά μου Kal ἐν τάχι ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς.
P. Prk. 4635 7th A. D.
οὔτε yap ἀφῶ τινα ἔξωθεν τῆς κώμης αὐτοῦ εἶναι.
APPARENT SUBJUNCTIVE FOR INDICATIVE
These are only apparent subjunctive forms; for most of these
are forms in the first person singular or plural, and are due to
the confusion between o and w, and ὦ andov. This is found as
early as the third century B. C.78 In the Byzantine age this
becomes still more common.
*P. Petr. II, 4(6), 14-15 Zoo Bates
ei οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ TE λοιποί μοι τὰς χέρας
προσοίσωσιν.
(In this complaint of an ignorant man the only reasonable
interpretation of προσοίσωσιν is that ic is for προσοίσουσιν.
So also the editor, and so Mayser, p. 100.)
ΡΟ 0070 . Libpc
σὺ δὲ δύνηι.
(The syntax shows that this is indicative. See Jannaris,
996, 54).
27 Cp. Hatzidakis, p. 218 and Jannaris, App. IV, 2-12.
28 Cp. Mayser, pp. 97-100.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 125
ΡΒ Wl. 33, 29 161 B.C.
ἀξιῶμέν σε.
*P, Grent. II, 38 (= Witk. 55), 14 Mid. I B.c.
ypaguwyal σε (= γράφομαί σοι).
ἘΠ 0 11: 1201. 8 fi. ἸΤΑΤΌΣ
εὕρωμεν τὰς θύρας τοῦ ἱεροῦ Σαράπειδος θεοῦ μεγίστου ὑφημένας φωτί.
(In the same papyrus εὕροσαν occurs twice. ὑφημένας = ὑρημμένα5)
*P, Ryl. 160 (c), Col. II, 34 S274.
ὁμολογῶμεν ἔχιν.
*P, Ryl. 154, 27-28 66 Δ. D.
ἔτι δὲ καὶ προϊσαϊποδώσιν αὐτῆι ὁ Χ[αιρ]ήμων καὶ τὴν rpoyleypal-
μμένην φερνήν (Marriage Contract. Probably προσαποδώσει).
Β. G. U. 664, 4-5 1st A. ἢ.
δραχμὰς ἑκατ[ὸν] [ἃς καὶ ἀϊποδόσωμεμ.
BR. Favs 116,.9 104 A. D.
ἐπὶ βουλεύωμαι.
ἘΡῚ Tebte 379,13: ἢ; 128 A. D.
ὧν καὶ τὴν συμπεφονημένην τιμὴν ἀπέχωμεν ἐκ πλήρους καὶ βεβαιώσω-
μέν σοι.
*P. Giess. 97 2nd A. D.
dey,
SG):
“hi
ἘΡῚ
ΕΣ
καλῶς οὖν πυήσεις ἐπ᾽ ὀνόματος Lapariwvols] μόνος καταχωρήϊσῃ)ς
|ralira<s> καὶ δηλώσῃς μοι. 2nd Hand. πέμψῃς κτλ. (κατα-
χωρήσῃς = καταχωρίσεις from καταχωρίζω. The verbs seem
intended for future indicatives of command, like ποιήσει5).
G. U. 601, 9 2nd A. D.
εὖ οὖν ποιήσῃς Ὑράψον μοι.
(Observe the combination of constructions; we should
expect the participle instead of the imperative ypayor).
P. 729, 44 137 A. D.
παραδόσωμεν τὰ ἴσα.
B; M. 339, 12-13 179 A.D.
καὶ βεβαιώσωμεν πάσῃ βεβαιώσει.
Strasb. 73, 14-15 3rd A. D.
γίνωμαι (for γίνομαι)
S. I. 236, 14 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
ἀποκαταστήσῃς.
(This should be regarded as meant for future indicative,
rather than subjunctive; it expresses a command or
direction.)
126 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Flor. 31, 11 312 .Δ De
ἀναδώσῃς μοι.
*P. Goodspeed XIV (= P. Cair. 10265), 19 343 A.D.
ἔγγυῶμεν καὶ ὀμνύωμεν τὸν Pov ὅρκον.
ἘΡ, Β. Μ. 414, 13 c. 346 A. D.
εἶπαν ὅτι οὐκ ἔχωμεν χόρτον.
(Compare the fondness for direct quotation in N. T. Greek,
and ὅτι as the introductory word.)
P. Cair. 67009, 16-17 500+ A. D.
καὶ τοῦτο διδάσκωμεν τὴν ὑμῶν éevdolts] φιλανθρωπίαν. ;
P. Cair. 67005, 9 Ὁ 22 Δ ἢ.
διδάσκω [δ]ὲ τὸ πάντιμον ὕψος ὑμῶν ὡς κτλ.
P. Cair. 67097, 19 Byz.
ἐφ᾽ rive εὐδοκῶ καὶ πίθωμαι (= πείθομαι. Ed.)
*P. Β. Μ. 1694, 21 6th A. D.
παρέξωμεέν σοι Tupots.
Pa. vied 08n 1st 567? A. D.
γίνωνται κεράτια διακόσια τέσσαρα.
Β. Ὁ. ὕ. 108,2 6th-7th cent. A. D.
θέλωμεν, and παρασκευάσωμεν.
PRESENT GENERAL TIME CLAUSES
Genuine examples of Present General Time Clauses in the
subjunctive are as rare as Present General Conditions. Most of
the examples, however, seem clear.
P. Petr. III, 43 (3) c. 240 B. c.
οὐ yap ἀγνοεῖς οἷά ἐστιν τὰ κατὰ τὰ πληρώματα ἐὰν ἀργῶσιν.
(In the form of a condition, this is really equivalent to a
temporal clause.)
P. Vat. A (= Witk. 27), 17-18 168 B. Cc.
ὁπηνίκ᾽ ἂν -- -- -- διασωθῆι, the apodosis of which is πειρᾶται.
P. Lips. 104 (= Witk. 530), 16 95. B. Cc.
ὅταν ἡμῖν γ[ρ]άψηις, ἔνψυχόν τὶ λαμβάνω.
*P. Fay. 109 Early ist A. ἢ.
ὅταν — — — θέλῃς.
*B. G. U. 845, 9-10 2nd A. D.
\ | ΟἿΣ] 4
λυποῦμαι ὁπόΪτ]αν τις παραγένηται Kal μὴ evey[k]n μοι ἐπιστολίδιον.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrit 127
O. P. 1868 (= P. Cair. 10104), 1-2 6th-7th cent. A. D.
πεπίσμεθα τὴν σὴν γνησίαν λαμπρότητα [μὴ] ψευδομένην, μάλιστα
καὶ ὅταν ὀμώσῃς.
OTHER PRESENT TIME EXPRESSIONS
ἕως (ἂν), WHILE, AS LONG AS
This is found infrequently. The examples speak for them-
selves.
P. Petr. III, 2, 21 237 BaACe
ἀφίημι ἐλ]ευθέρους ἐἀμ μοι παραμείνω[σιν ews ἂν ἔγὼ ζῶι. (Will).
ῬΟΡΕΙ 6516 237 B.C.
ἐάμ μοι παραμείνωσιν ἕως ἂν ἔγὼ ζῶ. (Will).
P. Leid. B (Col. 3), 5 164 B.C.
ἕως ἐσμὲν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ.
Ο. Ρ. 1468, 29 ΟΣ 58.Α: ἢ:
dws μὲν ἐκείνη περ[ι]ῆν ἀναμφι[σβήτητοι ἔγένοντ]ο.
(An example of past time.)
4 Dm!
OOQAKLS EAV
ὁσάκις ἐὰν, as often as, occurs occasionally. The subjunctive
mood is used.
P. Giess. 12 Roman Period
ὁσάκις ἐὰν μέλλῃς πέμψαι, — — — πέμψον.
P. Hamb. 37 2nd A. D.
ὁσάκις ἐὰν εὕρω ἀφορμήν, ypagw σοι.
FUTURE TIME EXPRESSIONS WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE
The subjunctive mood is commonly used in expressions of
future time; but in the later Byzantine period we shall find the
optative rather frequent too (see Optative). I have considered
the subjunctive in time expressions under these heads, the sub-
junctive introduced by: (1) a word meaning before, generally
πρίν; (2) word meaning when, e.g. ὅταν, ὅπηνίκα; (3) word mean-
ing as soon as, ὡς ἂν; (4) word meaning until, e.g. ἕως ἂν, ἔστ᾽
ἂν, ἄχρις οὗ, etc.
128 Use of Subjunctive and Opiarive Moods in the Non-Literary Pa pyri
1. TIME ExXPRESSION—BEFORE
πρὶν with the subjunctive occurs a number of times; sometimes
ἂν is used, sometimes not. Occasional substitutes for πρὶν
occur. The examples of πρὶν are from the second to the fifth
century A. D., generally in orders and letters.
B. G. U. 888, 9 160 A. D.
πρὶν ἢ ἐν στραϊτ]είᾳ γένωμαι. :
*P. Amh. 133, 14-16 Early 2nd A. ἢ.
περὶ δὲ ὑραντῶν πρὶν ἢ γράψῃ μοι du’ ἡμερῶν ἐκεὶ πέμπω.
*O. P. 611 2nd A. D.
διαστειλάτω Σαραπάμμων πρὸ τοῦν ᾿Αγαθοκλῆς διαστείλῃ.
(An Official Order. The editor suggests that we read οὗ
av; but I am inclined to think that this is meant for πρὸ Tov
with ν movable. Compare P. Fay. 136, below.)
*B. G. U. 884, end. 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
πρὶν οὖν ἀπέλθῃς πρὸς Χαιρήμονα, ἀνά(βαινε) πρός με, ἵνα σοι ἀποτά-
ξομαι. :
P. Tebt. 435 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
ὧν τελευϊτησάντων] πρὶν ἀπολάβω τὸ x[péos μου].
ΟΡ 1413, 35 ον
Jos δεδηϊλωκέν]αι πρὶν ἂν τὸ πᾶν ἀνάλωμα δοθῇ J.
(Proceedings of Senate.)
*P. Fay. 136, 6-7 4th cent. A. D.
πρὸ τοῦ τις ὑμᾶς ἐνέγκῃ.
Be O25 ΒΟ, 97 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
πρὶν ἁπλῶς}] nd. |... ] πέρας τῷ πράγμαϊτ]ι ἐπιτεθῇ.
(Doubtful on account of text.)
FRCS Sasi tt Sth A. D.
ἔδει σε πρὶν Ὑράψωμεν ἀποστῖλαι τὰς χιλίας πεντακοσίας μυριάδας.
Ῥ (ΑΙ 0771.) 9 a: 567 A. D.
ποιοῦμαι τὴν ἔγ[γὙ]ραφον διαθήκην-- —— δεδειὼς τὸ μέλλον, μὴ, πρὶν
διαθῶμαι καὶ τὰ καθ᾽ ἐμαυτὸν διατυπώσω, καὶ παρὰ προσδοκίαν
τὸν βίον μεταλλάξω, διὰ τοῦτο κτλ. (Will).
P. B. M. 1346 710 A. Ὁ.
πρὸ τοῦ γένηται ἀπόβασις τῶν ὑδάτων
FYB Mii353 710 A. D.
mpd τὸ (Ξε πρὸ τοῦ) ἀποβῇ τὸ ὕδωρ τῆς διώρυγος ᾿Αλεξανδρείας καὶ
ἀναγκασθῇς δοῦναι.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 129
2. FUTURE TEMPORAL CLAUSES—WHEN
Future temporal clauses are in the subjunctive (for a late use
of the optative, see Optative), introduced by a temporal word,
ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, ἐπάν, ὁπόταν, ὁπηνίκα ἐάν.
The relative frequency of these words at different periods may
be seen in the following table. The numbersare approximate;
for further examples might change these numbers, though I do
not believe that the proportion will be greatly affected:
Worp PTo.. PER. 1st-3rD A.D. 41H-7TH A. Ὁ.
ὅταν 20 24 2
ἐπειδάν 1 4 5
ἐπάν 2 13 3
ὁπηίκα ἐάν 2 32 5
ὁπόταν 1 35 23
The examples of ἐπάν, ὁπηνίκαν, and ὁπόταν of the Ptolemaic
age occur in the second century B.C. ὁπηνίκαν appears thus in
these two cases.
Clearly ὅταν was preferred in the first period; in the middle
period, ὁπηνίκα ἐάν and ὁπόταν, with ὅταν still frequent; while in the
third period ὁπόταν is the most common. Later we shall see
that ὁπόταν with the optative is also frequent at this time. A
few instances of ὅτε and ὁπηνίκα without ἄν are found in the
Byzantine period.
The examples are from contracts, agreements, loans, sales,
declarations, acknowledgments, leases, and the like, as well as
some letters.
There are a few other expressions of time. In a few cases
in Ptolemaic times we find ἦι ἡμέρᾳ or ἀφ᾽ οὗ; and a number of
times in the first and second periods ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἠμέρας. ἡνίκα ἐάν is
unusual; it is found in O. P. 104, of 96 A. D.
P. Hib. 84(a) : 301 B.C.
κυρία ἔστω ὅταν ἐπιφέρηι.
BP. tlipa29,-10 Cs 265 Βὲ Cz
fe δ᾽ ἂν ἡμ[έρ]αι ἡ ἔκθεσις μὴ γίνηται].
P. Lille 1 (Verso) 12 259 B.C.
ἐπειδὰν εἰδήσωμεν τὰ πλήθη τῆς γῆς.
130 Use of Subjunctite ana Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
P. Hib. 89, 14 239 B.C.
ἀφ᾽ ov ἂν]προείπῃ ἐν ἡμέραις δέκα.
P. Lille 29 (Col. 1), 4-5 III B.c.
ἐξέστω τῶι κυρίωι ἀναδικῆσαι ἐν ἡμέραις €, ay’ ἧς ἂν ἡ εἴσπραξις
γίνηται.
PsVate ΕΣ 22 c. 160 Β. c.
ὁπηνίκ᾽ ἂν ἐπιγνῶσιν -- -- — τὸ τηνικαῦτα -- -- — πολιορκοῦσι.
(Also in P. Vat. F. These may be regarded as general in
their application; but there is future meaning in the aorist
subjunctive.)
ΚΡΙΊΡΑΙ ΤΟΙ 12 Prob. Ὁ. 145 5:0:
ἐπάν τις ἐξελεγχθῇ.
(This would seem to be present general.)
P. Tebt. 12, 9 118 B.C.
[ὁπότ᾽ οὖν ἐὰν AGB| pls τὴν ἐπιστολήν.
(Compare ὡς ἄν in this phrase.)
P. Tebt. 27, 83 113 Bee:
he δ᾽ ἂν ἡμέραι κομίσηι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν διασάφησον.
P. Tebt. 386, 21-22 12 85}Ὸ:
ἐκτίσω ἐν ἡμέραις τριάκοντα ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἐάν μοι παρανγίλη.
(Written by the second hand in a marriage contract.)
*P. Ryl. 94, 12 Early ist A. D.
ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν ἑρῇ. (Bail).
P. B. M. 1168, 12 18 A.D.
ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν αἱρῶνται. (Mortgage).
P. Β. Μ. 1166, 6 42 A.D.
ay’ ἧς ἐὰν αἱρῆται 6 Atos ὥρας μέχρι ἐκλείψεως τῶν Novopevw. ~
Ο. Ρ. 1641, 14-15 68 A. D.
ἀφ᾽ οὗ ἐὰν παρασυνγραφήσω χρόνου.
(The main verb is éxreiow. A Loan).
*P. Ryl. 323, 4-5 125°. Ὁ:
ὁμολογῶ ὁπότε ἄν μοι σὺ ἴπῃς.
O. P. 1472, 24 136 A. D.
ὡμολόγησεν ποιήΐσα]σθέ μοι ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι.
*P. Hamb. 8, 26 ff. 136 A.D.
ἔχω τὸ αὐθεντικὸν καὶ ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν ἐπιζητῇς ἐποίσω πρὸς ἐπίδιξιν.
P. Ryl. 163, 13 139 A. D.
καὶ ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν αἱρῇ ἀνοίσω.
Use of Subjunctive and Optaiive Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 131
P. Amh. 92, 24 162 A. ἢ.
μεταμ[ι]σθοῦν ὁπότε ἐὰν αἱρῇ.
B. G. U. 607, 22-23 163 A. D.
ἃς καὶ ἀποδώϊσουϊσι τῷ Διδύμῳ ὁπόταν ἀναιρ[ο]ῦνται τὰ ὀφιλόμενα.
(Observe ἀναιροῦνται for ἀναιρῶνται).
C. P. R. 29, 16-17 184 A. D.
ἣν καὶ ἀποδώσι αὐτῇ ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν αἱρῆται ἄνευ πάσης ὑπερθέσεως.
(Marriage Contract).
O. P. 471, 21 2nd A. D.
ἐπειδὰν ἀπαλἰ[λ]αγῆι.
(Speech of Advocate. It is somewhat like literary work.)
O. P. 1062, 5-7 2nd A. D.
πίρ]οσεταξάμην ὅτι ὅταν καλὰ γένηται τότ]ε ἀγόρασον.
ἘΡῚ Ἐν]: 172,.29.ῆ. 208 A. D.
ἐπὰν δὲ μή τις προσθῇ σοι, μενεῖς ἐπὶ TH προγεγραμμένῃ μισθώσι.
(Here the meaning is: as long as.)
*P. Grenf. II, 62 (= Br. Mus. P. 705), 11 211 A.D.
ὃν καὶ παραστήσω ὁπόταν ἐπιζητῆται. (Bail).
*B. G. U. 637, 2-3 213 A. D.
kal ἀποδώσω [cole [ὁ]π[όταν] βουληθῇς.
Ο. P. 1636, 33-34 249 A.D.
ἣν ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν αἱρῇ δημιώσεις.
Ο. Ρ. 1413, 31 c. 270 A. D.
ὅταν οὖν εὐθέως ἔλθῃ, ἐπειχθήσεται T[d ἔ]ργον.
(Proceedings of Senate.)
O. P. 1701, 8 3rd A. D.
ἐϊποικοδομεῖν ὁπόταν αἱρῇ.
P. Flor. 227 3rd A. Ὁ.
ἐπὰν γένηται πρός σε παράσχες.
P. Iand. 60, 1. ff. 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
δώσω σοι ὁπόταν αἱρῇ ἀνυπερθέτως.
(The formula is common in loans.)
ΚΟΥ 1261,°10 325 A. D.
ὁπόδαν κελευσθῶ.
*P. B. M. 246, 8 346 A. D.
ὡπόταν ζητηθῇ. (Again in 16-17).
*P. B. M. 870, 6 4th a. ἢ.
ἀποδώσω ὁπόταν εὐπορήσω.
132 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Ῥαργγὲ
SPE Deo lt End 4th A. D.
ὁπόταν θελήσῃ δίσομαι.
BiG pune sons i. Byz.?
καλῶς οὖν ποιήσις πέμψε μοι αὐτὰ διὰ Tabens na ἡμέρᾳ] ἐὰν παρα-
γίνητε πρός σε εὐθὺς ἀπαλλάξε αὐτόν.
(= πέμψαι, ἣ, παραγίνηται, and prob. ἀπαλλάξαι).
Ο. P. 1957, 15-16 430 A.D.
καὶ ὁπόϊταν] βουληθῇς παραδώσω σοι.
O. P. 1129, 13-14 449 4. Ὁ.
ὁπόταν βουληθῇς παραδώσω.
O. P. 1835, 8 Sth-6th cent. A. D.
ddav κελεύεις, TA αὐτὰ πρόσωπα ἀναφέρωμεν.
(In this late period there is much confusion between indica-
tive and subjunctive forms. This is due to similarity of
sound and a loss of feeling for strict grammatical construc-
tion.)
*P. Cair. 67020, 12-13
ἐπὰν yap συμβῇ τῷ πένητι συσταλῆναι Tas χεῖρας ἀποκλείεται Kal
τὸ στόμα. ;
(This might be regarded as present general.)
P. B. M. 1711, 73-74 c. 570A. D.
καὶ ταῦτα ἀποδώσω σοι ὁπόταν βουληθῇς.
P. Flor. 300, 10-11 597 A. Ὁ.
ὅπερ σοι ἀποδώσω ὁπόταν β]ο]υληθῇς.
ῬΒΙΟΣ 9.1. 6th-7th cent. A. D.
Kal ὁπόταν βουληθῇς ἔχειν παραδώσω σοι.
PL. BAM. 136473 710 4. D.
ὁπόδαν εὕρω.
(υ written above, after ὁπό).
I add one specimen which is interesting because of its language.
The interpretation is not clear; and the editor says of this part:
“non intendo’’; neither do I, but I can make a few suggestions.
It is a surety-bond.
P. Flor. 284, 9 ff. 538 A. D.
ὁπόταν δὲ ζητούμενον παρὰ τῆς [ὑμῶν ἐντρεχείας τοῦτον mapevey-
κεῖν καὶ παραδώσομεν ὑμῖν ἐν δημοσίῳ τόπῳ ἐκτὸς ἁγίων περιβόλων
καὶ θείων χαρακτήρων καὶ ἁγίας κυριακῆς ἐν τῷ παρειλήφαμεν
σχήματι.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 133
(ζητούμενον is intended for the subjunctive after ὁπόταν.
παρενεγκεῖν is perhaps the infinitive in an ‘‘agreement,’’
as if ὁμολογοῦμεν preceded ; to this is added καὶ παραδώσομεν. τῷ
near the end is equivalent to 6. Such combinations and
peculiarities occur in late Byzantine papyri. P. Cair. 67328
and 67334, of about the same time, are similar.)
3. TIME ExPRESSION—AS SOON As
a) ὡς ἄν
One variety of the expression of time when is the expression of
time as soon as. ὡς ἄν is quite frequent in this sense; but
seems confined to the Ptolemaic period. Ina very few instances
τάχιστα is added. The examples are almost all from letters,
occasionally petitions and orders.
LEE & Mehic: bes Tea e 25H BAC.
ὡς aly] λάβητε τὴν ἐ[πι]-| [στολὴν παραγίνεσθε [1ἵν]α [τ]ὸν ἐν Σέρθαι
σῖτον [μεταβἀλ[ησ]θε.
P. 5.1. 500, 8-9 2578)
τὰ δὲ λοιπὰ τὰ ἐνταῦθα ἀπαγγελεῖ σοι ᾿Ιάσων καὶ αὐτὸς Πανακέστωρ,
ὡς ἂν ὑγιαίνων παραγένηι.
P. Hib. 44, 5 253 Β.6.
ὡς ἂν οὖν λάβηις τὴν ἐπιστολὴν
(This phrase is very common.)
ΘΟ 360, 12-13 252 BIC.
ὡς ἂν τάχιστα λικμήσωμεν.
P. Lille 16, end Mid. III B.c.
περὶ δὲ τῶν λοιπῶν ws ἂν διοικηθῆι, ἐπιστελοῦμέν σοι.
(I think this is the correct interpretation of this passage.)
Posh 659, 10-11 1h Gusto
εἶπα οὖν αὐτῷ᾽ ὡς ἂν b[yrailyn<u>s σὺ καὶ παραγένη <u>.
P. S. 1. 533, 8-10 III B.c.
γράψω δὲ καὶ Ἶ. -- — — ὡς ἂν πλῆι ὁ κέλης.
Ῥ.5.1. 444, 7 III 8.6.
ὡς ἂν τάχιστα λάβηις τὰ γράϊμ]ματα.
P. Eleph. 10 beg. 222. Β. 0.
ὡς ἂν ἀναγνῶις τὴν ἐπιστολήν.
ἘΡ, Par. 46 (= Witk. 38), 18 153 Hoce
ὡς ἂν εὐκαιρήσω, παραχρῆμα παρέσομαι πρὸς σέ.
134 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrs
(Ὁ) OTHER MopeEs or EXPRESSION
Examples are rare and belong to a later date than ὡς ἄν.
*O. P. 744 (= Witk. 58), 7-8 Year 1 B.C.
ἐὰν εὐθὺς ὀψώνιον λάβωμεν, ἀποστελῶ σε ἄνω.
(This is really an expression of time, not a condition.)
Ο. Ῥ. 1413, 31 ΟΤῸ Δ Ὁ.
ὅταν οὖν εὐθέως ἔλθῃ, ἐπειχθήσεται τἰὸ ἔ]ργον. (Cp. B. G. U. 821
for ὅταν εὐθέως).
P. Tebt. 411, 3 ff. 2nd A. D.
ἅμα τῷ λαβεῖν μου τὴν ἐπιστολὴν αὐτῇ ὥρᾳ ἄνελθε.
*P, Tebt. 421, 2-3 3rd A. D.
ἅμα τῷ λαβεῖν σε ταῦτά μου τὰ γράμματα γενοῦ.
(In these two examples observe the convenient substitute
for ὡς ἂν λάβῃς).
Β. G. U. 1030 3rd A. ἢ.
εὐθέως λαβών μου τὰ γράμματα er[O]é μοι εἰς ’ IBiwva.
(c) ὡς ἂν or ὡς ἐὰν IN DOUBTFUL CASES
B. G. U. 1098, 43-44 Crib Bsc:
θήσεσθαι καὶ τὴν] δι᾽ ἱεροθυτῶν συγγραφὴν] ὡς ἂν ἐπὶ το[ῦ κα]ιροῦ
κοινῶς κρίνωσι.
(Marriage Contract.)
Br Galsii0lsa2 13 B.C.
[... .Jpous δ’ εἰς τὸ παιδίον ὡς ἐὰν ἐπὶ τοῦ καιροῦ κοινῶς κρείν[ωϊμεν
red eas ἀξιοῦμεν ?
(Renewing of Marriage Contract.)
In these two examples ὡς seems to mean as.
P.S. I. 521, 9-10 248 B.C.
ὡς ἂν mapayewmple|Oa εἰς ᾿Αφροδίτης πόλιν ἄχρι τοῦ φαρμοῦθι τ.
It is tempting to regard this as a temporal clause; yet the
editor seems to be right in saying that the ἄχρι clause excludes
the temporal significance. It must then be a purpose clause.?9
This papyrus which we are ‘considering, a Receipt, is badly
written. I am not willing to give up my opinion that the
sentence quoted above is meant to be a temporal clause, intro-
** Cp. Witkowski, note on No. 1, 3, where another doubtful example is
considered; and see p. 32 of the present investigation.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 135
duced by ὡς ἄν. If what precedes and what follows were
more certain, the interpretation would be clearer.
ἘΡ, Fay. 111, 16-17 95 A. Ὁ.
ὡς ἐὰν βλέπῃς [τ]ὴν τιμὴν πάντος (= πάντως) ἀγόρασον τὰς τοῦ
λοτίνου (ἀρτάβαΞ) κ.
(The editor interprets thus: ‘‘However you find the price,
be sure to buy.”’ Perhaps this ὡς is simply as; and we
have a General Relative Clause. But might ὡς ἐὰν
stand for ὡς ἄν This is a letter and is in the popular
language.)
SO 2P 729,32 137 Α. Ὁ.
ἐν αἷς ἐστιν τροχὸς ὡς ἐὰν κατ᾽ ἔτος κοινότερον συνφωνήσωσι τὸν
φόρον.
(In this Lease of a Vineyard there is something lost at the
beginning of the line which makes it impossible to get the
exact meaning. I think the meaning is: as they shall
agree. In that case we shall have a General Relative
Clause.)
P. Gen. 46, 15 345 A. D.
ὡς ἂν δυνηθ]ῶ].
(The verb in the main clause is ἀποκαταστήσω.. The text
+s too uncertain. The meaning might be: as I shall be able,
rather than: as soon as I shall be able.)
P. S. I. 286, 37 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
ἀλλὰ κ[αὶ] τὰ βιβλία πέμψω αὐτῷ ws ἐὰν δόξῃ.
(The interpretation is not clear, on account of the very
uncertain condition of the text which follows.)
*P, Amh. 135, 14 Early 2nd cent A. D.
καὶ [[apos epy]] ἂν αὐτῷ δόξῃ.
(Above the line is written ἐν ποτέρω axovdnodueba. The
preceding text does not help us much. As the editor says,
some change was intended, which might make δόξῃ the
subjunctive in a future time clause. Editor interprets: “or
when he chooses.’”? However, there is some similarity
between this and the preceding example.)
I must leave these cases unsolved for the present. I may
say here, however, that we find ὡς ἐὰν in a number of cases
clearly in the sense of as. This is the case in a number of leases,
136 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
where the agreement provides that the lessee shall give back
the property in the condition in which he received it.
I quote only one example here:
Ο. P. 912 (Lease of Cellar), 26-27 ZI AG De
ws ἐὰν παραλάβῃ with παραδότω in the main clause. (Compare
the relative clauses under παραλάβω).
ws ἂν IN N. T. GREEK
Unfortunately I can find nothing on ὡς ἂν, as soon as, in
Burton; and Moulton? is rather unsatisfactory, though he does
drop the hint that the modern σάν (as, when) comes from ὡς ἂν.
Witkowski# has an excellent note on ὡς ἂν, which he translates
ubt primum. He gives a number of references to the papyri,
some irom the LXX (with reference to Abbott, Joh. Gr. 536 π.
2), several N. T. examples, and a reference to Blass, Gram.
d. N. T. Gr, 278. The New Testament examples are these:
1 Cor. 11, 34, ὡς ἂν ἔλθω; Phil. 2, 23, ὡς ἂν ἀφίδω; Rom. 15, 24, ὡς
ἂν πορεύωμαι. This use, says Witkowski, is unknown to Attic
authors. Blass says this construction has weak classical parallels;
but he quotes only Herodotus 4, 172, τῶν δὲ ὡς ἕκαστός of μειχθῇ,
διδοῖ δῶρον.
We have then in ὡς ἄν an extension of the temporal use of ὡς.
ὡς ἄν with the subjunctive is evidently a popular usage, as
seen by the nature of the papyri in which it occurs. Its use
by Paul might of course be due to his familiarity with the Septua-
gint, which belongs to the same general period from which these
papyri come; but I think that Paul is here using the spoken
language of everyday life, just as the writers of the papyrus
letters were doing before him.
4, FUTURE TEMPORAL CLAUSES, EXPRESSING
LIMIT OF TIME
Future temporal clauses, introduced by a word meaning
until, are in the subjunctive. Introductory words are ἕως,
μέχρι, ἄχρι, ἔστε. Some combinations, like ἕως οὗ, ἄχρις οὗ, μέχρι
30 Proleg. p. 167. Jannaris 51488.
ὃ: Epist. Priv. Gr.,? p. 87.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 137
οὗ, and ἕως ὅτε occur. ἂν is used in most instances. A table of
the approximate number of occurrences in different periods may
be useful.
1sT-3RD 4TH-7TH
WorpD Ῥτοι,. AGE Cent. A. D. Cent. A. Ὁ.
ἕως ἂν 29 18 10
ἕως 6 36 10
ἕως οὗ ἃν 1 2 —
ἕως οὗ 3 2 9
ἕως ὅτε Ξε at 8
ἕως ὅτου mee 1 1
ἔστ᾽ ἄν -- 10 3
ἄχρις ἂν = 14 9
ἄχρι(ς) i 3
ἄχρις οὗ ἂν mae 1 =
ἄχρις οὗ Ὧν 17 4
ἄχρις ὅταν = -- 2
μέχρις ἂν 1 7 1
péxpr(s) ae 2 ἘΝ
μέχρις οὗ = 10 =
ee ποΠρ}ὋῤῤΠῤῤ᾽.᾽’ππΠπ᾿ΠὧΠΠΠὺΠὺΠπΠπππ|'’ "ςτὸν
ἕως was preferred in the first two periods; in the Ptolemaic age
ἕως ἂν predominated very decidedly; in the Roman period, ἕως
was most common, and ἕως ἄν next, though ἄχρις and μέχρις
in different combinations were competing. In the Byzantine
time combinations of ἕως are still more frequent than ἄχρις and
its combinations; μέχρις never established itself firmly.
Another interesting point is that the cases of és without ἄν
of the Ptolemaic age belong to the second and first centuries B.
C., i.e. to the latter part of the period. This is more interesting
when we note the great increase of use of simple éws in the Roman
period.
138 Use of Subjunctive @ nd Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Lille, 5, 29 260 B.C.
ἕως ἂν ἐπισκεψώμεθα.
P. Frb. 60 25 Bee:
ἕως ἂν πάντας ἐπέλθηις.
Ῥ.Θ1..368725 250 B.C.
καὶ ἔγγυόν μοι ἔδωκε ἥως ἂν πρός σε ἔλθω.
Ρ. 5.1. 418, 21-22 ι III B.c.
ἕως ἂν ἱματίου ἐπήβολοι γενώμεθα.
ΒΟ ΤΠ 420 lef: 1Π|8Β.-ς.
ἔγὼ οὖν οὐκ wixdunr, ἕως ἄν μοι σὺ συντάξηις.
(As if the idea were still future, from the time when it was
being considered. So the subordinate clause does not
strictly conform to the main clause. The construction is
quite frequent.)
P. Petr. III, 43 (3), 12-13 III B.c.
ἔγραψάς μοι μὴ ἀποσπᾶσαι τὸ πίλή]ρωμα ἐκ Φιλωτέριδος ἕως od
τὰ ἔργα συντελέσαι.
(This is the same as P. Petr. II, 9, 2and 3. If συντελέσαι
seems strange, compare the same papyrus, lines 15-16,
where there is a clear instance of the subjunctive.
Ib. 11. 15-16 11Π|8Β.6.
τὸ [δ]ὲ πλήρωμα οὐκ ἐργάζεται ἕως οὗ τὰ συντετελεσμένα ἔργα
ἔγμετρηθῆι αἰὐ] τοῖς.
P. Petr. III, 74 (a) (Prob.) III B. c.
βεβαιώσω σοι ἕως ay κομίσωμαι.
*P.-Par.i51;.16-17 160 B.c.
ἐπορευόμην ἕως καταλάβω αὐτὰς καὶ ἔρχομαι.
(Record of Dreams.)
P. Tebt. 27, 101-2 113° BFC
μέχρι ἂν ἑαυτῶι λόγον δοὺς προνοηθῆι.
*P. Grenf. II, 38 (= Witk. 55) 81 B.C.
γράψον μοι περὶ τοῦ μὴ Aoyebw ἕως καταβῇς.
Β. G. U. 1204, 6-7 : 28 B.C.
καὶ od de διανδραγάθει, ἕως οὗ ἂν παραγένηται.
B. G. U. 1209 23 Βῖσι
οὐδὲν σπουδῆς οὐδὲ κακοπαθίας παρέλιπον, ἕως οὗ ἕκαστα ἐπιγνῶ
Νεάρχου τοῦ παιδίου ἐπακολουθοῦντος.
ΟΡ 201 τὸ 25 ΑἹ ΤῊΝ
μ[έχ]ρι ὑγια[νων παρ[α]γένωμαι.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 139
O. P. 293, 7-8 27 Α. Ὁ.
μέχρι οὗ ἀποστείλῃς μοι φάσιν.
*B. G. U. 597, 14-15 75 A.D.
ἕως καταβῶι καὶ δῶι αὐτῶι τὸ[ν] χαλκόν.
*B. 6. U. 830, 12-13 1st A. Ὁ.
πρόσχες (= πρόσσχες) αὐτῷ, ἄχρις ἄν σοι ἔλθω.
Pr Pay. 12.090 99 A.D.
ἕως γράψω.
ἘΡ, Bas. 18, 3-4 Early Roman
τὴν γυναῖ “ κἀ μου ἔγλάνβανε ἄχρις ἂν γένωμε πρὸς σέ.
Ο. Ρ. 599 1st-2nd cent. A. D.
ἕως δώσῃς αὐτωι (Ed. αὐτό).
ΡΤ 118.012 110 a. Ὁ.
ἕως τὸν Ex? ἐλαιῶνα ποτίσῃς.
Ο. Ρ. 496, 12 127 Α. "Ὁ.
ἕως ἡλικίας γέ[ν]ωντί α]ι. (Marriage Contract.)
*P. R. II, 36, 10-11 145 A.D.
μέϊχρι ἀποδοῖὶ ἡ ὁμολ(ογοῦσα).
*P. Par. 18 quatuor (See P. Par. 71), 4-5 Prob. 2nd A. D.
ἥως ὁ θεῖός ᾽ σοι διαλλαγῇ.
Ο. P. 1488, 22-23 2nd A. D.
ὑπερεθέμην ἔστ᾽ ἂν μάθω.
Ο. Ρ. 1758, 12-14 2nd A. Ὁ.
Kal μὴ ἄφιε ἐποικοδομῆσαι ἕως ἂν παραγένωμαι.
ΡΟ Patton, Prob. 2nd A. D.
yopyevcov τῷ υἱῷ μου, ἕως ἀπέλθωμεν els τὸν τόπον μου.
OF ΒΕ 115:25 2nd A. D.
σπούδασον ἕως οὗ ἀγοράσῃ μοι ᾿Οννῶφρις.
(The editor interprets: ‘‘Take care that O. buys me.” It
looks to me as if a future temporal clause has taken the
place of the object clause of effort.)
Theban Ostraca 133 (G 12) 3 ff. 2nd A.D.
μέτρησον eis δημόσιον θησαυρὸν πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τριάκοντα καὶ κριθῆς
ἀρτάβας εἴκοσι μόνας ἐστ᾽ ἄν σε ἰδ [| - + [Ιησω καὶ μετρήσω τὴν
γῆν pov. (ἴδω was written and then altered. Until seems
to be used here instead of before.)
140 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
ἘΡῚ Tebt, 314) fi. 2nd A. D.
πιστεύω σε μὴ ἀγνοεῖν ὅσον κάμ[αϊτον ἤνεγκα ἕως τὴν [rlept|To]unv
ἐκπλέξω.
*B. G. U. 775, 18-19 2nd A. D.
τὰ ἤδη πρόλημα (= πρόλημμα) ἄφες &xpns ἂν γένομε ext καὶ συνά-
ρωμεν λόγον.
P. Amh. 94, 18 | : 208 A. D.
ἕως οὗ ἀπολυθῶ τῆς yewp|yias.
Ο. P. 1662, 21-22 246 A. Ὁ.
ἔστ᾽ ἂν ἐπανέλθω.
Ο. Ρ. 1689, 22--24 266 A. ἢ.
kuptevovt[as] τῶν καρπῶν ἕως τὰ ὀφε[ιλόμ]ενα ἀπολάβωσι. (Lease).
*O. P. 1668, 12-14 3rd A. Ὁ.
οὔπω οὖν ἔγὼ αὐτῷ συνεθέμην περὶ τούτου, ἄχρι οὗ σοι δηλώσω.
ἘΡ, ΤεΕρΡί. 335, 16 3rd A. ἢ.
ἐπέχειν σε ἄχρις ἄν σοι παραθώμεθα τὰ δίκαια (Petition. ἀξιοῦμεν
precedes.)
B. G. U. 1042, 9 ff. 3rd A. D.
[yelvecbw ἄχρι τοῦ παραθἰένἶ]τα . . . δι᾽ ἐμὲ ἐνθάδε abrdly] κ [ . . JO
Lele.
(The infinitive is to be expected after ἄχρι τοῦ, thinks the
editor. Perhaps; and the subjunctive is possible too. The
text, however, is too uncertain.)
*O. P. 103, 15-16 316 A.D.
κυριεύοντα τῶν καρπῶν ἕως τὰ ὀφιλόμενα ἀπολάβῃς.
(Lease of Land.)
*P. Gen. 56, 17-19 c. 350 A.D.
Kal οὐκ ἐπιτρέποσίν μοι ἐπανελθῖῆν ἕως ὅτου ἀποδῶ τὸ x pews.
(In Addenda ἕως τοῦ is read.)
*P. Lips. 45, 16 371 As Dy
ἕως ἐὰν πέρατος τύχηι.
(For the phrase, see also Nos. 46, 51 and 52.)
FOS.P12995:9 4th A.D.
ἑτυμάσο αὐτὼ ἕως ἔρχῃ. (Ξε ἑτοιμάσω αὐτὸς Again we note until
instead of before, by the time that; other examples may be
found.)
ἘΣ ΒΡ 20.148 4th A. D.
ἄχρις ἂν γνῶ πῶς τὰ κατ᾽ αἰμαὶ ἀποτίθαιται.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 141
TB. GLU. 818, 2 Byz.
alws ἂν ταὐτ[η]ν ποιήσου[σ]ιν.
(Again in lines 3-4. Observe the apparent future indica-
tive.)
O. P. 940, 4 5th A. D
ἕως οὗ μάθῃς.
ΟΥ̓ 107, 3 5th-6th cent. A. D.
ἄχρις ὅταν πληρωθῇ.
P. Cair. 67068, 13-14 6th A. D.
ἕως ὅτε σὺν Ow βλέπω ὑμᾶς εἰς ὄψιν.
P. Cair. 67032, 59 551 Α. ἢ.
ἕως ὅτε εἰς πέρας ἀχθῇ ἡ τοῦ καθ᾽ ἡ[μᾶ]ς πράγματοϊς δίκη].
(Contract).
P. S. I. 824, 4 6th A. D.
ἕως OTE παρέχει.
(Either the indicative in late usage, or due to the hopeless
confusion between indicative and subjunctive.)
On P 21859) ΞΡ Cairn10027),/3 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἕως οὗ πληρώσουσιν.
Ο. Ρ. 1853 (Ξ Ρ. Cair. 10036), 7 6th-7th cent. A. Ὁ.
ἕως οὗ ζητηθῇ τὸ ὅλον τὸ πρᾶγμα.
P. Iand. 20 6th-7th cent. A. D.
ἄχρει ἄν σε ἔχω.
Po land::22,°2 c. 619 A.D.
ἕως ὅτ[1] β[ ἀϊλίω] τίὸν γόϊμων τοῦτον καὶ ἔρχω and line 5 ἕως ὅτι
εἱπάγω (= ὑπάγω). (ἕως ὅτι = ἕως ὅτε) .3
*P, Β. Μ. 1343, 10 709 A.D.
ἄχρις av ἐκπέμψῃς.
ἘΒ, Β. Μ. 1349, 34 710 A.D.
ἕως δ᾽ ἂν ἀποτελέσῃ.
(An inserted δὲ; it is not a connective. Perhaps it came
about by analogy: ὁπόταν ὁπούδαν, ἕως δ᾽ ἄν. There are other
examples. Cp. e.g. Nos. 1353 and 1384.)
P. B. M. 1370, 11-12 710 A. Ὁ.
ἕως 0 (= οὗ) περικυκλὠσωσίν σε -- — — καὶ εὑρεθῇς.
12 Cp, Eisner’s note, P. Iand. 22, and Mayser, p. 80.
1412 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. B. M. 1380, 27-28 711 A.D.
ἄχρις οὗ συναχθῶσιν — — — καὶ στενωθῶσιν.
INFINITIVE IN TIME EXPRESSIONS
The following examples will show how the infinitive may be
used as a substitute for the subjunctive.
O. P. 275, 23-24 66 A.D.
μέχρι τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον πληρωθῆναι.
(Contract of Apprenticeship.)
P. B. M. 483, 34 6164. Ὁ.
ἄχρι πληρῶσαι. (Perpetual Lease.)
_ UNCERTAIN EXAMPLES OF ἕως(ἂν).
P. Petr. II, 40 a, end (= Witk. 16) ΤΠ 5’ Ο-:
περὶ ὑμῶ!ν]) ἐντείνεσθε, ἕως ἂν ὑγιαίνοντας ὑμᾶς ἴδωμεν.
(To be sure, this may be a clause of purpose with ἕως = ὡς.
So Wilamowitz, who translates by dan 11.3 But would ἕως
and ὡς be confused? It is true that ἐπιμέλου σεαυτοῦ ἵνα
ὑγιαίνῃς or ὅπως ὑγιαίνῃς is very frequent in closing letters.
But that is no proof that our example expresses purpose.
I think ours is a still greater variant of the closing greeting
and that ἕως ἂν is used here in its usual sense of until.)
*P ohare, 10 tty Perhaps 2nd A. D.
ἐὰν μάχουσιν per’ ἐσοῦ of ἀδελφοί σου, ἐλθὲ εἰς [τὸν ol]xdv μου Kal
κάτισον és ἴδωμεν τί μξλλομεν ποιεῖν.
(This letter isa gem. For ἐσοῦ cp. P. Fay. 119; O. P. 119,
528, 531, 903; B. G. U. 899; P. Gen. 54, all of 2nd to 4th
centuries A. D. Jannaris, §§532 ff., gives several other
examples, one from the second century B. C., and one from
the 6th A. D.)
What concerns us particularly here, however, is κάτισον és
ἴδωμεν, which is for κάθησον ἕως εἰδῶμεν. Indeed, inspection of the
plate seemed to me to show κάτισον ἕως. We have here an
example of ἕως without ἂν, followed by the subjunctive,
meaning μη].
% Cp. Reden und Vortrage®, Ὁ. 359.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in ihe Non-Literary Papyrit 143
HV.
THE ΟΡΤΑΤΙΝῈ Moop
THE OPTATIVE Moon IN THE PAPYRI
The optative mood is far less common than the subjunctive
in the papyri. The latter in subordinate clauses is used in both
primary and secondary sequence. The optative occurs quite
frequently in wishes, potential expressions, and in less vivid
protases (what we may call possible protases). Other optatives
are comparatively rare. The mood has a new lease of life in
the Byzantine age, being used frequently interchangeably with
the subjunctive. The optatives that do occur frequently (wishes,
potential, possible protases) occur for the most part in certain
well defined phrases and expressions.
OPTATIVE IN PURPOSE CLAUSES
The optative mood is occasionally used to express purpose,
introduced by ἵνα. The examples are for the most part late
and are not numerous. In only a few cases can we observe
secondary sequence.34
(Mabe 2 37 (COL LLV) 12 186 A.D.
iva — — — ἀποδιδόναι δυνηθείην.
(Secondary sequence. This is the Petition of Dionysia.)
ΟΡ 587.) 8 Late 3rd A. D.
μετ]άλημψιν δοίης.
(The context is bad. This is probably a clause of purpose
after secondary tense; perhaps it is in the same construction
as ἵνα ἄρῃς in line 7.)
Ο. Ρ. 891 c. 294 A. D.
καὶ ἵνα τοῦτο εἰδέναι ἔχοις ἐπιστἔλλεταί σοι, φίλτατε.
(It may be an error for ἔχῃς).
C. P. Herm. 97, interlinear, above line 10 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
καὶ ty’ εἰδέναι ἔχοι ποιῆσαι.
% Cp. Harsing, p. 32.
144 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P, Fay. 20, 16-18 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
ἵνα — — — εἴη.
(This is an Imperial Edict, but is not free from errors.)
ἘΡ͵ Thead. 57 (= Ρ. Cair: 10926) 317 A.D.
δι[ὸ] ἐπ{[ι]δ[ δωμί σοι τάδε τὰ Evypaga ἀσφαλιζόμενα περὶ τοὐ[τ]ου
ἵν᾽ ἰδέναι ἔχοις.
*O. P. 60, 9-11 Prob. 323 A. D.
iv’ οὖν εἰδέναι ἔχοιτο καὶ ἤδη τοῦτον ἑλόμενοι φαναιρόν por καταστή-
σήται (= καταστήσητε). (This may of course be a mere error
in spelling.)
P. B. M. 1708, 200 δό ὃ were
ἵνα μὴ εἴη ἄδικον.
(Apparently primary sequence; but ἀγαγέσθαι and ὑπαρχθῆναι
precede.)
OPTATIVE IN GENERAL RELATIVE CLAUSES
The few examples from the Ptolemaic period show this optative
used correctly in relative clauses of the past general type. Almost
all the examples are from the late Byzantine age and will generally
show the verb βουληθείη, which is common also in conditions.
P. B. M. 21, 14 1625 ae
ἀποδοῦναι ἐφ᾽ ols γένοιτό σοι, dependent on ἀπέστειλας. (Sera-
peum Correspondence.)
{πῆ epi WO ase aes eg 118 B.C.
ἔτυπτεν πληγαῖς πλείσταις, εἰς ὃ τύχοι μέρος τοῦ σώματος, ἐμ[ἐ]
κύουσαν.
(Complaint of Injury. The phrase seems to have been
common.)
*O. P. 68, 33-34 131 A.D.
σὺν ols ἐὰν βιβλιομαχή[σ]ῃ προσμεταδοῖμεν.
(Memorandum concerning Claim.)
P. Cair. 67120, 11-12 Byz.
καθ᾽ dv ἂν βουληθείητε τρόπον.
(Sale of Slaves.)
P. B. M. 1023, 4-5 5th-6th cent. A. D.
μεμισθῶσθαι παρά σου ἐφ’ dv ἂν βουληθείης χρόνον (ὁμολογῶ
precedes in Lease.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 145
P. B. M. 991, 14-15 6th A. D.
καὶ δοῦναι τοὺς μετά σε παραλη[ψομένους} [about 20 11.] πολιν Bov-
ληθείης χρῆσθαι τρόπῳ ἀκολύτως.
(Agreement of Sale.)
(It is tempting to read ᾧ ἐὰν for πολιν. Cp. P. B. M. 1686.)
P. Cair. 67024, 45-47 Cso5 TP ASD:
ἄξει (= ἄξεις) — -- — ὅσοι — — — φανεῖεν.
(Imperial Order.)
P. B. M. 483, 75-76 616A. Ὁ.
διοικεῖν αὐτὰς οἵῳ τρόπῳ βουληθείη.
(Perpetual Lease.)
OPTATIVE IN EXPRESSIONS OF FEAR
I have noted very few instances, all of them late.
*P. Tebt. 335, 9 3rd A. Ὁ.
φοβούμενος μὴ ἄρα εὑρεθείη, with main verb in the aorist.
(εὑρεθείη seems to appear fairly freely,—see the use of this
form in possible protases.)
‘OPH 118. 8/1. Late 3rd A. Ὁ.
μήποτε αὐτῶν χρεία γένοιτο εὐθέως αὐτοὺς ἐξέλασον.
ΡΒ 1721..13:: 583 A.D.
εὐλαβούμενοι μήποτε — — — εὑρεθείη.
OPTATIVE IN TEMPORAL EXPRESSIONS
The examples of the optative in time expressions from the
Ptolemaic and Roman periods are very rare; they occur in
careless papyri, and sometimes in addition the text is none too
sound. However, in the Byzantine period there are many
examples of the optative in expressions of future time, intro-
duced in the majority of cases by ὁπόταν, sometimes by ὁπηνίκα
ἂν, occasionally by other words. These seem to be due merely
to the fondness for optatives in this later period, particularly in
the case of certain words; for we find ὁπόταν βουληθείῆ very
freely used.
*P, Tebt. 24, 65 112,83;
ὅτε δὲ καὶ τύχοι.
(Probably a past general temporal clause. The Greek is
bad. The papyrus is hard to interpret.)
146 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
*P. B. M. 1168 (in the third hand, very illiterate) 18 A. D.
ὁπηνίκα ἐὰν eins περιλύσασά με os Kabnk (= ὡς καθήκει.) εὑδεν
συ ἔνκαλω = οὐδέν σοι ἐνκαλῶ is the main expression.)
*B. 6. U. 814, 13-14 3rd A. D.
ταῦτά μοι ἔλεγες, ὅτε ἦλθα [πρός ale, ὅτι πρὸ τοῦ [εἰσέΪλθοις els τὴν
παρεμπολήν σου [πρός ole πέμπω.
(This may be influenced by the secondary tense preceding.
Cp. examples of until with Subjunctive.)
P. Lips. 54, 11-12 c. 376 A. D.
ἐπὶ τῷ αὐτὸν εἶναι ἄχρι [κλ]ηθείηῆ. (Dependent on ὁμολογοῦμεν).
P. R. 114, 8-9 409 A.D.
ἅπερ καὶ συνεθέμην ἰ ἀποδώσειν σοι ὁπό]τ[α]ν βουληθείης.
P. R. 123, 17-18 444 A.D.
ἀποδώσω σοι ὁπόταν βουληθείης.
Ο. Ρ. 1961, 19-20 487 A.D.
καὶ ὁπηνίκα δὲ ἂν βουληθείητε παραδώσω.
(Lease).
O. P. 1963, 10-11 c. 500 A. D.
καὶ ὁπόταν βουληθείηται παραδόσω.
(Lease).
P. B. M. 1319, 11 545 A.D.
ἅπερ σοι ἀποδώσομεν -- — — ὁπόταν [β]ουληθείης.
(Acknowledgment of Loan.)
P. Cair. 67094, 13-14 559 AND:
καὶ ὁπόταν ζητηθείη παρ᾽ ὑμῶν καὶ μὴ εἰὑρ]ηθ[εἰ]η, ἑτοίμως ἔχομεν.
(Bail).
P. S. I. 709, 23-25 566 A. D.
καὶ ὁπόταν βουληθείης ὁμολογῶ — — — παραδοῦναι.
(Contract for Rent of House.)
P. B. M. 1727, 28 583 A. D.
ἐπὰν δὲ παρασταίη τῷ τῶν ὅλων δεσπότῃ Χριστῷ ὅπερ ἀπείη τινὰ
ἐξ ἡμῶν τέλει τοῦ βίου χρήσασθαι, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τὸν ζῶντα ἔχειν καὶ κατέχειν.
(Joint Will).
O. P. 1968, 9-10 6th A. D.
καὶ παραδώσω τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ ὑπερφυείᾳ [ὅταν βουληθείη ὡς καὶ παρεί-
ληφα. (Lease).
P. Amh. 149, 16 6th A. D.
ὁπηνίκα ἂν ἀπολαβεῖν βουληθείη ἀνυπερθέτως, with ἀποδώσω as
main verb. (Loan of Money.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 147
P. B. M. 1736, 12-13 611 A.D.
ἅπερ ἑτοίμως ἔχομεν mapacxel[ty clo. ὁπόταν βουληθείης τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν
καθ᾽ ἕκ[αστο)ν ἐνιαυτὸν χρ[υ]σοῦ τριμήσιον.
(Loan).
Ρ. Β. Μ. 1345, 24-25 710 A. D
ὅτε καὶ πόρρω αὐτῶν ὑπάρχει καὶ ob συνπαρείη αἰ ὑ]τοῖς.
(A curious and confused expression of time, introduced by
dre).
OPTATIVE OF WISH
The optative is used to express a future (possible) wish at
all periods. Some of the expressions are of interest.
χαίροις
This is used in the greetings of letters from the first century
on; my last example is from the third or fourth century. χαίρειν
is of course at all times the common expression.
P. B. M. 144 ist? A.D.
χαίροις, κύριε pou ᾿Αθηνόδωρε.
Oo P1063 2nd-3rd cent. A. D.
χαίροις, τέκνον ᾿Αμόι.
ἘΡ Tebt. 417 3rd A. D.
[xat]pous πολλά.
*P, Flor. 140, 93 End 3rd A. D.
χαίροις, κύριξ μου ᾿Αλῦπι, ᾿Ανουβίων σε προσαγορεύω.
ΟΥ̓ 112 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
χαίροις, κυρία μου.
Eisner in the note on P. Iand. 12 says that χαίροις or χαῖρε
is found in the Roman age, but not often. However, most of
my examples of χαίροις are of the third century A. D. Ziemann
says,35 perhaps rightly, that this usage belongs to uneducated
men. Exler,3° however, says that χαίροις and χαῖρε were not
necessarily employed by the uneducated. The truth may be
that we have here an example of popular idiom.
% Cp. Ziemann, pp. 295f.
86 Cp. Exler, p. 134.
148 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
γίνοιτο, γένοιτο
These occur not often; and most examples belong to the
Ptolemaic time.
P. Petr. III, 42, H (8). Mid. III B.c.
ἀλλὰ βελτίονα .. . ] ἐκείνων γένοιτ[ο ws] θέλω.
(= Witk. 6).
ΒΡ αι 26. 90 163 B.C.
ὑμῖν δὲ γίνοιτο κρατεῖν.
(Petition).
PPar 30 tot Usp Z 9) 161 B. ς΄.
ὑμῖν δὲ γένοιτο κρατεῖν πάσης ἧς ἂν αἱρῆσθε χώρας καὶ καταγηρᾶν
κτὰ. (In U. P. Ζ. the reading is γίνοιτο).
*P. Par. 45 (= Witk. 37) ΤΟΎ Ἐ Ὁ
τὰ πράσεις, μὴ ἐπιγέν[οιϊτο (ἐπιγ[{]ν[οἱ]το Wilcken).
*P. Giess. 77, 8-9 2nd A. D.
γένοιτο δ᾽ εμέ σε ἐπελθ[οῦσαν] προσκυνῆσαι.
Ox Pao25s4iit 5th-6th cent. A. D.
φανέρωσόν por τὴν παρά σοι ἀλήθιαν εἰ βούλῃ με ἀπελθεῖν] εἰς Χιοὺτ
ἢ εὑρίσκω σε σὺν ἐμοὶ] πράττοντα (καὶ) εὐμενῆν" γένοιτο, αθ.
(Christian Prayer.)
μὴ γένοιτο
This occurs very seldom, and only in late examples.
P. Cair. 67312, lines 51 f. δύ Α te
οἰὐϊκ ἐφ᾽ [ὕ]βρι τινὶ, μὴ γέν[ο]ιτο, ἀλλὰ διὰ οὕτω μοι δεδόχθαι (Will).
P. Cair. 67151, line 178 570 A. D.
μὴ γένοιτο αὐτῇ τοῦτο μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν τελευτήν. (Will).
ὃ μὴ γείνοιτο
This occurs sometimes in place of ὃ μὴ εἴη (for which see p. 152)
These examples are typical.
B. G. U. 741,32 144 A. Ὁ.
καὶ ἐὰν, & μὴ γείνοιϊτο], συμβῇ κτλ.
Goran’ 39 266 A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ, ὃ μὴ γείνοιτο, &Bpoxos γένηται
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 149
ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ ὅρκῳ
This is very common from the first century A. D. onwards.
This occurs, as is to be expected, in Declarations on Oath,
Affidavits, Census Returns, Reports, and Surety-Bonds. We
are led to believe that the form of oath is much earlier, upon
consideration of the following:.
P. Hib. 65, 20 ff. c. 265 B.C.
εἰ δὲ μὴ] [με]τρήσεται μιὲ] [τῶ]. ὅρκωι ἔνοχον [[εἶν]αι καὶ εἰσπράσ-]
[σεσ]θαι.
Exs. O. P. 239, 12 66 A. D.
ἢ ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ Spx(y).
*P. Ryl. 82, 14 1134. Ὁ.
ἢ ἔνωχοι εἴημεν τῶι ὥρκωι.
(Declaration of Irrigation Officials.)
B. G. U. 581, 12 133 A.D.
ἢ ἔνοχος a. . [.] τῷ ὅ[ρ]κωι.
(εἴην should be supplied, to fill the lacuna, as is done in
Chrestom. II, 354.)
P. B. M. 301, 15 c. 140 A. D.
ἢ ἐνσχ[εἸἰθείην τῷ ὅρκῳ.
(I believe this should be read ἔνοχος εἴην).
O. P. 82, 7-8 Mid. 3rd A. D.
ἢ ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ ὅρκῳ.
*O. P. 1261 325 A.D.
ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ.
(It is very interesting that from this time on τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ
takes the place of τῷ ὅρκῳ).
O. P. 1265, 23-24 336.Α. ἢ.
ἢ ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ.
ἘΡ͵ Β. Μ. 1247, 16 345 A. D.
& (Ξ- ἢ) [ἔνοχοι εἶμεν τῷ θείῳ dp|x]y. (The duplicate has eivoxo εἶμεν).
P. Amh. 140, 17-18 349 A.D.
A [evloxole| εἴημεν [τῷ ὅρκῳ τούτῳ καὶ τῷ]περὶ rov[rolu κινδύνῳ.
(In view of our other examples, and particularly our next
reference, I believe the editor has filled the lacuna incor-
rectly, and that we should read: [τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ καὶ TQ}).
*P, Amh. 139, 20 350 A. D.
vn W n , wv 4’ n 4 ,
ἢ ἔνοχοι εἴημεν τῷ θίῳ ὅρκῳ καὶ τῷ περὶ τούτου κινδύνῳ.
150 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. B. M. 1793, 17-18 472 A.D.
ἐὰν δέ μὴ [ἀπο] [[δίδωμ]ι Evoxo[s et]nv τῷ θεί[ῳ ὅρκῳ] κτλ.
ἘΡ, Flor. 288, 10 6th A. D.
[ἢ ἔϊνοχως ein<v> τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ καὶ τῷ -- -- -- κινδύνῳ.
Occasionally we may find the future indicative instead of the
optative; the expression is not in the form of a wish (prayer).
P. Lips. 52, 16-17 312 ἃ. De
εἰ δὲ [μ]ὴ, ἔνοχος ἔσομαι [τ]ῷ θεί[ῳ] ὅρκῳ κτλ.
εὔορκοῦντι μέν μοι εὖ εἴη
This phrase, occurring in Affidavits, Declarations, Census-
returns, and the like, in which an oath is necessary, belongs to
the Ptolemaic and early Roman age. My examples run from
251 B. Ὁ. to 110 A. D. Apparently the new style demanded
ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ ὅρκῳ.
Ῥ. 5.1. 515; 16-17 251,5. Ὁ.
εὐορκοῦντι μέν μοι εὖ εἴη.
P. Petr. II, 46a, 5 200 B.C.
εὐορκοῦντι μέν μοι εὖ εἴη ἐφιορκοῦντι δὲ τἀναντία.
Of Ps 29.0.02) 25 19 A.D.
εὐορκοῦντι μέμ μοι εὖ εἴη, [ἐϊπιορκοῦντίι δὲ τ]ὰ ἐναντία.
*O. P. 260; 16-17 59 Α. ἢ.
εὐορκοῦντι μέν μοι εὖ εἴη, ἐφιορκ[οὔ]ντι δὲ τἀνεαντία. (sic).
O. P. 263, 16-17 ὙΠ] ΔΌΣ
[εἸὐορκούσῃ μέν μοι εὖ εἴη, ἐ[πι]ορκούσῃ δὲ τὰ ἐναντία.
P. Ryl. 108, 19-20 1104. τὸ
εὐορκοῦϊσι] μὲν ἡμεῖν εὖ e[t]n, [ἐπ] ι[ορκοῦσι δὲ τ]ὰ ἐν[αν]τία.
Nore. The idiom seems to have been well known in the ancient Greek world.
Cp. the inscription from Delphi, of about 400 B. C. (S. G. D. I. 2561, Michel
995) 15 ff.: εὐορκέοντι μέμ μοι ἀγαθὰ εἴη, al δ᾽ ἐφιορκέοιμι, [Πά]παντα κακὰ ἀντὶ τῶν
ἀγαθῶν.
εἴη μέν μοι ὑγιαίνοντι διοικεῖν
This phrase, εἴη μέν μοι ὑγιαίνοντι (or ὑγιαίνοντα) with a follow-
ing infinitive (διοικεῖν, οἰκονομεῖν, and the like), is characteristic
of Wills. I find many examples of the Ptolemaic period, but
only scattered examples thereafter, and these likely to alter
the phrase.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 151
P. Petr. III, 5 (a), 10-11 237 Β. (.
εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι αὐτὸν τ[ὰ] [[ἐμαυ]τοῦ διοικεῖν.
P. Petr. I, 21, 4-5 23798; Ce
εἴη plév μοι ὑγιαίνοντι ἐμὲ τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ ὑπαρχόντ[ων] [[κύ]ριον εἶναι
διοικοῦντα κτλ.
P. Petr. I, 19, 24-25 JAR BAC.
εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντα αὐτὸν τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ [[διοικ]εῖν, ἐὰν δέ τι πάθω
ἀνθρώπινον καταλείπω.
(This is the complete formula.)
P. B. M. 219 (b) 18. 6.
[ εἴη μέν μοι ζῶντ]ι καὶ ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι.
P. Cair, 10388 (Archiv I, Ptol. Pap. in Gizeh Museum, No. 3)
͵ 123 Β. Ce
εἴη μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι. ;
Ο. Ρ. 104, 8-9 96 A. D.
ein μέν μοι ὑγιαίνουσαν κυρί[α]ν ε[ΐν]αι τῶν ἐμαυτῆς χρᾶσθαι καὶ
διοικεῖν περὶ αὐτῶν καθ᾽ dv [ἐὰ]ν αἱρ[ῶμα]ι τρόπον.
P. Lips. 29, 4-5 295 A.D.
εἴη μέν μοι ὑγιαί[νειν] καὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων [ἀπολαύειν].
P. Β. Μ. 77, 14 8th cent. A. Ὁ.
εἴη τοίνυν ἐμὲ ζῆν καὶ ὑγιαίνειν.
(Will of Abraham, Bishop of Hermonthis.)
The following example is of interest, because of the confused
construction.
P. B. M. 1727, 25-26 583 A. D.
βουλευσάμενοι ὡς εἴη μὲν ἡμᾶς ζῶντας καὶ ὑγιαίνοντας ἐναπολαύειν
χρησόμεθα πάντων κτλ. This is an Agreement, like a Joint Will.
χρησόμεθα should be χρήσασθαι, as the main verb is ὁμολογούμεθα.
ὡς ein like an object clause after βουλευσάμενοι; but we have no
other instances of this. As this is the formula of the pious
wish in Wills, I am inclined to think that we have here the
quoted wish after βουλευσάμενοι.
ὃ μὴ εἴη
ὁ μὴ εἴη, a formula of wish or prayer to avert disaster, occurs
particularly in leases of the late period, although it is not con-
fined to these. I find only a few examples before the 6th century
A. D.
152 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrs
O. P. 1473, 12-13 201 ACD:
ἐὰν δὲ, ὃ μὴ εἴη, ἐκ διαφορᾶς ἀπαλλαγῶσι ἀλλήλων.
(Contract for Remarriage.)
P. Lips.:29,'5: 295 A. ἢ.
ἐὰν δὲ, ὃ μὴ εἴη, συμβαίη z[i]uor ἀνθρώπινον, ὅπερ ἀπεύχ[ο]μαι. (Will).
P. Β. Μ. 1689, 18 527 A. D.
ἐν τελείῳ καὶ ἀβροχικῷ ὃ μὴ εἴη.
P. B. M. 991, 19-20 6th cent. A. D.
εἰ δὲ τις ὠμοι εἰοι ἐκ | ἧἾμου κυρειώτερος φανείη.
(Sale. As the editor says, the reading is uncertain, but this
is intended for ὃ μὴ εἴη.)
P. Hamb. 68, 15 After 550 A. p.
ἀβροχικῷ, ὃ μὴ εἴη.
(Lease).
O. P. 125 (= P. Cair. 10,062), 16 560 A. D.
el δὲ, ὅπερ ἀπείη, συμβῇ.
(Observe the variant in this Indemnity of Surety).
P. Grenf. I, 57, 11 561 A. ἢ.
τῷ δὲ ἀβρόχῳ, τὸ μὴ εἴη.
(Lease).
PSBUM e715 8th cent. A. D.
ἐπὰν δὲ, ὅπερ ἀπεύχομαι, ἀνθρώπινόν τι πάθω κτλ.
(Compare this Will with P. Lips. 29).
εἴη
There are a few examples scattered through all periods.
P.S. I. 495, 23-24 258 Bac:
εἴη δέ σοι εὐτυχεῖν Kal ἐπιτυγχάνειν ἐμ πᾶσιν
P. Par. 63 (Col. XI), 64 c. 100 B.c.
εἴη oltv] καὶ εἰς τὸ λοιπὸν.
(After this the text is bad).
O. P. 939, 6 4th cent. A. D.
καὶ εἴη διὰ παντὸς ἡμᾶς χάριτας ὁμο[λογοῦντα)ς διατελεῖν.
(This is a dignified and polished Christian letter, and shows
the influence of the New Testament.)
P. B. M. 1791, 2 7th cent. A. D.
εἴη δὲ ὡς ἔχω τὰ πἰ[α]ιδία
(Bad text follows.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 153
O. P. 125 (= P. Cair. 10,062), 16 560 A. Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ, ὅπερ ἀπείη, συμβῇ.
(Indemnity of Surety).
FORMS OF δίδωμι
These examples are more interesting for the forms of δίδωμι
in the optative than for anything else. There are not many
examples; most of them are from Ptolemaic times.
ΡΟ ΘΟ 9225. 6 258 B.C.
αὕτη δέ σοι doin ἐπαφροδισίαν.
P. Leid. B (Col. III), 18-19 164 B.C.
ὃς διδοίη σοι μετὰ τῆς Ἴσιος νίκην, κράτος τῆς οἰκουμένης ἁπάσης.
ΡΥ 30,.12-13 162 B.C.
περὶ μὲν τούτων διδοῖ σοι ὁ Σάραπις καὶ τῇ Ἵσι ἐπαφροδισίαν, χάρειν,
μορφήν.
(P. Leid. D. is another copy, or rather the original of this
letter, as the note on P. Par. 30 says. P. Leid. D. reads:
περὶ μὲν οὖν τούτων dot σοι ὁ Σ. Kal ἡ Ἴσις κτλ.
*P. Β. Μ. 35, 29-30 161 B.C.
σοὶ δὲ ὁ Σάραπις . . . δαποδωσι xape[ty] καὶ μορφὴν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα.
In Add. et Corrig. the editor suggests reading ἀνταποδώσει.
I think, however, ἀνταποδοίη was intended; the copy has
διδοῖ σοι.
P. Vat. E, end. c. 160 B.C.
ὑμῖν δὲ ἥ τε Ἴσις καὶ ὁ Σάραπις οἱ μέγιστοι τῶν θεῶν κυριεύειν δι-
δώησαν πάσης χώρας ἧς ὁ ἥλιος ἐφορᾷ, καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν διαπαντός.
P. Vat. F, end. c. 160 B. Cc.
σοὶ δὲ ἡ Ἴσις καὶ ὁ Σάραπις καὶ οἱ δώδεκα θεοὶ of ἐν Ἡρακλέους
πόλει δοίησαν κυριεύειν κτλ.
(All of these examples except the first are from the Serapeum
Correspondence.)
Here is one late example; or should we regard both of these
verb forms as subjunctive?
*P, Gen. 51, 26 c. 350 A. D.
ὁ θεὸς ἀποδιδῖ σ[ο]ι πρὸς τὴν ἐϊλ]εημοσύνην σου καὶ ἀνυψὶ σε eis τὰ
μείζωνα.
154 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
χαρίζομαι
P. Grenf. II, 36, 19-20 (= Witk. 54) 95 B.C.
τὰ δ᾽ ἄλλα χαρίζοισθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν ἐπιμελόμενοι ty’ ὑγιαίνητε.
(Conclusion of Letter.)
I place here the following curious example:
P. Iand. 13 end. 4th cent. A. Ὁ.
6S xapifwy μοι πετόμενος ἔρχοιο. (Is Os xapitwy a nominative
absolute? The MS. has some curious marks here. See
Eisner |.c. Perhaps it should be punctuated 6s, xapitwy κτλ.
What is the meaning then of 6s and the signs? Wilcken,
Archiv. VI, 295, would read 6(€)6 x4pr<v> ζῶν μοι πετόμενος
ἔρχοιο. Iam inclined to prefer the first.)
OTHER EXAMPLES OF OPTATIVE OF WISH
PavataD: c. 160 B.C.
ἀνθ᾽ Gv ὁ Lapams καὶ ἡ “lows ἀντιλάβοιντο καὶ σοὶ καθ᾽ ἣν ἔχεις
εὐσέβειαν μὴ ὑπεριδεῖν ἡμᾶς θλιβομένους.
(Serapeum Correspondence.)
P. Flor. 140 (Recto), 2nd hand 3rd A. D.
ἐρρωμένος μοι διατελοῖς μετὰ τῶν φιλτάτων κύριξ μου ἀσύγκριτε
"Αλυπι.
*P. Gen. 62, 13 c. 350 A.D.
ἀλλὰ μέλοι πάσης τιμῆς Kal edrag[tals.
*P. Heid. 6, end 4th cent. A. D.
ἐρρωμένον ce ἡ Bia πρόνοια guddéalt] ἐπὶ μέγιστον χρόνον ἐν κῶ
χῶ, κύριε ἀγαπητίε].
Ο. Ρ. 939, 10 4th cent. A. D.
συγγνώμην δὲ, κύριξ μου, σχοίης μοι.
*B. G. U. 984, 26 ἢ. 4th cent. A. D.
ἐρρωμένον ce|[...] θ᾽ ὑπόνοια διαφυλάξιεν ἀφθο] [νητ΄... ], after
which text is bad.
(Schubart suggests διαφυλάξειν. Wilcken reads [ὁ θεὸς x]a6’
ὑπόνοια <v > διαφυλάξι ἐν. Then we should have a subjunctive
expressing wish—a construction which occurs in papyri of
the Byzantine age. Perhaps the verb is διαφυλάξειεν.)
*P. Cair. 67001, 22 5144. ἢ.
καὶ μὴ εὑρηθείη τε οἱανδήποτε βλάβην ἀπὸ τῶν 'ar&v κτημάτων.
(βλάβην = βλάβη is the subject. Cp. line 26.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 155
P. Cair. 67066, 5 500+ a. ΡΥ.
μοι TapaxAlivere|y? οὖν ἡ σὴ ἀδελφότης κελεῦσαι.
*P. Cair. 67006, 69-71 Cw22AeD:
εἰ δὲ βουλιθείη τ᾽ ἡ εὐγενηστάτη Θεάνους μήτηρ — — — δωρήσασθαι
αὐτῷ ἄλλο μέρος ------- εἰ δὲ μὴ δωρῆθαι [= δωρῆται], ---- -- ἔδοξεν κτλ.
(The editor takes the optative as a wish. There is no
apodosis.)
P. Cair. 67024, 48 ff. Caos ALD:
καὶ τά τ᾽ ἐς χρήματα βλέποντα θεραπεῦσαι τοῖς δεομένοις -- — —, ὑπέρ TE
τῶν ἔγκλημάτων νομίμοις ποιναῖς ὑποθεῖναι φροντιείη τοὺς μὲν
ταῦτα ἡμαρτηκότας. (The editor says that φροντιείη is an
Atticism for φροντισείη.)
Peg. 14072 6th cent. A. D.
θεός μοι μαρτυροῖ.
(This may of course be for μαρτυρεῖ; but the letter does not
have etacistic mistakes, though it contains other errors.)
Most of these examples were from letters. This would show
that in the popular language the optative mood continued to be
useful to express a wish.
THE POTENTIAL OPTATIVE
The potential optative is exceedingly common in the Ptolemaic
period, particularly in the third century B. C. in certain phrases
in letters. These phrases are καλῶς ἂν ποιήσαις with participle,
χαρίζοιο ἄν μοι with participle, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, εὖ ἂν ἔχοι, εἴη ἂν ws
θέλω, εἴη ἂν τὸ δέον. The first of these is by farthe most common.
There are almost no examples of any of these from a later
period; the few examples that I can find are very exceptional.
Of potential optatives in other phrases there are occasional
examples, few in number, of every period.
I shall give only a few characteristic examples of each of the
phrases.
καλῶς ἂν ποιήσαις
We find also καλῶς ποιήσεις; but the optative is a more
polite form.
P. Hib. 64, 8-9 264 B.C.
καλῶς ἂν οὖν ποιήσαις δούς.
156 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papriy
Ρ. 5.1. 504, 4-6 254 ac
καλῶς ἂν ποιήσαις ἐπιστείλας ἀποδοῦναι ἡμῖν. :
ῬΎΗΙΟΣ 191 c. 245 B.C.
καλῶς ἂν ποιήσα[ι5], εἴ σοι φαίνεται, συντάξας.
ῬΧΘΥΤΟ 603 III B.c.
καλῶς οὖν ἂν ποιήσαις, εἴ σοι δοκεῖ, γράψας.
ΒΘ 716 95 A.D.
εὖ ποιήσαις πέμψας μοι ἃ ἠρώτησά σε Kal ἄμην.
(This is the only late example. The letter is correctly
written; ποιήσαις, not ποιήσεις, seems to have been written.)
Notr.—The phrase goes back to classical times; perhaps it was commonly
used in the language of the people.
Cp. Hdt. 5, 24 εὖ ἐποίησας ἀπικόμενος.
Xen. Cyr. 7, 4, 13 καλῶς ποιεῖς προνοῶν.
Pl. Phaed. 60 ς εὖ γ᾽ ἐποίησας ἀναμνήσας pe.
Ar. Pax 1311 εὖ ποιεῖς δὲ καὶ σὺ φράζων.
Acts of the Apostles, 10, 33 σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος.
χαρίζοιο ἂν
P. 5.1. 489, 8 2538) Bac
χαρίζοιο δ᾽ ἄν μοι φροντίσας.
ῬΗΘΗ 9769 250 B.C.
πάνυ δή μοι χαρίζοι᾽ ἄν.
P.S. I. 526, 13-14 III B.c.
γράφε δέ kal σὺ ἡμῖν τί ἄν σοι ποιοῦντες χαριζοίμεθα.
P. Pars 42 Prob. 156 B. Cc.
χαρίζου δ᾽ ἄν καὶ τοῦ σώματος ἐπιμελόμενος.
(Probably this was read incorrectly, and χαρίζοιο should
be read in the papyrus.)
καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι
P. Hib. 63, 10 ff. C, 2658. 6.
εἰ οὗν οὕτως πολιτευσόμεθα ἀλλήλοις καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι
ΡΗΒΙ ΒΟΟΝΊ 253.5. Ge
καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι εἰ ἔρρωσαι.
ῬΠΘΗ 3642 251 π|6 0:
εἰ ἔρρωσαι, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 157
P. Petr. II, 40 a (= Witk. 16) III B.c
el ἔρρωσθε πάντες, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί.
εὖ ἂν ἔχοι
ΒΕ 3515 ; ΟΠ ΟἹ
εἰ ἔρρωσαι, εὖ ἂν ἔχοι, ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ ἡμεῖς.
(We might call this the Potential Optative in the Salutation,
characteristic of Letters.)
P. S. I; 415, 2-3 III B.c.
el Eppwoar καὶ τὰ ἄλλα σοι κατὰ νοῦν ἐστίιν εἰὖ ἂν ἔχοι.
There are two late examples of the phrase, used somewhat
differently.
P. Flor. 214, 11-12 3rd cent. A. D.
μὲν οὖν τὸ ἀμερίμνου ἔχῃς tapa[ εὖ ἂν ἔχοι.
Ῥ.5.:.1:..2900;24 End of 3rd cent. A. Ὁ.
καὶ εἰ μὲν ἠνέχθη σοι, εὖ ἂν [ἔχοι ha? ]βεῖν.
In P. Alex. 3 (= Witk. 23 and P. Prk. 4304), of the third
century B. C., it would be better to supply εὖ ἂν ἔχοι than
εὖ ἂν ein; the latter lacks support.
ein ἂν ws θέλω
P. Hib. 79 ς. 260 Β.6.
εἰ ἔρρωσαι καὶ ὧν πρόνοιαν ποιεῖ καὶ τἄλλα σοι κατὰ λόγον ἐστὶν,
εἴς η}» ἂν ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω καὶ τοῖς θεοῖς πολλὴ χά[ρι]ς, ὑγίαινον δὲ
καὶ [αἸ]ὐτός.
P. Petr. III, 53 n (= Witk 18) lilfaae:
el ἔρρωσαι — — — εἴη ἂν ὡς βούλομαι.
P. Goodsp. 4 (= P. Cair. 10248) ID Buc,
εἴη ἂν ws αἱρούμεθα.
P. Β. M. 42 (= Witk. 26) oad WA Wig 3b ἰδ.
eine ἂν ὡς Tots θεοῖς εὐχομένη διατελῶ.
*P, Par. 44 (= Witk. 36) 15atns Cc
ele ἂν ὡς βούλομαι.
εἴη ἂν τὸ δέον
Posing 242 B.C.
εἰ ἔρρωσαι καὶ τἄλλά σοι κατὰ τρόπον συναντᾶι, εἴη ἂν τὸ δείον"
ὑγίαινον δὲ καὶ αὐτός.
158 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Par. 42 Prob. 156 B. c.
εἰ ἐρρωμένως σοι καὶ τἄλλα κατὰ λόγον ἐστὶν, τὸ δέον ἂν εἴη" καὐτοὶ
δὲ ὑγιαίνομεν.
OTHER POTENTIAL OPTATIVES
P. S. I. 495, 20 ΦΟΒΙΒΟ:
οὐ γὰρ ἂν εἰδείης.
P.S. I. 441, 23-25 ΤΠ 8. Ὁ:
σοὶ γάρ ἀεὶ τὸ χρήσιμον προσαγγέξλλων οὐκ ἂν παυσαίμην.
P. Par. 64 c. 160 B. α.
διαλάβοις ἂν and γένοιτο 8’ ἂν.
(In lines 37-38 we have a complete future less vivid con-
ditional sentence; this is most unusual. This is a careful
and educated letter.)
O. P. 472, 20 c. 130 A. D.
καὶ παρὰ Tivos ἂν εἴποι κτλ;
(Speech of an Advocate.)
ΒΟ ΤΑ ὁ 167 A. D.
καὶ αὐτοὶ δύνεσθ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο ε. [ (= δύναισθε), and line 8 καὶ γὰρ ἂν
ἄλογον εἴη. (Imperial Letter.)
P. Lips. 119, Verso, Col. II 274 A.D.
τούτους πῶς οὐκ ἂν πολλῷ δικαιότερον — — — βιοῦν προάγοιτο;
(Content is uncertain; perhaps it is a rhetorical fragment,
judging from the style.)
O. P. 1469, 3 298 A. D.
μόλις μὲν ἂν — — — δυνηθεῖμεν.
(Petition).
P. B. M. 213 (Verso), 8 Late 3rd A. D.
6 τι ἄν καταλάβοιμι.
(The main verb is κελεύσω followed by an infinitive.)
*P. Fay. 20, 18-19 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
μᾶλλον yap δὴ καὶ μᾶλλον [oli τῶν ἐθνῶν ἡγεμόνες καταμάθοιεν ἂν
——-— εἰ ἀποτέτακται. (Imperial Edict. There are many
errors in spelling and construction, as the editor says.)
*P. B. M. 408, 18-20 c. 346 A. D.
ὃ οἶδας σὐμφορόν σοι εἶναι ποίησον, καὶ εἰ θέλις ἀποστῖλαι ἢ οὗ σὺ
ἂν εἰδίης.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 159
P. B. M. 1658, 6-7 4th A.D.
Kal ἀπόντος yap τίς τῶν ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἂν θελήσιεν προσομιλεῖν [clor;
(ἀπόψτος belongs to the preceding sentence; and this one
should begin ris yap; this is a curious slip of the pen. The
editor seems to be right.)
P. Mon. 12, 40 591 A. D.
χρήσασθαι @ ἐὰν ἕλοισθε τρόπῳ.
(Sale of a House.)
P. Grenf. I, 65, 5 6th-7th cent. A. Ὁ.
ὅπερ ἂν εἴη.
OPTATIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
It is not difficult to find instances of the optative in indirect
quotation after a secondary tense, introduced by ὅτι; and in-
stances of the optative in indirect question after a secondary
tense. Most instances are from the Ptolemaic age; but occasional
examples occur thereafter.
P. Petr. II, 13 (6) ΟἸ 2555, ΟΣ
ἀναστείλαντος δὲ much text wanting] ὅτι εἴη λυσιτελὴς ἡ ἐργολαβία.
(‘This letter is couched in much more ceremonious terms
than most of the business letters to Cleon.””—Mahaffy.)
*P, Petr. II, 20 (3rd Col.) 25218 oC.
πυνθανομένου δέ μου Tov παραυτου ευτι συντεθεικὼς αὐτῶι εἴης.
(Such is the reading of Mahaffy; but Harsing, p. 31, reads
thus, rightly I think {rou} παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ εἴ τι κτλ. The inter-
pretation is: When I asked of him whether you had
made any agreement with him. Mahaffy calls this Rough
Minutes of Official Correspondence.)
liad 7) 50 250 B.C.
ἔγραψας ἡμῖν ὅτι οὐ δυνατὸν εἴη.
P. Hamb. 27, beg. 250. B.C.
ὅτι — — — ἀποσυστήσαις. (Dependent on ἔγραψάς μοι).
P. Eleph. 13, mid. 223. ES
ἐπυνθανόμην τοῦ Σανῶτος εἴ τι βούλοιτο ἐν τοῖς καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς τόποις.
Peretrei lil Probaliiva..c:
εἰσελθόντα — — — ἀναλαβόντα τὰ ἴδια ὑπομνήματα εὑρεῖν ὅτι ἐν τῆι
θίβει «εν » εἴη τὸ ἀργύριον ὃ wiovro ἀπολωλέναι.
(Recovery of Lost Property.)
160 Use of Subjunciive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
P. Par. 35, 29-30 163 B.C.
πυνθανομένων δ᾽ ἡμῶν τοῦ χάριν εἴησαν εἰσπορευσάμενοι, ἀπεκρίθησαν.
(Petition. The reading in U. P. Z. 6 is εἰσπεπορευμένοι ; this
is a later editing of the same papyrus.)
B. G. U. 347, Col. II, 10-11 171 A.D.
ἐπύθετο τῶν παρόνΪτω)ν κορυφαίων ——— [el] σημ[ εἴ]όν τι ἔχοι ὁ παῖς.
(Document dealing with Circumcision.)
Β. G. U. 1093, 20-21 265 A. D.
tis εἴη Ἑὔπορος καὶ τίνος μητρός;
(The interpretation is not perfectly clear.)
OuP el 2655 tee 336 A. D.
ἐπέθετό μοι ἡ σὴ ἐμμέλε[ια eyypalows δηλῶσαι πόθεν εἴην π[α]ρ[ῃ]-
ρηκὼς τὸ προκίμενον ἀξίωμα.
(Declaration on Oath.)
*P. B. M. 1249, 4 345 A. ἢ.
ἐπιζητοῦντί σοι tives] εἴησαν γεωργοί.
(Return of Names with Oath. This is regarded as past;
but the main verb, which occurs in line 8 is ἐπιδίδωμι).
The next three examples are not clear.
P. Cair. 67087, 10 543 A. D.
ἐπερώτησα τὴν αἰτίαν δι᾽ ἣν ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον ἱτρόπον Kak ?|iorws ἐλυμή-
VOLTO ὁ καρπός.
(The editor says: ‘‘This strange form is a certain reading.
The scribe appears to have confused the middle and passive
voices.”’ Cp. 1. 8 λελυμηθέντα. The optative seems here to
have assumed an augment.)
P. Mon. 6, 41-43 583 A. Ὡς
ὃς ἔλεγεν Ταπίαν τὴν ἐναγομένην τεθαῤῥηκέναι αὐτῷ, ὅτι βούλοιτο
μετενεγκεῖν τὰ πράγματα ------ καὶ ὅτι -- -- -- μετεκομίσθη ἐν νυκτί.
Ib. 36 ff.
παρήγαγον ᾿Ι[ἀ]κκωβον -- -- -- καὶ ᾿Ιακὼβ Μακαρίου ἀπὸ Συήνης οὐδὲν
ἕτερον λέγοντας ἢ ὅτι εἴησαν ἀκηκοότες -- -- -- ὅτι ἐν εὐπορίᾳ ἦν
Ἰακὼβ ὁ μακαριώτατος.
A few examples seem to show the optative in the subordinate
clause (condition) influenced by the principal verb in a secondary
tense.
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 161
P. Par. 15, 59-60 51. ΒΟ:
ἔλεγον εἰ καί τις θείη μηδεμίαν ἐπιφέρειν αὐτοὺς συγγραφήν, ἀρκεῖσθαι.
(Legal Process.)
O. P. 1252, 29 (Recto) c. 290 A. D.
προσέταξεν εἰ μὴν (= μὲν) εἴημεν διασεισθέντες -- — — ἥκειν.
(Official Correspondence.)
OPTATIVE IN POSSIBLE PROTASIS
The optative mood, introduced by εἰ (rarely ἐάν), expressing
a possible contingency, is very common in the Byzantine
period; occasional examples occur earlier. The apodosis is
generally in the indicative, present or future. Certain fixed
phrases occur, some of which (as εἰ οὕτω τύχοι) are rather
parenthetical. Examples of this optative in Ptolemaic times
are hard to find.
el βουληθείην
*P. B. M. 234, 16-17 c. 3464. D,
γεινώσκων ws εἰ μὴ βουληθίης τούτους ἀποστῖλαι ἀνενεχθήσεται
εἰς γνῶσιν τοῦ αὐτοῦ κυρίου μου [δο]ῦκος.
P. Flor. 384, 104--5 5th? A. D.
εἰ δὲ βουληθείης σὺ ὁ μισθωσάμενος.
(Lease. In apodosis is ἐξεῖναί μοι.)
Bebe wis i218 569 A.D,
ἐξεῖναι δὲ [éxarélow ἡμῶν ἑτέρῳ γάμῳ προσομειλεῖν εἰ βουληθείη
ἀκωλύτως καὶ ἀνεμποδίστως.
(Divorce.)
P. Mon. 1, 47-48 574 A.D.
εἰ δὲ βουληθείημεν — — — πρῶτον μὲν ἔνοχοι φανησόμεθα τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ
κτὰ. (Agreement).
*P. Par. 21 bis, 18 c. 600 A. D.
μεταπωλεῖν εἰ βουλληθείης.
(Contract of Sale.)
εἰ δόξειε(ν)
The examples given here are only slightly different from
those on page 42.
162 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
ROB ΙΗ le c. 570 A.D.
eli τῷ θεῷ δόξειεν — — — ].
(This is the copy of a Marriage Contract. The reading is
derived from the original draft, P. Cair. 67310. The
meaning of the whole is not very clear.)
POBS Va 1287 585 A. Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ δόξειεν ἡμῖν ἐνάγειν σοι μηδὲν μὲν [ὠφελή]σει.
(Agreement)
This expression is not common.
εἰ εὑρεθείη
P. 5.1. 684, 13-14 4th-5th cent. A. D.
εἰ εἰὑ]ρεθείη [xa]7a γνώμην τῆς βουλῆς ὀνομασθείς.
P. R. 144, 8-9 5th-6th cent. A. Ὁ.
καὶ εἰ εὑρεθείη ὄξος ἢ ἀποίητος ἢ ὀζόμενος ἐξ αὐτοῦ.
(Conclusion in line 10 is: ὁμολογῶ ἀλλάξει σοι. ἀλλάξει =
ἀλλάξειν. Cp. P. Β. M. 999 below.)
P, B. M. 999, 11 538 A. D.
καὶ εἰ εὑρεθείη ὄξος κτλ.
Line 13 seems to give theconclusion: ἐπὲ τῷ με ἀλλάξαι σοι κτλ.
PERS ἌΝ ὙΠ] 8th A. Ὁ.
εἴπερ εὑρεθείην. (Will).
εἰ εὕροις
P. Cair. 67024, 28 C. ἘΝ ες ΤῈ
εἰ οὕτως ἔχοντα εὕροις.
Ib. 41-42
εἰ — — — μηδέποτε -- -- -- εὕροις.
(Imperial Rescript. No. 67025 is another copy.)
P. Cair. 67028, 19-20 Cu. ΨΑ ΤῸ
καὶ εἰ οὕτως ἔχοντα εὕροις, μὴ πρόσχῃς.
(A document of same kind as No. 67024.)
el παρασταίη
P. Cair. 67007, 16-17 c. 522 42m
πίρ!οσ[ἐϊδραμον [πρὸΪς [. . . ]ς ὅπως εἰ παρ[ασταίη] ὑμῖν xalrelAefoat
με κ[αὶ] ἐκδικῆσαί με.
(Complaint.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 163
P. Cair. 67003, 24-25 0.922 Ἀ- ὮΣ
ὅθεν παρακαλοῦμεν τὸ ὕψος ὑμῶν ἐνορκοῦντες κατὰ τῆς al{yilas Τριάδος
εἰ παρασταίη προστάξαι τῷ παγάρχῃ.
(Complaint.)
P. B. M. 1676, 59-60 Ceos0 Aap:
εἰ παρασταί[η] προστάξαι.
(Complaint.)
This formula is late, but common in complaints and petitions.
el συμβαίη
el συμβαίη, generally followed by an infinitive, is alate formula,
occurring in different kinds of documents. ἐὰν συμβαίη, however,
used in a different way occurs in a papyrus of 295 A. D.
PeLips. 29,°5 295 A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ, ὃ μὴ εἴη, συμβαίη τ (] μοι ἀνθρώπινον κτλ. (Will).
P. B. M. 1698, 8 6th A. D.
εἰ δὲ συμβαίη τινα ἐξ ἡμῶν παραβῆναι, with δώσειν in line 9 in
apodosis. (Lease).
Ea bee, 1712, 25 569 A. ἢ.
[kai εἴ] τις ἐξ ἡμῶν π]αραβῆναι τὰ ἔγγεραμμένα ὁμολογεῖ κτλ.
(Divorce. We have here a confusion of εἴ τις παραβαίη and
εἰ συμβαίη παραβῆναι.).
Pepe Wie 1/11,42 ς. 570 Α. ἢ.
καὶ εἰ συμβαίη μοί ποτε καιρῷ ἢ χρόνῳ καταφρονῆσαί σου, with
ἑτοίμως ἔχω in apodosis. (Marriage Contract.)
P. B. M. 1711 has several examples of εἰ συμβαίη αὐτὸν παρ-
αφρονεῖν at the end of the document.
ΡΒ 1751:27 585 A. D.
εἰ δὲ συμβαίη we κατά σου ἐπεξελθεῖν, with ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐμὲ παρασχεῖν in
apodosis, 1]. 28. (Agreement, with abandonment of claims.)
*P Par, 21 bis; 29 c. 600 A. D.
καὶ el... τις συμβαίη γενηθὲν ay’ ὁμοίων (ddc[ev] in 1. 29 is con-
clusion.)
ΚΡΎΑ 51 616 A. D.
eis τι κηνθις. . . συμβαίη γενεσθενθι (δόσι in 1. 52 is conclusion.)
*Ib. lines 44-45 616 A. D.
[εἰ] δὲ συμβαίη, ὃ μὴ εἴη, [διαδ]ίκησιν ἢ ἀμφισβήτησίν τινα γενέσθαι.
164 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt
εἰ οὕτω τύχοι
This formula occurs several times in late papyri.
P. B. M. 1902 (Recto) 5-6 6th A. D.
εἰ οὕτω τύχοι.
(Agreement).
P. B. M. 1686, 21 565 A. D.
πρὸς οἵαν οὖν εἰκὸς éooue(vnv)uérpnow ἐν τῷ ᾿Ανταιοπόλ(ει) εἰ οὕτω
τύχοι. (Sale).
εἰ φανείη
εἰ φανείη Occurs sometimes in the Roman period as well as in
the Byzantine.
P. Gocdsp. II (Cl. Phil. I, 1906), 10 Prob. 2nd A. D.
εἰ δὲ φανείη ἑτέρῳ προσῆκον ἢ προκατεσχημένον μὴ ἔσεσθ[αι] ἐμπόδιον
ἐκ τῆσδε τῆς παραθέσεως.
(Declaration.)
P. Tebt.-318, 22 166 A. D.
εἰ δὲ φ[άνειαν ἑτέρ᾽ῳ προσήΪΐκο]υσαι ἢ κτὰ. with μὴ ἔσεσίθαι] ἐμπόδιον
in apodosis.
(Notice of Claim.)
O. P. 237 (Pet. of Dionysia), Col. V, 8 186 A. ἢ.
οὐδὲν ἕτερον, οἶμαι, ἢ δηλῶν ὅτι εἰ τὰ ἀληθῆ φανείη μηδὲ κρίσεως
δεῖσθαι τὸ πρᾶγμα.
(Perhaps due to indirect discourse, secondary sequence.)
O. P. 83, 16 ff. 327 A. D.
εἰ δὲ ὕστερον valvelin|y] ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ μου [πωλῶν].
(Declaration by Egg-seller.)
*O. P. 902, 9 c. 465 A. D.
ἐμοῦ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντος εἰ καὶ φανείην χρεωστοῦντα αὐτῷ ἔγγράφως
πληρῶσαι.
(In this Petition a secondary tense precedes.)
P. B. M. 991, 19-20 6th A. D.
εἰ δὲ τις w μοι εἰοι ἐκὶ [ ‘you κυρειώτερος φανείη ἐν οἱῳδήποτε
καιρῷ ἐκτίσω σοι.
(Sale. As the editor says, the reading is uncertain, but
intended for ὃ μὴ εἴη).
P. Mil. 3 (Studi), 12 6th A. D.
καὶ εἰ φανείη ἐπιφανεσ. ..
(Fragment of a Division of Inheritance.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 165
Ἢ. P. 136 (= P. Cair. 10,103), 33 ΕΚ δ τὸ,
ἀποπληρώσω εἰ λοιπαδάριος φανείην.
(and again in 1. 96. (Contract.)
*P. B; M: 1344, 7 ff. 710 A.D.
éloln οὖν ἐπιστάμεΐἷνος ὡς] ἐὰν φανείης παραμε[λ]ήσαϊΪς τι To καθόλου
ἐκ τῆς ἐπιτροπῆς ἡμῶν ἢ καὶ εὕρομέν τινα ἐν τῇ διοικ(ήσει) σο[υ] ------
[συν]έφερεν σοι.
P. Lips. 103, 2nd Hand, end. Arab Period
ὡς εἰ gaveli|ny τι πἰαρ]αλείψα «“-» ἐν τῇ τοιαύτῃ καταγραφῇ «“παρ-
ασχεῖν» ἐν διπλῇ ποσότητι, with ὁμολογῶ as main verb.
(Concerning Taxes.)
el ὀφθείην
P. Lips. 64, 46 ff. c. 368 A. D.
εἰ μὴ ὀφθείης τοῦτο πεποιηκὼς With [πρ]οσταχθήσει
in apodosis. (Cp. also 1. 35).
SO aro 1015.22 CSA AT De
el yap τις ὀπτίη παραλιμπάνον
(Edict of Prefect. Conclusion is οἰκῆσαι κελεύω).
Bibs 1 {24,43 583 A. D.
καὶ εἰ ὀφθείην χρεωστῶν ὁ τετελευτηκὼς ἢ Kal χρεωστούμενος ἐφ᾽
ᾧ - -- - ποιήσασθαι.
τ
(Joint Will.)
εἰ χρεία γένοιτο
ἘΠ ΕΥ157.20 155... Ὁ:
εἰ χρεία γείνοιτο, with παρέξει in apodosis.
(Division of Property.)
P. B. M. 1164, k (in different hands, at end of
document) 21.2.4. Ds
εἰ xpia γένοιτο and εἰ χρεία γένοιτο (= in case of need.)
Pp. S. I. 298, 16 4th A. Ὁ.
εἰ χρεία γείνοιτο, παρέξομαι.
P. B. ΜΗ1032,.9 6th-7th cent. A.D.
εἰ δὲ χρεία γένοιτο τοῦ ἀπελθεῖν ὑμᾶς K[...... Jas Aev . . τὸν προκου-
paropa ἀπέλθατε.
166 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
εἰ γένοιτο
ΟΥ ΒΕ Aol av Lily ol 186 A.D.
ὅπερ οὐ καλῶς ἐνδέχεται, εἰ μὴ ἄνωθεν γένοιτο ἀντίγραφα.
Ib., line 39
εἴ τις γένοιτο ζήτησις.
ΒΝ Colvin CoPrRaz0je9 250 A.D.
εἰ γείνο[ι]το παρὰ τὰ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ [σωτηρίως διηγορευθ]έντα.
(In this document secondary tenses precede.)
P. Theres. 2, 13-14 4th A. ἢ.
εἰ μὴ παραγένοινΪτο.
(Context is very faulty.)
εἰ δοίην
There are very few examples, and those late.
PABEMat13 (ja 21 6th A. D.
εἰ δὲ Kal δοίη τις.
(Record of Lawsuit.)
Peep wie 1604 570? A. D.
εἰ μὴ ἀποδοί[η]ν ὑμῖν τὰ elpnué(va) κεράτια -- — — ἄδ[ειϊάν σοι δίδωμι
ἐκποιῆσαι. (Loan).
Ρ ΒΕ Mel 74.5 ΚΑ Ds
εἰ μὴ ἀποδοίην τὸν αὐτὸν λαχανόσίϊπερμον ᾿.
(Acknowledgment of Obligation.)
el εἴη
Examples are very scarce.
Pr ΘΟ 4475} 167 A.D.
ἢ εἴ τινες ἄγαμοι elev, πρὸς ἃς ἐὰν] μεταξὺ [ἀγάγωσι. (Epikrisis).
P. Hamb. 314, 4, a document of the same kind and of almost
the same date, is emended in this way, quite correctly I have
no doubt. The phrase occurs also in B. G. U. 113 (143 A. D.)
and B. G. U. 265 (148 A. D.).
P. Gen. 14, 10 Byz. Per.
ἐκινδύνευσα εἰς τὴν ἔν[ν]οιαν efi μ]ὴ εἴη.
(The meaning is not quite clear.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 167
εἰ ποιήσειεν
P. Flor I, 83 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
παραγγέλλεται — — — ἐνρανῆ ἑαυτὸν καταστῆσαι ἢ εἰ μὴ τοῦτο ποιή-
σειεν ἐντὸς τῶν ὁρισθεισῶν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἡμερῶν, -- -- -- ἀναπεμφθήσεσθαι.
(Declaration of the Strategus.)
C. P. R. 19, 24 90. ΔῸΣ
εἰ μὴ ποιήσιεν ἀπολέγεσθαι αὐτήν.
(Complaint. The sequence is secondary.)
P. Flor. 384, 31-32 5th? A. D.
ἐὰν δὲ τοῦτο] μὴ ποιήσιας, ὑπεύθυνος ἔσῃ σύ τε.
(Lease of Bathing Establishment. Perhaps the emendation
should be εἰ, instead of ἐάν).
P. Flor. 284, 12 538 A. Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσειεν, ἑτοίμως ἔχομεν οἱ ἔγγυηταὶ παρασχεῖν.
(Surety.)
Po tiamb. 23, 36 569 A. ἢ.
Kal εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσοιμεν, παρέξωμεν.
(In this document παρέξωμεν = παρέξομεν. The future optative
is curious.)
εἰ δυνηθείην
OF P25 939215 4th A.D.
εἴ πως ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου δυνηθείης.
(Sequence is secondary.)
P. Mon. 6 583. Α. Ὁ.
εἰ τοῦτο δυνηθείη ὁ ἐνάγων ἀποδεῖξαι
(The verb of the apodosis is παρασχεῖν, dependent on
συνεφώνησαν. Civil Process.)
P. Mon. 13, 60 594 A.D.
εἰ δὲ μὴ δυνηθείημεν — — — ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἡμᾶς διδόναι.
(Sale of a Court.)
PBs M. 1733; 63 594 A. ἢ.
εἰ δὲ μὴ δυνηθείην ἐφ᾽ @ ἐμὲ καταβάλλειν σοι.
(Sale.)
OTHER OPTATIVES IN POSSIBLE PROTASIS
Here we have a few examples from the earlier periods, as well
as many from the Byzantine age.
168 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
P. Tebt. 28, 12 ΘΟ 4 87 0:
ci{s} ἐπιβάλλοιμεν.
(But the context is bad.)
P. Hamb. 29, 12 ff. c. 89 A.D.
ἀναγκαίως ἀσφαλίζοντ[α]ι, ὅτι ἰἄϊλλως ob δύνανται λέγειν τὴν δίκην,
εἰ μὴ λάβοιεν τὰ βιβλία παρὰ τῶν] ἐπιτρόπων.
(In this document, this politeness or submissiveness seems
due to a request; for the papyrus continues:
καὶ ἀξιοῦσιν ὑπομνηματισθῆϊναι] τὴν ἔντευξιν αὐτῶν.)
Β. 6. U. 969, 23-25 142? A.D.
ἔθος δ᾽ ἐστὶν τὸν ἔχοντα ἰδίους ὄνους τούτοις ἀπεργάσεσθαι, εἰ δὲ
μὴ ἔχοι πενθήμερον μετρῖν εἰς τὸ δημόσιον.
(From the Official Journal of a Judge, carefully written.)
B. G. U. 983, 3-4 c. 140 4. p.
οἰὑϊκ ἄϊν] τις [ἐπ]ὶ τὸ [βῆμά σου καταφύγοϊι, εἰ μὴ σφό[δ]ρα ἀδι]-
κηθείη τι.
(Petition. A complete future less vivid condition is
unusual.)
P. Gen. 1, end 158A. D.
εἰ μάθοιμι — — — ἔἐπανορθώϊσοΪμαι.
O. P. 1100, 15-16 206 A. D.
εἰ dé.. | [..]. ροιντο -- -- -- καὶ περιμένοιεν.
(The context is bad. In 1. 21 occurs φωραθεῖεν and a
future indicative follows shortly.)
*O. P. 1411, 16 Prob. 260 A. D.
εἰ μὴ πειθαρχήσιαν τῇδε τῇ παρ]αγγελίᾳ, πειραθήσονται.
(Proclamation of Strategus.)
P. Ryl. 117, 24 269 A. D.
[π]ρὸς εἴ τι ἕϊτ]ερον ὀνόματι τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου ζητηθείη.
ΡΕΘ ΘΟ: 294? A.D.
εἰ yap τοιοῦτόν τι διαλάθοι τολμηθέν.
C. P. Herm. 95, 14 3rd-4th cent. A. D.
καὶ εἰ δέοι ἔξω [τῶν] λάκκων mpocddcews. (Petition.)
ETS | ΝΙΝ ee Bel 314 A.D.
εἰ παρίδοιεν τὴν τούτου καλλιέργειαν [ ] ἐπιδίδωμι τάδε τὰ
βιβλία and in line 6 εἴ τινα εὔλογον ἔχοιεν (ει is written above
the c of παρίδοιεν).
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyit 169
*O. P. 1101, 17-19 τ ΟΥ̓Δ ΝΣ ΤΡ
εἰ γάρ τις τῶν ἰδιωτῶν παρὰ ἰστραιώτ]ῃ τι ἔχοι kali] θαρσήσῃ
- -- -ἰ[καὶ -- ---Ἰπέποιθεν, προσείτω. (Edict of Perfect.)
ΟΥ̓ 1878: 461 A.D.
ἀναγνωσόμεθα, εἰ προστάξιέν σου τὸ μέγεθος.
(Report of Proceedings for Debt.)
ἘΠ Niet OS, Abe A472 A.D.
εἰ δὲ ἀπολειφθείη Kal μὴ παραστήσω ἔγὼ αὐτὸς οἴκοθεν ὑ[π]ὲρ [α]ὐτοῦ
ἀποδώσω.
P. Cair. 67089, 25 Byz. Period
εἰ δὲ καὶ ὡς εἰκὸς πειραθείη τις τῶν μετὰ ταῦτα παροχλῆσαι αὐτὴ
(In the apodosis is παρεσκεύασα. αὐτὴ = αὐτὴν ἴ).
-P. B. M. 1795, 8-10 6th A. ἢ.
καὶ εἰ καταγνωσθείη τις ἐξ ἡμῶν ὡς aba κομισάμενός τινα Kal μὴ
φανερώσῃ τῷ ἑϊτ]έρῳ παρέξει (Ξ- λάθρα).
eal wR MN Ge ee aes | 6th A. Ὁ.
εἰ δὲ καὶ δοίη τις and in 1. 53 εἰ δὲ ἐπιχειρήσειεν. (Record of
Lawsuit.)
GP. 11061.7 6th A. D.
εἰ yap ἐπιμείνοιεν, πλῆθος ἐπιστήσεται στρατιωτικόν.
P. Grenf. I, 60, 40 581 A.D.
[εἰ δὲ ἀσθενήσοιμι περὶ τὴν Exdlknloww -———[ ἑτοίμως] ἔχω.
(This is largely supplied; but compare the next example.
This is a Sale.)
P. Mon. 4, 33 581 A. D.
εἰ δὲ ἀσθενήσαιμι περὶ τὴν τούτου καθαροποίησιν Kal ἀποσώβησιν,
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐμὲ παρασχεῖν.
(Sale of a Boat.)
P. B. M. 1727, 47 583 A. D.
εἰ δὲ τις ἐθελήσειεν ἐκ τῶν τέκνων ἡμῶν ἢ ἄλλος ἐπελεύσασθαι.
(Joint Will.)
P. Mon. 14, 74-75 594 A.D.
καὶ εἰ ἐπιχειρήσειεν, οὐδὲν μὲν ὠφελεθήσεται τοῦ ἐπιχειρήματος,
ἐπιγνώσεται δὲς (Agreement.)
P. Β. Μ. 483, 85 616 A. D.
el δ᾽ ἕτερος ἐξ ἡμῶν παραβαίη ταύτην τὴν ἐμφυτευτικὴν ὁμολογίαν,
παρέξει.
(Perpetual Lease.)
170 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
APPARENT OPTATIVES
The following are very confused; but are perhaps of interest
for that very reason.
*POB.SM: 1732, 5-6 586? A. ἢ.
ὥσδε ἀγροᾶσθαι καὶ στέρξαι καὶ ἐμμεῖναι τὰ ὁρισθησόμενα, εἰ δὲ
μὴ στέρξαι καὶ ἐμμεῖναι τὰ κριτήρια ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐμὲ τοῦ ἔγγυητοῦ παρα-
Cs
σχεῖν.
(A Contract of Surety. Very illiterate, as the editor says.
What we should have is: ἀκροᾶσθαι -- -- -- τοῖς ὁρισθησομένοις
στ - στέρξειαν καὶ ἐμμείνειαν τοῖς κριτηρίοις,. -- -- -- τὸν ἐγγυητήν.
But I think the writer simply put down infinitives in the con-
ditional clause, without regard to grammatical construction.)
P. Mon. 11, 56-57 586 A.D.
Tov δὲ τολμήσαντα ἐγκαλεῖν σοι ἢ ἀντιπ «οι» εἴν σοι ------ μηδὲν μέν
ὠφελήσει[ε)ν, παρέξει <p> δὲ.
(Sale of House. The editor calls attention to this: τολμήσ-
avra is an error for τολμήσοντα. ὠφελήσειεν and παρέξει are
impossible after τόν δὲ τολμήσαντα, instead of εἰ δέ τις τολμήσειε.
In line 58 occurs the infinitive ἰσχύειν, correctly. The con-
struction is badly confused; compare P. Mon. 12, which
follows.)
P. Mon. 12, 43-44 591 A.D.
ἢ ἀντιποιεῖϊν ἐπι]ϊχ[ειίρῆσαι παραβῆναι ἢ πίαρασα]λεῦ! σαι] |
ταύτην τὴν πρᾶσιν μηδὲν μέν ὀφελέσειζ{εὶν, παρέξει δὲ.
(Sale of House. Other documents of this group show that
we must have in this place future indicatives or future
infinitives. Certainly in this example the editor is right in
suggesting ὠφελήσειν and παρέξειν as the correct forms. ἰσχύειν
in line 45 supports this.)
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyrt 171
INDEX OF GREEK WORDS AND PHRASES
A
ἃ ἂν ἀπολίπω, 79
αἱρῶμαι in rel. clauses, 69-71
αἰτέω ἵνα with subj., 108
ἀξιῶ va(drws) with subj., 104,
105
ἀξιῶ καὶ δέομαι ὅπως with subj.
106
ἀξιώσῃ in wish orrequest, 123
ἀποστέλλω ἵνα (ὅπως) with subj.
114, 115
ἀφ᾽ ἡςἡμέρας in time expr., 129,
130
ἀφ᾽ οὗ in time expr., 129, 130
ἄχρις (ἂν) with subj., 137-141
ἄχρις ὅταν with subj., 137-141
ἄχρις οὗ (ἂν) with subj., 137-142
B
βλέπε μὴ withsubj., 96,97,101,
102
βουληθείης, etc. in rel. clauses,
144, 145
βουληθείης in other clauses, 146,
159 161
βούλωμαι in τεῖ. clauses, 71-73,
80
Γ
γένοιτο ἄν, 158
γένοιτο, γίνοιτο in wish, 148
γράφω ἵνα (ὅπως) with 510.»
109-111
Δ
δέῃ, 86
δέομαι, 85, 86, 107
δέομαι ἵνα (ὅπως) with subj., 105
δίδωμι, subj. forms, 26, 43,
58,64, 85, 97,108, 112, 153,
opt. forms, 143, 144, 153,
156, 166
dot, 26
δοκιμάσῃς, 83
δοκοῦν, 42, 66, 105
δόξαν (δόξον), 42, 105
δύναισθε ἄν, 158
δυνηθεῖμεν ἄν, 158
δυνηθῶμεν, 36, 59, 124
δύνωμαι, 81, 82
δώσῃ, 26
E
ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι, 50, 51, 70, 71
ἀμελήσῃς, 58
ἀργήσῃ, ἀτακτήσῃ, 56, 57
βούλωμαι, 50, 51
γένηται, 49, 50
γράφω, 45
δέῃ, 60
δέτι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, 51, 52
δέ τις ἄβροχος γένηται, 48
δοκῇ, δόξῃ, 39-41
δύνωμαι, 59
ἐθέλω, 50, 51
εἰδῶ, 60, 61
ἔλθω, 58
ἐνδειξώμεθα, 59, 60
ἐπέλθω, 44
ἐπιστέλλω, 62
εὕρω, 44, 45
CH, 53
ἣν (ἧσαν), 27-30
ἣ ταῦτα ἀληθῆ, 45, 46
172 Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
ἐὰν ἡδέως ἔχῃς, 62
θέλεις, 51, 67
ἴδω, 60, 61
κελεύω, 62
κρίνῃς, 61
λαμβάνω, 57
μάθω, 61
μὴ ἀποδῶ, 43
μὴ βεβαιοῖ, βεβαιώσῃ, 56
ὀφειλήσῃς, 62
παραβαίνῃ, 55, 56, 79
παρασυγγραφῇ, 55, 56, 79
παριστῶ, παραστήσω, 54, 55
περιγένωμαι, 53
περιῇ, 53
ποιῶ, 46, 47
προσπίπτῃ, Οἱ, 62
σοῦ τῇ τύχῃ δόξῃ, 39, 40
συμβῇ, 54
συντελῆται, 62
τελευτήσω, 52
φαίνηται, 38, 39
φαίνωμαι, 60
χρείαν ἔχῃς, 47, 48
ἔγβῇ in rel. clauses., 86
εἰ βουληθείη, 161
γένοιτο, 166
δὲ τοῦτο ποιήσω, 47, 63
διδοῖς, διδῶις, 64
δοίην, 166
δοκεῖ, 41, 112, 156
δόξειεν, 42, 162
δόξῃ, 41, 65, 66
δυνηθείην, 167
εἴη, 161, 166
εὑρεθείη, 162
οὕτω τύχοι, 164
ὀφθείην, 165
παρασταίη, 162
ποιήσειεν, 167
συμβαίη, 163
φαίνεται, 39, 156
φανείη, 164, 165
φανῶμεν, 65
χρεία γένοιτο, 165
εἴη, 144, 152, in ind. disc., 159,
160
ein av, 157-159
εἴη ἂν τὸ δέον, 157-158
εἴη ἂν ὡς θέλω, 157
εἴη μὲν μοι ὑγιαίνοντι διοικεῖν,
90 19]
εἶπον ἵνα, 115
εἰς ὃ τύχοι μέρος, 144
ἐλπίζω, 119, 120
ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ ὅρκῳ, 55, 63, 149
ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ, 55, 149,
150
ἔνοχος ἔσομαι, 150
ἐντέλλομαι ἵνα (ὅπως), 111, 112
ἐντυγχάνω ἵνα (ὅπως), 108, 109
ἐξ οὗ ἐὰν αἱρῆται, 68
ἐπὰν with subj., 129-132
ἐπειδὰν with subj., 129-132
ἐπιστέλλω ἵνα (ὅπως), 113, 114
>
ἐπιμέλου σεαυτοῦ ἵνα(ὅπως)
ws
a
ὑγιαίνῃς, 32
ἔργον ποίησον, 119
ἐρωτάω ἵνα (ὅπως), 108
ἔστ᾽ ἂν with subj., 137-141
εὖ ἂν ἔχοι, 157
εὐορκοῦντι μέν μοι εὖ εἴη, 150
εὑρεθείη, εὑρηθείη, 145,154, 162
εὕρω, 82, 83
εὔχομαι ἵνα (ὅπως), 104, 107
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν βουληθῇς χρόνον, 73
ἐφ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν ζῇς χρόνον, 73, 74
ἐφ᾽ ὅσον περιῇ χρόνον, 73, 74
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri 173
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ with subj., fut. ind., 92,
111
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ with infin., 111, 167,199
ἕως (ἂν) with subj., 126, 137-
142
ἕως ὅτε with subj., 137 ff.
ἕως ὅτου with subj., 137 ff.
ἕως of (dv) with subj., 137 ff.
Z
ζητηθείη, 168
H
ἣ ἡμέρᾳ in time expr., 129,
130, 131
ἢ οἱ ἂν ὦσιν γείτονες πάντοθεν, 76,
77
ἢ ὅ σαι ἐὰν ὦσι, 74-76
ἦν,λῆσαν, 27-30
Θ
6éns in rel. clauses, 80, 81
θελήσῃ in wish or request, 120,
22123
θέλω ἵνα (ὅπως), 107
Ι
va with final clauses, 31 ff.
va with opt. in final clauses,
143, 144
ἵνα with subj. in unusual
constrs., 120, 121
iva εἰδῇς, 33
ἵνα ὦ evbepyernuevos, 33, 35
K
καθ᾽ ὃν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι τρόπον, 69
καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, 156, 157
καλῶς ἂν ποιήσαις, 155, 156
καλῶς ποιήσεις,118,125,132,155
καταξιώσῃ in wish and request,
12022 VZS
κελεύω ἵνα (ὅπως), 115, 116
κτήσωμαι in rel. clauses, 79
M
μελησάτω ὅπως, 119
μέχρις (ἂν) with subj., 137-141
μέχρις οὗ With subj., 137-141
μὴ ἄλλως ποιήσῃς, 96
μὴ αμελήσατε, 100, 101
μὴ ἀμελήσῃς, 93-95
μμὴ ἀφῇς, 98
μὴ γένοιτο, 148
μὴ γνωσθῇ, 98
μὴ δεηθῇς, 98, 99
μὴ δόξῃ, μὴ δόξῃς, 91
μὴ δῷς, 97
μὴ θαυμάσῃς, 99
μὴ θελήσῃς, 99
μὴ καταλείπῃς, 98
μὴ κατάσχῃς, 97, 98
μὴ ὀκνήσῃς and other verbs of
fearing, 99
μὴ ὀλιγωρήσῃς, μὴ ὀλιγωρήσατε, 99
μὴ with pres. imp. in prohibs.,
100
μὴ in exprs. of fear, 101-103
O
ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι, 70, 71
ἐὰν προσοφειλέσῃ, 77
ἐὰν φανῶ ὀφείλων, 77
μὴ γείνοιτο, 148
μὴ εἴη, 151, 152, 164
οἱ ἂν ὦσιν γείτονες πάντοθεν, 76,
174 Use of Subjunctive and Opiative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
οἷς ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι, 67
ὁπηνίκ᾽ ἂν with subj., 126, 129-
132, with opt., 146
ὁπόταν with subj., 126, 129-
132, with opt. 146, 147
ὁπόταν βουληθείης, 146, 147
ὅπου ἄν, 78
ὅπως with final clauses, 31 ff.
ὅπως ἂν with final clauses, 32
ὅπως εἰδῇς, 33
ὅρα μὴ ἀμελήσῃς, 95, 102
ὅρα μὴ κατάσχῃς, 98
ὃς ἄν, 86, 87
ὅσαι ἐὰν ὦσι, 74, 76
ὁσάκις ἐὰν with subj., 126
ὅταν with subj., 126, 129-132,
with opt., 146
ὅτε τύχοι, 145
οὗ ἂν ἐπιφέρηται, 78
οὐ μὴ with subj., 92, 93
II
πᾶν ποίησον, 119
παραβαίνω in rel. clauses, 79
παραγγέλλω ἵνα (ὅπως), 116
παρακαλῶ ἵνα (ὅπως), 106, 107
παρακληθῇ in wish or request,
220,123
παρασυγγραφῇ in rel. clauses, 79
ποιήσωμαι in rel. clauses, 86
πράξῃς in rel. clauses, 83, 84, 87
mpiv with subj , 128
προνοέομαι ἵνα (ὅπως), 117, 118
πρὸ τοῦ with subj, 128
Σ
συντάσσω in rel. clauses, 83
Tr
τάσσω and compounds, fol-
lowed by ἵνα, ὅπως, ὅπως ἄν,
ΠΡ
Υ
ὑποτάσσω ta ὅπως, 113
d
φροντιείη, 155
φρόντισον ἵνα (ὅπως), 117
φυλάξῃ in wish or req., φυλάξῃς,
1225103
xX
χαίροις in wish, 147
χαρίζοιο ἄν, 156
χαρίζοισθε in wish, 154
Ὧ
ᾧ ἐὰν αἱρῶνται τρόπῳ, 69
ὧν ἂν χρείαν ἔχῃς, 81
ὧν ἐὰν αἱρῶμαι, 67, 68
ὧν ἐὰν ἐπενέγκῃ, 84
ὡς ἄν (as soon as) with subj.,
133
ws ἄν (as soon as) in N. T.
Greek, 136
ws ἄν (assoon as), equivalents.
134
ὡς ἄν, doubtful examples, 134
135
ὡς ἂν δοκῇ, δόξῃ, 84
ὡς ἂν κρίνῃς, 84
ὡς ἂν παραλάβω, 84
ὡς ἐὰν αἱ ρῶμαι, 69, 70
ὥστε clause of purpose or
direction, 36, 111
Use of Subjunctive and Optative Moods in the Non-Literary Papyri
INDEX OF N. T. REFERENCES
Mark 8:37, 26.
Mark 9:30, 26
Mark 14:36, 92.
eukert 52125575.
Luke 17:8, 92.
John 14:1 and 27, 100.
Acts 10:33; 156:
Rom. 15:24, 136
1 Cor. 11:34, 136.
EGC orsl6-45.27
Phil. 2:19, 99
ῬἘΠῚ1 52:25: 136
1 Thess. 5:14, 99
1 Tim. 4:14, 96
James 2:1-5, 37
INDEX OF SUGGESTED EMENDATIONS
. Alex. 3:2, 157
. Amh. 68:15-16, 113
G. U. 948:26, 154
B. M. 301:15, 149
. Flor. 118:1-3, 114
Gen. 52:5ff, 122
Magd. 27: end, 35
. P. 611: end, 128
OVUM UU UU hw Ὁ Ὁ Ὁ
Ambh. 140: 17-18, 149
B. M. 243:21-22, 58
B. M. 948 (Verso) :3, 29
. Cair. 67089 :34-35, 65
. Flor. 384:31-32, 167
. Grenf. 1:60, 40; 169
. Grenf. I, 61:7-12, 107
. P. 1294:15-16, 29
ee t414 6117
Pld 75: 755 5}
πα 20: 20. 5
ἜΡΩΣ 42:19. 1560
ΡΟΝ 30; necro
P2R 198.8 556
EaRiL9S2 bia 20
ΘΒ 91: 15:51]
ΘΠ 27: 8:0 102
Sl Osseo 101]
Se ΘΟ: 2.02
. Tebt. 43: 35, 118
. Tebt. 415: 3-4, 95
WUD YDYTIAANWTOOS
INDEX OF INTERPRETATIONS
ge os Bige!
. land. 13: end, 154
SBM. 17272.25-26, 151
. B. M. 1732: 5-6, 170
P. Par. 18: 10ff, 142
P. Petr. II, 40a: end,142
P. S. 1.521: 9-10, 134
175
Date Due
Ἵ,
“
Razr ed
Ἔχις